Configuring FDM-Managed Devices

Interfaces

You can use CDO to configure and edit data interfaces or the management/diagnostic interface on an FDM-managed device.

At this time, CDO can only configure routed interfaces and bridge groups. It does not support the configuration passive interfaces.

Guidelines and Limitations for Firepower Interface Configuration

When you use CDO to configure the device, there are several limitations to interface configuration. If you need any of the following features, you must use Firepower Management Center to configure the device.

Firewall

  • Routed firewall mode only is supported. You cannot configure transparent firewall mode interfaces.

  • Only physical firepower 1010 devices support interfaces configured for switch port mode. See Switch Port Mode Interfaces for an FDM-Managed Device for more information.

Passive

  • At this time, CDO does not identify passive interface mode in the interface table ad you cannot configure passive or ERSPAN interfaces. You must use the FDM-managed UI to configure and identify passive interfaces.

IPS-Only Mode

  • You cannot configure interfaces to be inline (in an inline set), or inline tap, for IPS-only processing. IPS-only mode interfaces bypass many firewall checks and only support IPS security policy. In comparison, Firewall mode interfaces subject traffic to firewall functions such as maintaining flows, tracking flow states at both IP and TCP layers, IP defragmentation, and TCP normalization.

  • Optionally, you can configure IPS functions for this firewall mode traffic according to your security policy.

EtherChannel

CDO supports read, create, and abilities for devices running Version 6.5 and later. To create Etherchannel interfaces, see Add an EtherChannel Interface for an FDM-Managed Device for more information. To create

  • You can configure up to 48 EtherChannels on physical Firepower devices, although how many interfaces can be active at a time depends on your device model. For device-specific limitations, see Device-Specific Requirements.

  • All interfaces in the channel group must be the same media type and capacity, and must be set to the same speed and duplex. The media type can be either RJ-45 or SFP; SFPs of different types (copper and fiber) can be mixed. You cannot mix interface capacities (for example 1GB and 10GB interfaces) by setting the speed to be lower on the larger-capacity interface.

  • The device to which you connect the EtherChannel must also support 802.3ad EtherChannels.

  • The FDM-managed device does not support LACPDUs that are VLAN-tagged. If you enable native VLAN tagging on the neighboring switch using the Cisco IOS vlan dot1Q tag native command, then the FDM-managed device will drop the tagged LACPDUs. Be sure to disable native VLAN tagging on the neighboring switch.

  • All FDM-managed device configuration refers to the logical EtherChannel interface instead of the member physical interfaces.


    Note


    Interfaces set up as portchannels can only use physical interfaces, redundant interfaces, and subinterfaces are supported as bridge group member interfaces.


Bridge Groups

At this time, CDO supports the configuration of one bridge group. To determine if your device supports bridge groups, see Bridge Group Compatibility in FDM-Managed Device Configurations for more information.

When adding an interface to a bridge group, keep the following in mind:

  • The interface must have a name.

  • The interface cannot have any IPv4 or IPv6 addresses defined for it, either static or served through DHCP.

  • BVI can have either VLAN interfaces or other routed interfaces as a member interface, but you cannot have both as member interfaces on a single BVI.

  • BVI can have either VLAN interfaces or other routed interfaces as a member interface, but you cannot have both as member interfaces on a single BVI.

  • The interface cannot be Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)

  • The interface cannot be associated with a security zone (if it is in a zone). You must delete any NAT rules for the interface before you can add it to a bridge group.

  • Enable and disable the member interfaces individually. Thus, you can disable any unused interfaces without needing to remove them from the bridge group. The bridge group itself is always enabled.

  • You can configure the interfaces that will be members of the bridge group. See Configure a Bridge Group for interface requirements and creation.

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

  • You cannot configure Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) for IPv4. If the Internet interface is connected to a DSL, cable modem, or other connection to your ISP, and your ISP uses PPPoE to provide your IP address, you must use the FDM to configure these settings.

VLAN

To configure VLAN interfaces and VLAN members, see Configure an FDM-Managed Device VLAN for more information. To configure VLAN for switch port mode, see Configure an FDM-Managed Device VLAN for Switch Port Mode for more information.

  • The interface must be physical.

  • The interface cannot be management-only.

  • The interface cannot be associated as any other type of interface, including BVI, subinterfaces, another VLAN interface, EtherChannel, etc.

  • The interface cannot be a BVI member or an etherchannel member.

  • Device models support varying numbers of VLAN members. See Maximum Number of VLAN Members by Device Model for more information.


    Note


    To configure VLAN for your environment, see Configure Firepower VLAN Subinterfaces and 802.1Q Trunking for more information.


Network Module Cards

Optional network module installations are limited to the ASA 5515-X, 5525-X, 5545-X, and 5555-X, and the Firepower 2100 series devices.

  • Cards are only discovered during bootstrap (that is, initial installation or reimage, or when switching between local/remove management). CDO sets the correct defaults for speed and duplex for these interfaces. If you replace an optional card with one that changes the speed/duplex options for the interfaces, without changing the total number of interfaces available, reboot the device so that the system recognizes the correct speed/duplex values for the replaced interfaces. From an SSH or Console session with the device, enter the reboot command. Then, using CDO, edit each physical interface that had capability changes and select valid speed and duplex options, as the system does not automatically correct your original settings. Deploy your changes right away to ensure correct system behavior.

  • You cannot enable or disable network modules or perform breakout online insertion and removal (OIR) of interfaces on FDM-managed Secure Firewall 3100 series devices.


  • Note


    Replacing a card with one that changes the total number of interfaces, or removing interfaces that were referred to by other objects, can result in unexpected problems. If you need to make this kind of change, please first remove all references to the interfaces you will remove, such as security zone membership, VPN connections, and so forth. We also suggest you do a backup prior to making the change.


Interfaces on Virtual FDM-Managed Devices

  • You cannot add or remove interfaces without reinitializing a virtual FDM-managed device. You must execute these actions in an FDM-managed device.


    Note


    If you replace interfaces with ones that have different speed/duplex capabilities, reboot the device so that the system recognizes the new speed/duplex values with the following procedure: from the device's CLI console, enter the reboot command. Then, in CDO, edit each interface that had capability changes and select valid speed and duplex options, as the system does not automatically correct your original settings. Deploy your changes right away to ensure correct system behavior.


Maximum Number of VLAN Members by Device Model

The device model limits the maximum number of VLAN subinterfaces that you can configure. Note that you can configure subinterfaces on data interfaces only, you cannot configure them on the management interface. The following table explains the limits for each device model.

Model

Maximum VLAN Subinterfaces

Firepower 1010

60

Firepower 1120

512

Firepower 1140, Firepower 1150

1024

Firepower 2100

1024

Secure Firewall 3100

1024

Firepower 4100

1024

Firepower 9300

1024

ASA 5508-X

50

ASA 5515-X

100

ASA 5516-X

100

ASA 5525-X

200

ASA 5545-X

300

ASA 5555-X

500

ISA 3000

100

Firepower Data Interfaces

CDO supports configuring routed interfaces and bridge virtual interfaces on FDM-managed devices.

Routed Interfaces

Each Layer 3 routed interface (or subinterface) requires an IP address on a unique subnet. You would typically attach these interfaces to switches, a port on another router, or to an ISP/WAN gateway.

You can assign a static address, or you can obtain one from a DHCP server. However, if the DHCP server provides an address on the same subnet as a statically-defined interface on the device, the system will disable the DHCP interface. If an interface that uses DHCP to get an address stops passing traffic, check whether the address overlaps the subnet for another interface on the device.

You can configure both IPv6 and IPv4 addresses on a routed interface. Make sure you configure a default route for both IPv4 and IPv6. This task will need to be performed on the FDM-managed device using Firepower Device Manager. See "Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager, Version x.x.x", The Basics > Routing for information about configuring a default route.

Bridge Groups and Bridge Virtual Interfaces

A bridge group is a group of interfaces that the FDM-managed device bridges instead of routes. Bridged interfaces belong to a bridge group, and all interfaces are on the same network. The bridge group is represented by a Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI) that has an IP address on the bridge network. Interfaces included in the bridge group are called "members."

You can route between routed interfaces and BVIs, if you name the BVI. In this case, the BVI acts as the gateway between member interfaces and routed interfaces. If you do not name the BVI, traffic on the bridge group member interfaces cannot leave the bridge group. Normally, you would name the interface so that you can route member interfaces to the Internet.

FDM-managed devices only support one bridge group, therefore, CDO can only manage that one bridge group and cannot create additional bridge groups on the device. CDO can only manage BVIs on FDM-managed devices installed directly on hardware, not on virtual FDM-managed device instances.

One use for a bridge group in routed mode is to use extra interfaces on the FDM-managed device instead of an external switch. You can attach endpoints directly to bridge group member interfaces. You can also attach switches to add more endpoints to the same network as the BVI.

Passive Interfaces

Passive interfaces monitor traffic flowing across a network using a switch SPAN (Switched Port Analyzer) or mirror port. The SPAN or mirror port allows for traffic to be copied from other ports on the switch. This function provides the system visibility within the network without being in the flow of network traffic. When configured in a passive deployment, the system cannot take certain actions such as blocking or shaping traffic. Passive interfaces receive all traffic unconditionally and no traffic received on these interfaces is retransmitted.

At this time, CDO has limited support for managing passive interfaces on the FDM-managed device:

  • Passive interfaces must be configured on the FDM-managed device.

  • Routed interfaces cannot be changed to passive interfaces and passives interfaces cannot be changed to routed interfaces using CDO.

  • CDO does not identify passive interfaces in the interface table.

Management/Diagnostic Interface

The physical port labeled Management (or for FDM-managed device virtual, the Management 0/0 virtual interface) actually has two separate interfaces associated with it.

  • Management virtual interface-This IP address is used for system communication. This is the address the system uses for Smart Licensing and to retrieve database updates. You can open management sessions to it (Firepower Device Manager and CLI). You must configure a management address, which is defined on System Settings > Management Interface.

  • Diagnostic physical interface-The physical Management port is actually named Diagnostic. You can use this interface to send syslog messages to an external syslog server. Configuring an IP address for the Diagnostic physical interface is optional. The only reason to configure the interface is if you want to use it for syslog. This interface appears, and is configurable, on the Inventory > Interfaces page. The Diagnostic physical interface only allows management traffic, and does not allow through traffic.

(Hardware devices.) The recommended way to configure Management/Diagnostic is to not wire the physical port to a network. Instead, configure the Management IP address only, and configure it to use the data interfaces as the gateway for obtaining updates from the Internet. Then, open the inside interfaces to HTTPS/SSH traffic (by default, HTTPS is enabled) and open Firepower Device Manager using the inside IP address. This task you must perform on Firepower Device Manager directly. See "Configuring the Management Access List" in the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for instructions.

For FDM-managed device virtual, the recommended configuration is to attach Management0/0 to the same network as the inside interface, and use the inside interface as the gateway. Do not configure a separate address for Diagnostic.


Note


For special instructions on how to edit the Management interface see Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for Firepower version 6.4 or higher. Open the guide and navigate to The Basic > Interfaces > Management/Diagnostic Interface. Management interface configuration should be done on the Firepower Device Manager.


Interface Settings

Use these topics to configure interface settings.

Use of Security Zones in Firepower Interface Settings

Each interface can be assigned to a single security zone. You then apply your security policy based on zones. For example, you can assign the inside interface to the inside zone; and the outside interface to the outside zone. You can configure your access control policy to enable traffic to go from inside to outside, but not from outside to inside, for example.

Each zone has a mode, either routed or passive. This relates directly to the interface mode. You can add routed and passive interfaces only to the same mode security zone.

Bridge Virtual Interfaces (BVIs) are not added to security zones. Only member interfaces are added to security zones.

You do not include the Diagnostic or Management interface in a zone. Zones apply to data interfaces only.

CDO does not currently support the management, monitoring, or use of Virtual Tunnel Interface (VTI) tunnels on ASA or FDM-managed devices. Devices with configured VTI tunnels can be onboarded to CDO but it ignores VTI interfaces. If a security zone or static route references a VTI, CDO reads the security zone and static route without the VTI reference. CDO support for VTI tunnels is coming soon.

See Security Zone Object for more information about security zones.

Assign an FDM-Managed Device Interface to a Security Zone

Before you Begin

An interface has the following limitations when adding a security zone:

  • The interface must have a name.

  • The interface cannot be management-only. This option is enabled and disabled from the Advanced tab of the interface.

  • You cannot assign a security zone to a bridge group interface.

  • You cannot assign a security zone to an interface configured for switchport mode.

  • CDO does not currently support the management, monitoring, or use of Virtual Tunnel Interface (VTI) tunnels on ASA or FDM-managed devices. Devices with configured VTI tunnels can be onboarded to CDO but it ignores VTI interfaces. If a security zone or static route references a VTI, CDO reads the security zone and static route without the VTI reference. CDO support for VTI tunnels is coming soon.

Assign a Firepower Interface to a Security Zone

Use the following procedure to associate a security zone to an existing interface:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD device and select the FDM-managed device you want to modify.

Step 4

In the Management pane located to the right, click Interfaces.

Step 5

Select the interface you want to add a security zone to and click Edit.

Step 6

Use the Security Zone drop-down menu and select the security zone you want associated with this interface.

Note

 

If need to, ceate a new security zone from this drop-down menu by clicking Create New.

Step 7

Click Save.

Step 8

Deploy Configuration Changes from CDO to FDM-Managed Device.


Use of Auto-MDI/MDX in Firepower Interface Settings

For RJ-45 interfaces, the default auto-negotiation setting also includes the Auto-MDI/MDIX feature. Auto-MDI/MDIX eliminates the need for crossover cabling by performing an internal crossover when a straight cable is detected during the auto-negotiation phase. Either the speed or duplex must be set to auto-negotiate to enable Auto-MDI/MDIX for the interface. If you explicitly set both the speed and duplex to a fixed value, thus disabling auto-negotiation for both settings, then Auto-MDI/MDIX is also disabled. For Gigabit Ethernet, when the speed and duplex are set to 1000 and full, then the interface always auto-negotiates; therefore Auto-MDI/MDIX is always enabled and you cannot disable it.

These settings are configured on the Advanced tab when editing an interface.

Use of MAC Addresses in Firepower Interface Settings

You can manually configure Media Access Control (MAC) addresses to override the default value.

For a high availability configuration, you can configure both the active and standby MAC address for an interface. If the active unit fails over and the standby unit becomes active, the new active unit starts using the active MAC addresses to minimize network disruption.

Active and standby MAC addresses are configured on the Advanced tab when configuring an interface.

Default MAC Addresses

Default MAC address assignments depend on the type of interface.

  • Physical interfaces - The physical interface uses the burned-in MAC address.

  • Subinterfaces - All subinterfaces of a physical interface use the same burned-in MAC address. You might want to assign unique MAC addresses to subinterfaces. For example, your service provider might perform access control based on the MAC address. Also, because IPv6 link-local addresses are generated based on the MAC address, assigning unique MAC addresses to subinterfaces allows for unique IPv6 link-local addresses.

Use of MTU Settings in Firepower Interface Settings

About the MTU

The MTU specifies the maximum frame payload size that the FDM-managed device can transmit on a given Ethernet interface. The MTU value is the frame size without Ethernet headers, VLAN tagging, or other overhead. For example, when you set the MTU to 1500, the expected frame size is 1518 bytes including the headers, or 1522 when using VLAN. Do not set the MTU value higher to accommodate these headers.

Path MTU Discovery

The FDM-managed device supports Path MTU Discovery (as defined in RFC 1191), which lets all devices in a network path between two hosts coordinate the MTU so they can standardize on the lowest MTU in the path.

MTU and Fragmentation

For IPv4, if an outgoing IP packet is larger than the specified MTU, it is fragmented into 2 or more frames. Fragments are reassembled at the destination (and sometimes at intermediate hops), and fragmentation can cause performance degradation. For IPv6, packets are typically not allowed to be fragmented at all. Therefore, your IP packets should fit within the MTU size to avoid fragmentation.

For UDP or ICMP, the application should take the MTU into account to avoid fragmentation.


Note


The FDM-managed device can receive frames larger than the configured MTU as long as there is room in memory.


MTU and Jumbo Frames

A larger MTU lets you send larger packets. Larger packets might be more efficient for your network. See the following guidelines:

  • Matching MTUs on the traffic path: We recommend that you set the MTU on all FDM-managed device interfaces and other device interfaces along the traffic path to be the same. Matching MTUs prevents intermediate devices from fragmenting the packets.

  • Accommodating jumbo frames: A jumbo frame is an Ethernet packet larger than the standard maximum of 1522 bytes (including Layer 2 header and VLAN header), up to 9216 bytes. You can set the MTU up to 9198 bytes to accommodate jumbo frames. The maximum is 9000 for FDM-managed virtual.


    Note


    Increasing the MTU assigns more memory for jumbo frames, which might limit the maximum usage of other features, such as access rules. If you increase the MTU above the default 1500 on ASA 5500-X series devices or FDM-managed virtual, you must reboot the system. You do not need to reboot Firepower 2100 series devices, where jumbo frame support is always enabled.

    Jumbo frame support is enabled by default on Firepower 3100 devices.


IPv6 Addressing for Firepower Interfaces

You can configure two types of unicast IPv6 addresses for Firepower physical interfaces.

  • Global—The global address is a public address that you can use on the public network. For a bridge group, you configure the global address on the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI), not on each member interface. You cannot specify any of the following as a global address.

    • Internally reserved IPv6 addresses: fd00::/56 (from=fd00:: to= fd00:0000:0000:00ff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff)

    • An unspecified address, such as ::/128

    • The loopback address, ::1/128

    • Multicast addresses, ff00::/8

    • Link-local addresses, fe80::/10

  • Link-local—The link-local address is a private address that you can only use on the directly-connected network. Routers do not forward packets using link-local addresses; they are only for communication on a particular physical network segment. They can be used for address configuration or for the Network Discovery functions such as address resolution and neighbor discovery. Each interface must have its own address because the link-local address is only available on a segment, and is tied to the interface MAC address.

At a minimum, you need to configure a link-local address for IPv6 to operate. If you configure a global address, a link-local address is automatically configured on the interface, so you do not also need to specifically configure a link-local address. If you do not configure a global address, then you need to configure the link-local address, either automatically or manually.

Configuring Firepower Interfaces

When you attach a cable to an interface connection (physically or virtually), you need to configure the interface. At minimum, you need to name the interface and enable it for traffic to pass through it. If the interface is a member of a bridge group, naming the interface is sufficient. If the interface is a bridge virtual interface (BVI), you need to assign the BVI an IP address. If you intend to create VLAN subinterfaces rather than a single physical interface on a given port, you would typically configure the IP addresses on the subinterface, not on the physical interface. VLAN subinterfaces let you divide a physical interface into multiple logical interfaces that are tagged with different VLAN IDs.

The interface list shows the available interfaces, their names, addresses, and states. You can change the state of an interface, on or off, or edit an interface, by selecting the interface row and clicking Edit in the Actions pane. The list shows the interface characteristics based on your configuration. Expand an interface row to see subinterfaces or bridge group member.

Configure a Physical Firepower Interface

At a minimum, you must enable a physical interface to use it. You would also typically name it and configure IP addressing; however, you would not configure IP addressing if you intend to create VLAN subinterfaces, if you are configuring a passive mode interface, or if you intend to add the interface to a bridge group.


Note


You cannot configure IP addresses on bridge group member interfaces or passive interfaces, although you can modify advanced settings, that are not related to IPv6 addressing.


You can disable an interface to temporarily prevent transmission on the connected network. You do not need to remove the interface's configuration. At this time, CDO can only configure routed interfaces and bridge groups. CDO lists passive interfaces but you cannot reconfigure them as active interfaces from CDO.


Note


Note: CDO does not support Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) configurations for IPv4. Configuring this option in an FDM-managed devicemay cause isses in the CDO UI; if you must configure PPPoE for your device, you must make the appropriate changes in an FDM-managed device.


Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

On the Inventory page, click the device whose interfaces you want to configure and click Interfaces in the Management pane on the right.

Step 2

On the Interfaces page, select the physical interface you want to configure.

Step 3

In the Actions pane on the right, click Edit.

Step 4

Give the physical interface a Logical Name and, optionally, a Description. Unless you configure subinterfaces, the interface should have a name.

Note

 

If you change the name, the change is automatically reflected everywhere you used the old name, including security zones, syslog server objects, and DHCP server definitions. However, you cannot remove the name until you first remove all configurations that use the name, because you typically cannot use an unnamed interface for any policy or setting.

Step 5

Pick one of these options:

  • If you intend to add sub-interfaces:

If you intend to configure subinterfaces for this physical interface, you are probably done. Click Save and continue with Configure Firepower VLAN Subinterfaces and 802.1Q Trunking ; otherwise, continue.

Note

 

Even when configuring subinterfaces, it is valid to name the interface and supply IP addresses. This is not the typical setup, but if you know that is what you need, you can configure it.


Configure IPv4 Addressing for the Physical Interface

Warning


After you configure and save a DHCP address pool, the DHCP address pool is bound to the interface's configured IP address(es). If you edit the interface's subnet mask after you configure a DHCP address pool, deployments to the FDM-managed device fail. Also, if you edit the DHCP address pool in the FDM-managed console and read the configuration from an FDM-managed device to CDO, the read fails.


Procedure

Step 1

In the "Editing Physical Interface" dialog, click the IPv4 Address tab.

Step 2

Select one of the following options from the Type field:

  • Static-Choose this option if you want to assign an address that should not change. ​Enter in the interface's IP address and the subnet mask for the network attached to the interface. For example, if you attach the 10.100.10.0/24 network, you could enter 10.100.10.1/24. Ensure that the address you enter is not the network ID or the broadcast address for the network and the address is not already used on the network.

    • Standby IP Address and Subnet Mask - If you configured high availability, and you are monitoring this interface for HA, also configure a standby IP address on the same subnet. The standby address is used by this interface on the standby device. If you do not set the standby IP address, the active unit cannot monitor the standby interface using network tests; it can only track the link state.

    • (Optional) DHCP Address Pool - Enter a a single DHCP Server IP address, or an IP address range. The range of IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the selected interface and cannot include: the IP address of the interface itself, the broadcast address, or the subnet network address. Specify the start and end address for the pool, separated by a hyphen. To temporarily disable this DHCP server, edit the server in the DHCP Servers section of the Firepower Threat Defense Device Settings page.

  • Dynamic (DHCP)-Choose this option if the address should be obtained from the DHCP server on the network. Change the following options if necessary:

    • Obtain Default Route-Whether to get the default route from the DHCP server. You would normally check this option.

    • DHCP Route Metric-If you obtain the default route from the DHCP server, enter the administrative distance to the learned route, between 1 and 255.

      Note

       

      If there is a DHCP server configured for the interface, you are shown the configuration. You can edit or delete the DHCP address pool. If you change the interface IP address to a different subnet, you must either delete the DHCP server, or configure an address pool on the new subnet, before you can save the interface changes.

Step 3

Click Save if you are done or continue with one of these procedures:


Configure IPv6 Addressing for the Physical Interface
Procedure

Step 1

In the "Editing Physical Interface" dialog, click the IPv6 Address tab.

Step 2

State-To enable IPv6 processing and to automatically configure the link-local address when you do not configure the global address, click the State slider to enable it. The link-local address is generated based on the interface MAC addresses (Modified EUI-64 format).

Note

 

Disabling IPv6 does not disable IPv6 processing on an interface that is configured with an explicit IPv6 address or that is enabled for auto configuration.

Step 3

Address Auto Configuration-Check this option to have the address automatically configured. IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration will generate a global IPv6 address only if the link on which the device resides has a router configured to provide IPv6 services, including the advertisement of an IPv6 global prefix for use on the link. If IPv6 routing services are not available on the link, you will get a link-local IPv6 address only, which you cannot access outside of the device's immediate network link. The link local address is based on the Modified EUI-64 interface ID.

Although RFC 4862 specifies that hosts configured for stateless autoconfiguration do not send Router Advertisement messages, the FDM-managed device does send Router Advertisement messages in this case. Select Suppress RA to suppress messages and conform to the RFC.

Step 4

Suppress RA-Check this box if you want to suppress router advertisements. The Firepower Threat Defense device can participate in router advertisements so that neighboring devices can dynamically learn a default router address. By default, router advertisement messages (ICMPv6 Type 134) are periodically sent out each IPv6 configured interface.

Router advertisements are also sent in response to router solicitation messages (ICMPv6 Type 133). Router solicitation messages are sent by hosts at system startup so that the host can immediately autoconfigure without needing to wait for the next scheduled router advertisement message.

You might want to suppress these messages on any interface for which you do not want the Firepower Threat Defense device to supply the IPv6 prefix (for example, the outside interface).

Step 5

Link-Local Address-If you want to use the address as link local only, enter it in the Link-Local Address field. Link local addresses are not accessible outside the local network. You cannot configure a link-local address on a bridge group interface.

Note

 

A link-local address should start with FE8, FE9, FEA, or FEB, for example fe80::20d:88ff:feee:6a82. Note that we recommend automatically assigning the link-local address based on the Modified EUI-64 format. For example, if other devices enforce the use of the Modified EUI-64 format, then a manually-assigned link-local address may cause packets to be dropped.

Step 6

Standby Link-Local Address-Configure this address if the interface connects a high availability pair of devices. Enter the link-local address of the interface on the other FDM-managed device, to which this interfaces is connected.

Step 7

Static Address/Prefix—If you do not use stateless autoconfiguration, enter the full static global IPv6 address and network prefix. For example, 2001:0DB8::BA98:0:3210/48. For more information on IPv6 addressing, see IPv6 Addressing for Firepower Interfaces.

Step 8

Standby IP Address-If you configure high availability, and you are monitoring this interface for HA, also configure a standby IPv6 address on the same subnet. The standby address is used by this interface on the standby device. If you do not set the standby IP address, the active unit cannot monitor the standby interface using network tests; it can only track the link state.

Step 9

Click Save if you are done or continue with one of these procedures:


Enable the Physical Interface
Procedure

Step 1

Select the interface you want to enable.

Step 2

Slide the State slider at the top right of the window, associated with the interface's logical name to blue.

Step 3

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure Firepower VLAN Subinterfaces and 802.1Q Trunking

VLAN subinterfaces let you divide a physical interface into multiple logical interfaces that are tagged with different VLAN IDs. An interface with one or more VLAN subinterfaces is automatically configured as an 802.1Q trunk. Because VLANs allow you to keep traffic separate on a given physical interface, you can increase the number of interfaces available to your network without adding additional physical interfaces or devices.

Create subinterfaces if you attach the physical interface to a trunk port on a switch. Create a subinterface for each VLAN that can appear on the switch trunk port. If you attach the physical interface to an access port on the switch, there is no point in creating a subinterface.


Note


You cannot configure IP addresses on bridge group member interfaces, although you can modify advanced settings as needed.


Before You Begin

Prevent untagged packets on the physical interface. If you use subinterfaces, you typically do not also want the physical interface to pass traffic, because the physical interface passes untagged packets. Because the physical interface must be enabled for the subinterface to pass traffic, ensure that the physical interface does not pass traffic by not naming the interface. If you want to let the physical interface pass untagged packets, you can name the interface as usual.

Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and click the device whose interfaces you want to configure.

Step 4

Click Interfaces in the Management pane at the right.

Step 5

On the Interfaces page, select the physical interface you want to configure and in the Actions pane at the right, click + New Subinterface.

Notice that the Parent Interface field shows the name of the physical interface for which you are creating this subinterface. You cannot change the parent interface after you create the subinterface.

Step 6

Give the subinterface a logical name and, optionally, a description. Without a logical name, the rest of the interface configuration is ignored.

Note

 

If you change the name, the change is automatically reflected everywhere you used the old name, including security zones, syslog server objects, and DHCP server definitions. However, you cannot remove the name until you first remove all configurations that use the name, because you typically cannot use an unnamed interface for any policy or setting.

Step 7

Configure the VLAN ID and Subinterface ID:

  • VLAN ID - Enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 that will be used to tag the packets on this subinterface.

  • Subinterface ID - Enter the subinterface ID as an integer between 1 and 4294967295. The number of subinterfaces allowed depends on your platform. You cannot change the subinterace ID after you create the subinterface.

Continue with Configure IPv4 Addressing for the Subinterface and Configure IPv6 Addressing for the Subinterface.


Configure IPv4 Addressing for the Subinterface
Procedure

Step 1

In the "Adding Subinterface" dialog, click the IPv4 Address tab.

Step 2

Select one of the following options from the Type field:

  • Static-Choose this option if you want to assign an address that should not change.

    Enter in the interface's IP address and the subnet mask for the network attached to the interface. For example, if you attach the 10.100.10.0/24 network, you could enter 10.100.10.1/24. Ensure that the address you enter is not the network ID or the broadcast address for the network and the address is not already used on the network.

  • Enter a Standby IP Address and Subnet Mask only if this interface is being used in a high availability pair of devices.

  • Dynamic (DHCP)-Choose this option if the address should be obtained from the DHCP server on the network. Change the following options if necessary:

    • Obtain Default Route-Whether to get the default route from the DHCP server. You would normally check this option.

    • DHCP Route Metric-If you obtain the default route from the DHCP server, enter the administrative distance to the learned route, between 1 and 255.

      See Configuring DHCP Server.

      Note

       

      If there is a DHCP server configured for the interface, you are shown the configuration. You can edit or delete the DHCP address pool. If you change the interface IP address to a different subnet, you must either delete the DHCP server, or configure an address pool on the new subnet, before you can save the interface changes.

Step 3

Click Create if you are done or continue with one of these procedures:


Configure IPv6 Addressing for the Subinterface
Procedure

Step 1

Click the IPv6 Address tab.

Step 2

Enable IPv6 processing-To enable IPv6 processing and to automatically configure the link-local address when you do not configure the global address, move the State slider to blue. The link-local address is generated based on the interface MAC addresses (Modified EUI-64 format).

Note

 

Disabling IPv6 does not disable IPv6 processing on an interface that is configured with an explicit IPv6 address or that is enabled for auto configuration.

Step 3

Address Auto Configuration-Check this option to have the address automatically configured. IPv6 stateless auto configuration will generate a global IPv6 address only if the link on which the device resides has a router configured to provide IPv6 services, including the advertisement of an IPv6 global prefix for use on the link. If IPv6 routing services are not available on the link, you will get a link-local IPv6 address only, which you cannot access outside of the device's immediate network link. The link local address is based on the Modified EUI-64 interface ID.

Step 4

Suppress RA-Check this box if you want to suppress router advertisements. The Firepower Threat Defense device can participate in router advertisements so that neighboring devices can dynamically learn a default router address. By default, router advertisement messages (ICMPv6 Type 134) are periodically sent out each IPv6 configured interface.

Router advertisements are also sent in response to router solicitation messages (ICMPv6 Type 133). Router solicitation messages are sent by hosts at system startup so that the host can immediately autoconfigure without needing to wait for the next scheduled router advertisement message.

You might want to suppress these messages on any interface for which you do not want the Firepower Threat Defense device to supply the IPv6 prefix (for example, the outside interface).

Step 5

Link-Local Address-If you want to use the address as link local only, enter it in the Link-Local Address field. Link local addresses are not accessible outside the local network.

Note

 

A link-local address should start with FE8, FE9, FEA, or FEB, for example fe80::20d:88ff:feee:6a82. Note that we recommend automatically assigning the link-local address based on the Modified EUI-64 format. For example, if other devices enforce the use of the Modified EUI-64 format, then a manually-assigned link-local address may cause packets to be dropped.

Step 6

Standby Link-Local Address-Configure this address if your interface connects a high availability pair of devices.

Step 7

Static Address/Prefix-If you do not use stateless autoconfiguration, enter the full static global IPv6 address and network prefix. For example, 2001:0DB8::BA98:0:3210/48. For more information on IPv6 addressing, see IPv6 Addressing, on page 136.

Step 8

Standby IP Address-If you configure high availability, and you are monitoring this interface for HA, also configure a standby IPv6 address on the same subnet. The standby address is used by this interface on the standby device. If you do not set the standby IP address, the active unit cannot monitor the standby interface using network tests; it can only track the link state.

Step 9

Click Create if you are done or continue with one of these procedures:


Enable the Physical Interface
Procedure

Step 1

To enable the subinterface, slide the State slider, associated with the subinterface's logical name to blue.

Step 2

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure Advanced Firepower Interface Options

Advanced interface options have default settings that are appropriate for most networks. Configure them only if you are resolving networking problems.

The following procedure assumes the interface is already defined. You can also edit these settings while initially editing or creating the interface.

This procedure and all of the steps in it are optional.

Limitations:

  • You cannot set MTU, duplex, or speed for the Management interface on a Firepower 2100 series device.

  • The MTU of an unnamed interface must be set to 1500 bytes.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and click the device whose interfaces you want to configure.

Step 4

Click Interfaces in the Management pane at the right.

Step 5

On the Interfaces page, select the physical interface you want to configure and in the Actions pane at the right, click Edit.

Step 6

Click the Advanced tab.

Step 7

Enable for HA Monitoring is automatically enabled. When this is enabled, the device includes the health of the interface as a factor when the HA pair decides whether to fail over to the peer unit in a high availability configuration. This option is ignored if you do not configure high availability. It is also ignored if you do not configure a name for the interface.

Step 8

To make a data interface management only, check Management Only.

A management only interface does not allow through traffic, so there is very little value in setting a data interface as a management only interface. You cannot change this setting for the Management/Diagnostic interface, which is always management only.

Step 9

Modify the IPv6 DHCP configuration settings.

  • Enable DHCP for IPv6 address configuration - Whether to set the Managed Address Configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement packet. This flag informs IPv6 autoconfiguration clients that they should use DHCPv6 to obtain addresses, in addition to the derived stateless autoconfiguration address.

  • Enable DHCP for IPv6 non-address configuration - Whether to set the Other Address Configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement packet. This flag informs IPv6 autoconfiguration clients that they should use DHCPv6 to obtain additional information from DHCPv6, such as the DNS server address.

Step 10

Configure DAD Attempts - How often the interface performs Duplicate Address Detection (DAD), from 0 - 600. The default is 1. During the stateless auto configuration process, DAD verifies the uniqueness of new unicast IPv6 addresses before the addresses are assigned to interfaces. If the duplicate address is the link-local address of the interface, the processing of IPv6 packets is disabled on the interface. If the duplicate address is a global address, the address is not used. The interface uses neighbor solicitation messages to perform Duplicate Address Detection. Set the value to 0 to disable duplicate address detection (DAD) processing.

Step 11

Change the MTU (maximum transmission unit) to the desired value.

The default MTU is 1500 bytes. You can specify a value from 64 - 9198 (or 9000, for Firepower Threat Defense Virtual). Set a high value if you typically see jumbo frames on your network. See MTU Settings in Interfaces for more information.

Note

 

If you increase MTU above 1500 on ASA 5500-X series devices, ISA 3000 series devices, or Firepower Threat Defense Virtual, you must reboot the device. Log into the CLI and use the reboot command. You do not need to reboot the Firepower 2100 or Secure Firewall 3100 series devices, where jumbo frame support is always enabled.

Step 12

(Physical interface only.) Modify the speed and duplex settings.

The default is that the interface negotiates the best duplex and speed with the interface at the other end of the wire, but you can force a specific duplex or speed if necessary. The options listed are only those supported by the interface. Before setting these options for interfaces on a network module, please read Limitations for Interface Configuration.

  • Duplex- Choose Auto , Half , Full , or Default . Auto is the default when the interface supports it. For example, you cannot select Auto for the SFP interfaces on a Firepower 2100 or Secure Firewall 3100 series device. Select Default to indicate that Firepower Device Manager should not attempt to configure the setting.

    Any existing configuration is left unchanged.

  • Speed- Choose Auto to have the interface negotiate the speed (this is the default), or pick a specific speed: 10 , 100 , 1000 , 10000 Mbps. You can also select these special options:

    Any existing configuration is left unchanged.

    The type of interface limits the options you can select. For example, the SFP+ interfaces on a Firepower 2100 series device support 1000 (1 Gbps) and 10000 (10 Gpbs) only, and the SFP interfaces support 1000 (1 Gbps) only, whereas GigabitEthernet ports do not support 10000 (10 Gpbs). SPF interfaces on other devices might require No Negotiate . Consult the hardware documentation for information on what the interfaces support.

Step 13

(Optional, recommended for subinterfaces and high availability units.) Configure the MAC address.

MAC Address-The Media Access Control in H.H.H format, where H is a 16-bit hexadecimal digit. For example, you would enter the MAC address 00-0C-F1-42-4C-DE as 000C.F142.4CDE. The MAC address must not have the multicast bit set, that is, the second hexadecimal digit from the left cannot be an odd number.)

Standby MAC Address-For use with high availability. If the active unit fails over and the standby unit becomes active, the new active unit starts using the active MAC addresses to minimize network disruption, while the old active unit uses the standby address.

Step 14

Click Create.


Configure a Bridge Group

A bridge group is a virtual interface that groups one or more interfaces. The main reason to group interfaces is to create a group of switched interfaces. Thus, you can attach workstations or other endpoint devices directly to the interfaces included in the bridge group. You do not need to connect them through a separate physical switch, although you can also attach a switch to a bridge group member.

The group members do not have IP addresses. Instead, all member interfaces share the IP address of the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI). If you enable IPv6 on the BVI, member interfaces are automatically assigned unique link-local addresses.

You typically configure a DHCP server on the bridge group interface (BVI), which provides IP addresses for any endpoints connected through member interfaces. However, you can configure static addresses on the endpoints connected to the member interfaces if you prefer. All endpoints within the bridge group must have IP addresses on the same subnet as the bridge group IP address.


Note


For ISA 3000, the device comes pre-configured with bridge group BVI, named inside, which includes all data interfaces except for the outside interface. Thus, the device is pre-configured with one port used for linking to the Internet or other upstream network, and all other ports enabled and available for direct connections to endpoints. If you want to use an inside interface for a new subnet, you must first remove the needed interfaces from BVI.


FDM-managed devices only support one bridge group; therefore, CDO can only manage that one bridge group and cannot create additional bridge groups on the device.

After you create a bridge group on CDO, you will not know the bridge group ID until after the configuration is deployed to the FDM-managed device. FDM-managed device assigns the bridge group ID, for example, BVI1. If the interface is deleted and a new bridge group is created, the new bridge group receives an incremented number, for example, BVI2.

Before you Begin

Configure the interfaces that will be members of the bridge group. Specifically, each member interface must meet the following requirements:

  • The interface must have a name.

  • The interface cannot be configured as management-only.

  • The interface cannot be configured for passive mode.

  • The interface cannot be an EtherChannel interface or an EtherChannel subinterface.

  • The interface cannot have any IPv4 or IPv6 addresses defined for it, either static or served through DHCP. If you need to remove the address from an interface that you are currently using, you might also need to remove other configurations for the interface, such as static routes, DHCP server, or NAT rules, that depend on the interface having an address. If you try to add an interface with an IP address to a bridge group, CDO will warn you. If you continue to add the interface to the bridge group, CDO will remove the IP address from the interface configuration.

  • BVI can have either VLAN interfaces or other routed interfaces as a member interface, but you cannot have both as member interfaces on a single BVI.

  • The interface cannot be Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)

  • The interface cannot be associated with a security zone (if it is in a zone). You must delete any NAT rules for the interface before you can add it to a bridge group.

  • Enable and disable the member interfaces individually. Thus, you can disable any unused interfaces without needing to remove them from the bridge group. The bridge group itself is always enabled.

  • Bridge groups do not support clustering.


Note


Bridge groups are not supported on Firepower 2100 devices in routed mode or on VMware with bridged ixgbevf interfaces.


Configure the Name of the Bridge Group Interface and Select the Bridge Group Members

In this procedure you give the bridge group interface (BVI) a name and select the interfaces to add to the bridge group:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you want to create a bridge group.

Step 4

Do one of the following:

  • Select the BVI bridge group and click Edit in the Actions pane.

  • Click the plus button and select Bridge Group Interface.

Note

 

You can create and configure a single bridge group. If you already have a bridge group defined, you should edit that group instead of trying to create a new one. If you need to create a new bridge group, you must first delete the existing bridge group.

Step 5

Configure the following:

  • Logical Name-You must give the bridge group a name. It can be up to 48 characters. Alphabetic characters must be lower case. For example, inside or outside. Without a name, the rest of the interface configuration is ignored.

Note

 

If you change the name, the change is automatically reflected everywhere you used the old name, including security zones, syslog server objects, and DHCP server definitions. However, you cannot remove the name until you first remove all configurations that use the name, because you typically cannot use an unnamed interface for any policy or setting.

  • (Optional) Description-The description can be up to 200 characters on a single line, without carriage returns.

Step 6

Click the Bridge Group Member tab. A bridge group can have up to 64 interfaces or subinterfaces to a single bridge group.

  • Check an interface to add it to the bridge group.

  • Uncheck an interface you want to remove from the bridge group.

Step 7

Click Save.

The BVI now has a name and member interfaces. Continue with the following tasks to configure the bridge group interface. You are not performing these tasks for the member interfaces themselves:


Configure the IPv4 Address for the BVI
Procedure

Step 1

Select the device for which you want to create a bridge group.

Step 2

Select the BVI in the list of interfaces and click Edit in the Actions pane.

Step 3

Click the IPv4 Address tab to configure the IPv4 address.

Step 4

Select one of the following options from the Type field:

  • Static-Choose this option if you want to assign an address that should not change. Type in the bridge group's IP address and the subnet mask. All attached endpoints will be on this network. For models with a pre-configured bridge group, the default for the BVI "inside" network is 192.168.1.1/24 (i.e. 255.255.255.0). Ensure that the address is not already used on the network.

    If you configured high availability, and you are monitoring this interface for HA, also configure a standby IP address on the same subnet. The standby address is used by this interface on the standby device. If you do not set the standby IP address, the active unit cannot monitor the standby interface using network tests; it can only track the link state.

    Note

     

    If there is a DHCP server configured for the interface, you are shown the configuration. You can edit or delete the DHCP address pool. If you change the interface IP address to a different subnet, you must either delete the DHCP server, or configure an address pool on the new subnet, before you can save the interface changes. See Configuring DHCP Server.

  • Dynamic (DHCP)-Choose this option if the address should be obtained from the DHCP server on the network. This is not the typical option for bridge groups, but you can configure it if needed. You cannot use this option if you configure high availability. Change the following options if necessary:

    • Route Metric—If you obtain the default route from the DHCP server, the administrative distance to the learned route, between 1 and 255. The default is 1.

    • Obtain Default Route—Check this option to get the default route from the DHCP server. You would normally select this option, which is the default.

Step 5

Continue with one of the following procedures:


Configure the IPv6 Address for the BVI
Procedure

Step 1

Click the IPv6 Address tab to configure IPv6 addressing for the BVI.

Step 2

Configure these aspects of IPv6 addressing:

Step 3

Enable IPv6 processing-To enable IPv6 processing and to automatically configure the link-local address when you do not configure the global address, slide the State slider to blue. The link local address is generated based on the interface MAC addresses (Modified EUI-64 format).

Note

 

Disabling IPv6 does not disable IPv6 processing on an interface that is configured with an explicit IPv6 address or that is enabled for autoconfiguration.

Step 4

Suppress RA-Whether to suppress router advertisements. The Firepower Threat Defense device can participate in router advertisements so that neighboring devices can dynamically learn a default router address. By default, router advertisement messages (ICMPv6 Type 134) are periodically sent out each IPv6 configured interface.

Router advertisements are also sent in response to router solicitation messages (ICMPv6 Type 133). Router solicitation messages are sent by hosts at system startup so that the host can immediately auto-configure without needing to wait for the next scheduled router advertisement message.

You might want to suppress these messages on any interface for which you do not want the FDM-managed device to supply the IPv6 prefix (for example, the outside interface).

Step 5

Static Address/Prefix-If you do not use stateless auto configuration, enter the full static global IPv6 address and network prefix. For example, 2001:0DB8::BA98:0:3210/48. For more information on IPv6 addressing, see IPv6 Addressing.

Step 6

Standby IP Address-If you configure high availability, and you are monitoring this interface for HA, also configure a standby IPv6 address on the same subnet. The standby address is used by this interface on the standby device. If you do not set the standby IP address, the active unit cannot monitor the standby interface using network tests; it can only track the link state.

Step 7

Continue with one of the following procedures:


Configure Advanced Interface Options

You configure most advanced options on bridge group member interfaces, but some are available for the bridge group interface itself.

Procedure

Step 1

The advanced settings have defaults that are appropriate for most networks. Edit them only if you are resolving network issues.

Step 2

Click OK.

Step 3

Click Save and deploy the changes to the Firepower device. See Deploy Configuration Changes from CDO to FTD for more information.


What to do next
  • Ensure that all member interfaces that you intend to use are enabled.

  • Configure a DHCP server for the bridge group. See Configure DHCP Server.

  • Add the member interfaces to the appropriate security zones.

  • Ensure that policies, such as identity, NAT, and access, supply the required services for the bridge group and member interfaces.

Bridge Group Compatibility in FDM-Managed Configurations

In various configurations, where you can specify an interface, sometimes you will be able to specify a bridge virtual interface (BVI) and sometimes you will be able to specify a member of the bridge group. This table explains when a BVI can be used and when a member interface can be used.

Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Type

BVI can be used

BVI member can be used

DHCP server

Yes

No

DNS Server

Yes

Yes

Management access

Yes

No

NAT (Network Address Translation)

No

Yes

Security Zone

No

Yes

Site-to-Site VPN access point

No

Yes

Syslog Server

Yes

No

Delete a Bridge Group

When you delete a bridge group, its members become standard routed interfaces, and any NAT rules or security zone membership are retained. You can edit the interfaces to give them IP addresses. If you need to create a new bridge group, you must first delete the existing bridge group.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device from which you want to delete the bridge group.

Step 4

Select the BVI bridge group and click Remove in the Actions pane.

Step 5

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Add an EtherChannel Interface for an FDM-Managed Device

EtherChannel Interface Limitations

An EtherChannel, depending on the device model, can include multiple member interfaces of the same media type and capacity and must be set to the same speed and duplex. You cannot mix interface capacities (for example 1GB and 10GB interfaces) by setting the speed to be lower on the larger-capacity interface. The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) aggregates interfaces by exchanging the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Units (LACPDUs) between two network devices.

EtherChannel interfaces have a number of limitations based on physical configuration and software versions. See the sections below for more information.

General Interface Limitations
  • EtherChannels are only available on devices running FDM-managed Version 6.5 and later.

  • CDO supports EtherChannel interface configuration on the following Firepower devices: 1010, 1120, 1140, 1150, 2110, 2120, 2130, 2140, 3110, 3120, 3130, and 3140. For interface limitations per device model, see Device-Specific Requirements.

  • All interfaces in the channel group must be the same media type and capacity, and must be set to the same speed and duplex. The media type can be either RJ-45 or SFP; SFPs of different types (copper and fiber) can be mixed. You cannot mix interface capacities (for example 1GB and 10GB interfaces) by setting the speed to be lower on the larger-capacity interface.

  • The device to which you connect the EtherChannel must also support 802.3ad EtherChannels.

  • The FDM-managed device does not support LACPDUs that are VLAN-tagged. If you enable native VLAN tagging on the neighboring switch using the Cisco IOS vlan dot1Q tag native command, then the FDM-managed device will drop the tagged LACPDUs. Be sure to disable native VLAN tagging on the neighboring switch.

  • All FDM-managed device configuration refers to the logical EtherChannel interface instead of the member physical interfaces.

  • Portchannel interfaces are displayed as physical interfaces.

Device-Specific Limitations

The following devices have specific interface limitations:

1000 Series

  • Firepower 1010 supports up to 8 EtherChannel interfaces.

  • Firepower 1120,1140,1150 supports up to 12 EtherChannel interfaces.

  • 1000 series do not support LACP rate fast; LACP always uses the normal rate. This setting is not configurable.

2100 Series

  • Firepower 2110 and 2120 models supports up to 12 EtherChannel interfaces.

  • Firepower 2130 and 2140 models support up to 16 EtherChannel interfaces.

  • 2100 series do not support LACP fast rate; LACP always uses the normal rate. This setting is not configurable.

Secure Firewall 3100 Series

  • All Secure Firewall 3100 models support up to 16 EtherChannel interfaces.

  • The Secure Firewall 3100 models support LACP fast rate.

  • The Secure Firewall 3100 series models do not support enabling or disabling of network modules and breakout online insertion and removal (OIR) of interfaces.

4100 Series and 9300 Series

  • You cannot create or configure EtherChannels on the 4100 and 9300 series. Etherchannels for these devices must be configured in the FXOS chassis.

  • Etherchannels on the 4100 and 9300 series appear in CDO as physical interfaces.

Add an EtherChannel Interface

Use the following procedure to add an EtherChannel to your FDM-managed device:


Note


If you want to immediately create another EtherChannel, check the Create another checkbox and then click Create.


Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want to add an EtherChannel to.

Step 4

In the Management pane located to the right, select Interfaces.

Step 5

Click the blue plus button and select EtherChannel.

Step 6

(Optional) Enter a Logical Name.

Step 7

(Optional) Enter a description.

Step 8

Enter the EtherChannel ID.

For Firepower 1010 series, enter a value between 1 and 8.

For the Firepower 2100, 3100, 4100, and 9300 series, enter a value between 1 and 48.

Step 9

Click the drop-down button for Link Aggregation Control Protocol and select one of the two options:

  • Active - Sends and receives LACP updates. An active EtherChannel can establish connectivity with either an active or a passive EtherChannel. You should use the active mode unless you need to minimize the amount of LACP traffic.

  • On - The EtherChannel is always on, and LACP is not used. An on EtherChannel can only establish a connection with another EtherChannel that is also configured to be on.

Step 10

Search for and select the interfaces you want to include in the EtherChannel as memebers. You must include at least one interface.

Warning: If you add an EtherChannel interface as a member and it already has an IP address configured, CDO removes the IP address of the member.

Step 11

Click Create.


Edit Or Remove an EtherChannel Interface for FDM-Managed Device

Use the following procedures to either modify an existing EtherChannel interface, or remove an EtherChannel interface from an FDM-managed device.

Edit an EtherChannel

Note that EtherChannels have several limitations you must be aware of when modifying. See Guidelines and Limitations for Firepower Configuration for more information.


Note


EtherChannels must have at least one member.


Use the following procedure to edit an existing EtherChannel:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the threat defense associated with the Etherchannel you want to modify.

Step 4

In the Management pane located to the right, click Interfaces.

Step 5

On the Interfaces page, select the EtherChannel interface you want to edit. In the Actions pane located to the right, click the edit icon .

Step 6

Modify any of the following items:

  • Logical name.

  • State.

  • Description.

  • Security Zone assignment.

  • Link Aggregation Control Protocol status.

  • IP address configuration in either the IPv4, IPv6, or Advanced tabs.

  • EtherChannel members.

Warning

 

If you add an EtherChannel interface as a member and it already has an IP address configured, CDO removes the IP address of the member.

Step 7

Click Save.


Remove an EtherChannel Interface

Note


EtherChannel interfaces associated with a high availability (HA) or any other configuration. You must manually remove the EtherChannel interface from all configurations before deleting it from CDO.


Use the following procedure to remove an EtherChannel interface from an FDM-managed device:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and the threat defense associated with the Etherchannel you want to delete.

Step 4

In the Management pane located to the right, select Interfaces.

Step 5

On the Interfaces page, select the EtherChannel interface you want to edit. In the Actions pane located to the right, click Remove.

Step 6

Confirm you want to delete the EtherChannel interface and click OK.


Add a Subinterface to an EtherChannel Interface

EtherChannel Subinterfaces

The Interfaces page allows you to view which interfaces of a device have subinterfaces by expanding each interface. This expanded view also shows you the unique logical name, enabled/disabled state, any associated security zones, and mode of the subinterface. The interface type and mode of the subinterface is determined by the parent interface.

General Limitations

CDO does not support subinterfaces for the following interface types:

  • Interface configured for management-only.

  • Interface configured for switch port mode.

  • Passive interfaces.

  • VLAN interfaces.

  • Bridge virtual interfaces (BVI).

  • Interfaces that are already a member of another EtherChannel interface.

You can create subinterfaces for the following:

  • Bridge group members.

  • EtherChannel interfaces.

  • Physical interfaces.

Add a Subinterface to an EtherChannel Interface

Use the following procedure to add a subinterface to an existing interface:


Note


If you want to immediately create another subinterface, check the Create another checkbox and then click Create.


Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the threat defense you want to add an EtherChannel to. In the Management pane located to the right, select Interfaces.

Step 4

Select the interface you want to group the subinterface under. In the Action pane located to the right, click the button.

Step 5

(Optional) Enter a Logical Name.

Step 6

(Optional) Enter a description.

Step 7

(Optional) Assign a security zone to the subinterface. Note that you cannot assign a security zone if the subinterface does not have a logical name.

Step 8

Enter a VLAN ID.

Step 9

Enter the EtherChannel ID. Use a value between 1 and 48; use values between 1 and 8 for the Firepower 1010 series.

Step 10

Select the IPv4, IPv6, or Advanced tab to configure the IP address of the subinterface.

Step 11

Click Create.


Edit or Remove a Subinterface from an EtherChannel

Use the following procedures to either modify an existing subinterface, or remove a subinterface from an Etherchannel interface.


Note


Subinterfaces and EtherChannel interfaces have a series of guidelines and limitations that may affect your configuration. See the general subinterface limitations for more information.


Edit a Subinterface

Use the following procedure to edit an existing subinterface associated with an EtherChannel interface:

Procedure

Step 1

Log into CDO.

Step 2

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 3

Click the Devices tab.

Step 4

Click the FTD tab and select the threat defense associated with the EtherChannel and subinterface you want to edit.

Step 5

In the Management pane located to the right, select Interfaces.

Step 6

Locate and expand the Etherchannel interface that the subinterface is a member of.

Step 7

Select the desired subinterface you want to edit. In the Action pane located to the right, click the edit icon .

Step 8

Modify any of the following items:

  • Logical name.

  • State.

  • Description.

  • Security Zone assignment.

  • VLAN ID

  • IP address configuration in either the IPv4, IPv6, or Advanced tabs.

Step 9

Click Save.


Remove a Subinterface from an EtherChannel

Use the following procedure to remove an existing subinterface from an EtherChannel interface:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the threat defense associated with the EtherChannel and subinterface you want to edit. In the Management pane located to the right, select Interfaces.

Step 4

Locate and expand the Etherchannel interface that the subinterface is a member of.

Step 5

Select the desired subinterface you want to delete.

Step 6

In the Actions pane located to the right, click Remove.

Step 7

Confirm you want to delete the subinterface interface and click OK.


Add Interfaces to a Virtual FDM-Managed Device

When you deploy a virtual FDM-managed device, you assign interfaces to the virtual machine. Then, from within an FDM-managed device, you configure those interfaces using the same methods you would use for a hardware device.

However, you cannot add more virtual interfaces to the virtual machine and then have FDM automatically recognize them. If you need more physical-interface equivalents for a virtual FDM-managed device, you basically have to start over. You can either deploy a new virtual machine, or you can use the following procedure.


Caution


Adding interfaces to a virtual machine requires that you completely wipe out the virtual FDM-managedconfiguration. The only part of the configuration that remains intact is the management address and gateway settings.


Before You Begin

Do the following in an FDM-managed device:

  • Examine the virtual FDM-managed device configuration and make notes on settings that you will want to replicate in the new virtual machine.

  • Select Devices > Smart License > View Configuration and disable all feature licenses.

Procedure

Step 1

Power off the virtual FDM-managed device.

Step 2

Using the virtual machine software, add the interfaces to the virtual FDM-managed device. For VMware, virtual appliances use e1000 (1 Gbit/s) interfaces by default. You can also use vmxnet3 or ixgbe (10 Gbit/s) interfaces

Step 3

Power on the virtual FDM-managed device.

Step 4

Open the virtual FDM-managed device console, delete the local manager, then enable the local manager. Deleting the local manager, then enabling it, resets the device configuration and gets the system to recognize the new interfaces. The management interface configuration does not get reset. The following SSH session shows the commands.

> show managers
Managed locally.
> configure manager delete
If you enabled any feature licenses, you must disable them in Firepower Device Manager before deleting the local manager. Otherwise, those licenses remain assigned to the device in Cisco Smart Software Manager.
Do you want to continue[yes/no] yes
DCHP Server Disabled
> show managers
No managers configured.
> configure manager local
> 

Step 5

Open a browser session to an FDM-managed device, complete the device setup wizard, and configure the device. See the "Complete the Initial Configuration" section of the Getting Started chapter of Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager, Version x.x.x, guide for more instructions.


Switch Port Mode Interfaces for an FDM-Managed Device

For each physical Firepower 1010 interface, you can set its operation as a firewall interface or as a switch port. Switch ports forward traffic at Layer 2, using the switching function in hardware. Switch ports on the same VLAN can communicate with each other using hardware switching, and traffic is not subject to the FDM-managed device security policy. Access ports accept only untagged traffic, and you can assign them to a single VLAN. Trunk ports accept untagged and tagged traffic, and can belong to more than one VLAN. For devices that have been reimaged to Version 6.4, Ethernet 1/2 through 1/8 are configured as access switch ports on VLAN 1; devices that are manually upgraded to Version 6.4 (and later), the ethernet configuration maintains the configuration prior ot upgrading. Note that switch ports on the same VLAN can communicate with each other using hardware switching, and traffic is not subject to the FDM-managed device security policy.

Access or Trunk

A physical interface configured as a switch port can be assigned as either an access port or a trunk port.

Access ports forward traffic to only one VLAN and accept only untagged traffic. We strongly recommend this option if you intend to forward traffic to a single host or device. You must also specify the VLAN you would like to be associated with the interface, otherwise it will default to VLAN 1.

Trunk ports forward traffic to multiple VLANs. You must assign one VLAN interface as the native trunk port and at least one VLAN as an associated trunk port. You can select up to 20 interfaces to be associated with the switch port interface, which enables traffic from different VLAN IDs to pass through the switch port interface. If an untagged traffic is passed through the switch port then the traffic is tagged with the VLAN ID of the native VLAN interface. Note that the default Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) & Token RING ID between 1002 and 1005 cannot be used for VLAN ID.

Change the Port Mode

If you select an interface that is configured for routed mode as a VLAN member, CDO automatically converts the interface to switch port mode and configures the interface as an access port by default. As a result the logical name and the associated static IP addresses are removed from the interface.

Configuration Limitations

Be aware of the following limitations:

  • Only physical Firepower 1010 devices support switch port mode configuration. Virtual FDM-managed devices do not support switch port mode.

  • The Firepower 1010 device allows a maximum of 60 VLANs.

  • VLAN interfaces configured for switch port mode must be unnamed. This means the MTU must be configured to 1500 bytes.

  • You cannot delete an interface configured as a switch port mode. You must manually change the interface mode from switch port mode to routed mode.

  • Interfaces configured for switch port mode do not support IP addresses. If the interface is currently referenced in or configured for VPN, DHCP, or is associated with a static route, you must manually remove the IP address.

  • You cannot use any member of the bridge group interface as a switch port.

  • The MTU for a VLAN interface must be 1500 bytes. Unnamed VLAN interfaces do not support any other configuration.

  • Switch port mode does not support the following:

    • Diagnostic interface.

    • Dynamic, multicast, or Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) routing.

    • Passive interfaces.

    • Port etherchannels, or using an interface that is a member of an etherchannel.

    • Subinterfaces.

    • Failover and state link.

High Availability and Switch Port Mode Interfaces

You should not use the switch port functionality when using High Availability. Because the switch ports operate in hardware, they continue to pass traffic on both the active and the standby units. High Availability is designed to prevent traffic from passing through the standby unit, but this feature does not extend to switch ports. In a normal High Availability network setup, active switch ports on both units will lead to network loops. We suggest that you use external switches for any switching capability. Note that VLAN interfaces can be monitored by failover, while switch ports cannot.


Note


You can only use a firewall interface as the failover link.


Switch Port Mode Configurations in Templates

You can create templates of devices with interfaces configured for switch port mode. Beware the following scenarios when mapping interfaces from the template to a device:

  • If a template interface does not contain any VLAN members prior to applying the template, CDO automatically maps it to an available device interface that has the same properties.

  • If a template interface that does not contain a VLAN member is mapped to a device interface that is configured as N/A, CDO automatically creates an interface on the device the template is to be applied to

  • If a template interface containing a VLAN member is mapped to a device interface that is not present, applying a template will fail.

  • Templates do not support mapping more than one template interface to the same device interface.

  • The template's management interface must be mapped to the device's management interface.

Configure an FDM-Managed Device VLAN

You must first configure a VLAN interface if you intend to configure subinterfaces or switch ports.


Note


An FDM-managed device supports a maximum of 60 VLAN interfaces.


Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the desired device you want to create a VLAN on.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, click Interfaces.

Step 5

On the Interfaces page, click the button.

Step 6

Configure the following:

  • Parent Interface - The parent interface is the physical interface to which you want to add the subinterface. You cannot change the parent interface after you create the subinterface.

  • (Optional) Logical Name-Set the name for the VLAN, up to 48 characters. Alphabetic characters must be lower case. If you do not want to route between the VLAN and other VLANs or firewall interfaces, then leave the VLAN interface name empty.

    Note

     

    If you do not enter a name, the MTU in the Advanced Options must be set to 1500. If you change the MTU to something other than 1500, the VLAN must be unnamed.

  • (Optional) Description-The description can be up to 200 characters on a single line, without carriage returns.

  • (Optional) Security Zone - Assign the subinterface to a security zone. Note that you cannot assign a subinterface if it does not have a Logical Name. You ca also assign a security zone after creating a subinterface. See Use of Security Zones in Firepower Interface Settings for more information.

  • (Optional) VLAN ID-Enter the VLAN ID between 1 and 4070 that will be used to tag the packets on this subinterface.

    Note

     

    ​​​​​​VLAN interfaces are routed by default. If you add this VLAN interface to a bridge group at a later date, CDO automatically changes the mode to BridgeGroupMember. Similarly, if you change this VLAN interface to switch port mode, CDO automatically changes the mode to Switch Port.

  • (Optional) Subinterface ID - Enter the subinterface ID as an integer between 1 and 4294967295. This ID is appended to the interface ID; for example Ethernet1/1.100. You can match the VLAN ID for convenience, but it is not required. You cannot change the ID after you create the subinterface.

Step 7

Click the IPv4 Address tab and select one of the following options from the Type field:

  • Static - Choose this option if you want to assign an address that should not change. Type in the interface's IP address and the subnet mask for the network attached to the interface. For example, if you attach the 10.100.10.0/24 network, you could enter 10.100.10.1/24. Ensure that the address is not already used on the network.

    If you configured high availability, and you are monitoring this interface for HA, also configure a standby IP address on the same subnet. The standby address is used by this interface on the standby device. If you do not set the standby IP address, the active unit cannot monitor the standby interface using network tests; it can only track the link state.

    Note

     

    If there is a DHCP server configured for the interface, you are shown the configuration. You can edit or delete the DHCP address pool. If you change the interface IP address to a different subnet, you must either delete the DHCP server, or configure an address pool on the new subnet, before you can save the interface changes. See Configuring DHCP Server for more information.

  • Dynamic (DHCP)-Choose this option if the address should be obtained from the DHCP server on the network. You cannot use this option if you configure high availability. Change the following options if necessary:

    • Route Metric-If you obtain the default route from the DHCP server, the administrative distance to the learned route, between 1 and 255. The default is 1.

    • Obtain Default Route-Check this option to get the default route from the DHCP server. You would normally select this option, which is the default.

  • DHCP Address Pool - If there is a DHCP server configured for the interface, you are shown the configuration. You can edit or delete the DHCP address pool. If you change the interface IP address to a different subnet, you must either delete the DHCP server, or configure an address pool on the new subnet, before you can save the interface changes.

Step 8

(Optional) Click the IPv6 Address tab and configure the following:

  • State - To enable IPv6 processing and to automatically configure the link-local address when you do not configure the global address, slide the State slider to blue. The link local address is generated based on the interface MAC addresses (Modified EUI-64 format).

    Note

     

    Disabling IPv6 does not disable IPv6 processing on an interface that is configured with an explicit IPv6 address or that is enabled for autoconfiguration.

  • Address Auto Configuration - Check this option to have the address automatically configured. IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration will generate a global IPv6 address only if the link on which the device resides has a router configured to provide IPv6 services, including the advertisement of an IPv6 global prefix for use on the link. If IPv6 routing services are not available on the link, you will get a link-local IPv6 address only, which you cannot access outside of the device's immediate network link. The link local address is based on the Modified EUI-64 interface ID.

  • Suppress RA-Whether to suppress router advertisements. Threat Defense can participate in router advertisements so that neighboring devices can dynamically learn a default router address. By default, router advertisement messages (ICMPv6 Type 134) are periodically sent out each IPv6 configured interface.

    Router advertisements are also sent in response to router solicitation messages (ICMPv6 Type 133). Router solicitation messages are sent by hosts at system startup so that the host can immediately auto-configure without needing to wait for the next scheduled router advertisement message.

    We suggest suppressing these messages on any interface for which you do not want the FDM-managed device to supply the IPv6 prefix (for example, the outside interface).

  • Static Address/Prefix-If you do not use stateless auto configuration, enter the full static global IPv6 address and network prefix. For example, 2001:0DB8::BA98:0:3210/48. For more information on IPv6 addressing, see IPv6 Addressing for Firepower Interfaces.

  • Standby IP Address-If you configure high availability, and you are monitoring this interface for HA, also configure a standby IPv6 address on the same subnet. The standby address is used by this interface on the standby device. If you do not set the standby IP address, the active unit cannot monitor the standby interface using network tests; it can only track the link state.

Step 9

(Optional) Click the Advanced tab.

  • Select Enable for HA Monitoring if you want the health of the interface to be a factor when the system decides whether to fail over to the peer unit in a high availability configuration.

    This option is ignored if you do not configure high availability. It is also ignored if you do not configure a name for the interface.

  • Select Management Only to make a data interface management only.

    A management only interface does not allow through traffic, so there is very little value in setting a data interface as management only. You cannot change this setting for the Management/Diagnostic interface, which is always management only.

  • Modify the IPv6 Configuration settings.

    • Enable DHCP for IPv6 address configuration-Whether to set the Managed Address Configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement packet. This flag informs IPv6 autoconfiguration clients that they should use DHCPv6 to obtain addresses, in addition to the derived stateless autoconfiguration address.

    • Enable DHCP for IPv6 non-address configuration-Whether to set the Other Address Configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement packet. This flag informs IPv6 autoconfiguration clients that they should use DHCPv6 to obtain additional information from DHCPv6, such as the DNS server address.

    • DAD Attempts-How often the interface performs Duplicate Address Detection (DAD), from 0 - 600. The default is 1. During the stateless autoconfiguration process, DAD verifies the uniqueness of new unicast IPv6 addresses before the addresses are assigned to interfaces. If the duplicate address is the link-local address of the interface, the processing of IPv6 packets is disabled on the interface. If the duplicate address is a global address, the address is not used. The interface uses neighbor solicitation messages to perform Duplicate Address Detection. Set the value to 0 to disable duplicate address detection (DAD) processing.

  • Change the MTU (maximum transmission unit) to the desired value.

    The default MTU is 1500 bytes. You can specify a value from 64 - 9198 (or 9000 for virtual FDM-managed devices and 9184 for the Firepower 4100/9300). Set a high value if you typically see jumbo frames on your network.

    Note

     

    If you increase MTU above 1500 on ASA 5500-X series devices, ISA 3000 series devices, or virtual FDM-managed devices, the VLAN must be unnamed and you must reboot the device. Log into the CLI and use the reboot command. If the device is configured for HA, you must also reboot the standby device. You do not need to reboot Firepower models, where jumbo frame support is always enabled.

  • (Optional for subinterface and HA pairs) Configure the MAC address.

    By default, the system uses the MAC address burned into the network interface card (NIC) for the interface. Thus, all subinterfaces on an interface use the same MAC address, so you might want to create unique addresses per subinterface. Manually configured active/standby MAC addresses are also recommended if you configure high availability. Defining the MAC addresses helps maintain consistency in the network in the event of failover.

    • MAC Address-The Media Access Control in H.H.H format, where H is a 16-bit hexadecimal digit. For example, you would enter the MAC address 00-0C-F1-42-4C-DE as 000C.F142.4CDE. The MAC address must not have the multicast bit set, that is, the second hexadecimal digit from the left cannot be an odd number.)

    • Standby MAC Address-For use with HA pairs. If the active unit fails over and the standby unit becomes active, the new active unit starts using the active MAC addresses to minimize network disruption, while the old active unit uses the standby address.

Step 10

If you intend to create another subinterface for this device, check Create another prior to completing the subinterface configuration.

Step 11

(Optional) Activate the subinterface upon creation by toggling the State slider in the upper right corner of the pop-up window from grey to blue.

Step 12

Click OK.

Step 13

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure an FDM-Managed Device VLAN for Switch Port Mode

Be sure to read the limitations for switch port mode prior to configuration; see Switch Port Mode Interfaces for FTD for more information.


Note


You can assign or edit a VLAN member to a physical interface at any time. Be sure to deploy the changes to the device after you confirm the new configuration.


Create a VLAN Interface for Switch Port Mode
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want to configure interfaces for.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Interfaces.

Step 5

On the Interfaces page, click the button and choose VLAN Interface.

Step 6

View the VLAN Members tab and select the desired physical interfaces.

Note

 

If you chose to add a member that references a VLAN interface configured for either Access or Native Trunk, you can only select one VLAN as a member. Physical interfaces that references a VLAN interface configured for Associated Trunk supports up to 20 interfaces as members.

Step 7

Configure the rest of the VLAN interface, as described in Configure a FDM-Managed Device VLAN.

Step 8

Click Save. Confirm that you want to reset the VLAN configuration and reassign an IP address to the interface.

Step 9

Review and deploynow the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure an Existing Physical Interface for Switch Port Mode
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want to configure interfaces for.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Interfaces.

Step 5

On the Interfaces page, select the physical interface you want to modify. In the Action Pane on the right, click the edit icon .

Step 6

Interfaces configured for switch port mode do not support logical names. If the interface has a logical name, delete it.

Step 7

Locate the Mode and use the drop-down menu to select Switch Port.

Step 8

Configure the physical interface for switch port mode:

  • (Optional) Check the Protected Port check box to set this switch port as protected, so you can prevent the switch port from communicating with other protected switch ports on the same VLAN. You might want to prevent switch ports from communicating with each other if: the devices on those switch ports are primarily accessed from other VLANs; you do not need to allow intra-VLAN access; and you want to isolate the devices from each other in case of infection or other security breach. For example, if you have a DMZ that hosts three web servers, you can isolate the web servers from each other if you apply this option to each switch port. The inside and outside networks can both communicate with all three web servers, and vice versa, but the web servers cannot communicate with each other.

  • For the Usage Type, select Access or Trunk. See Switch Port Mode Interfaces for FTD to determine which port type you need.

    • If you select Trunk, you must select one VLAN interface as the Native Trunk VLAN to forward untagged traffic and at least one Associated VLAN to forward tagged traffic. Click the icon to view the existing physical interfaces. You can select up to 20 VLAN interfaces as associated VLANs.

    • You can create a new VLAN interface set to Access mode by clicking C reate new VLAN.

Step 9

Click Save. Confirm that you want to reset the VLAN configuration and reassign an IP address to the interface.

Step 10

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Viewing and Monitoring Firepower Interfaces

To view firepower interfaces, follow these steps:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and the device whose interfaces you want to view.

Step 4

Select Interfaces in the Management pane on the right.

Step 5

In the Interfaces table, select an interface.

  • If you expand the interface row, you see subinterface information.

  • On the right, you see detailed interface information.


Monitoring Interfaces in the CLI

You can view some basic information, behavior, and statistics about interfaces by connecting to the device using SSH and running the command below.

For an easy to connect to the device using SSH, onboard the FDM-managed device you want to monitor as an SSH device and then use the >_ Command Line Interface in CDO.

  • show interface displays interface statistics and configuration information. This command has many keywords you can use to get to the information you need. Use ? as a keyword to see the available options.

  • show ipv6 interface displays IPv6 configuration information about the interfaces.

  • show bridge-group displays information about Bridge Virtual Interfaces (BVI), including member information and IP addresses.

  • show conn displays information about the connections currently established through the interfaces.

  • show traffic displays statistics about traffic flowing through each interface.

  • show ipv6 traffic displays statistics about IPv6 traffic flowing through the device.

  • show dhcpd displays statistics and other information about DHCP usage on the interfaces, particularly about the DHCP servers configured on interfaces.

Synchronizing Interfaces Added to a Firepower Device using FXOS

If an interface is added to a Firepower device by using the Firepower eXtensible Operating System (FXOS) Chassis Manager, on the Firepower 4100 series or 9300 series devices, CDO does not recognize that configuration change and report a configuration conflict.

To see the newly added interface in CDO, follow this procedure:

Procedure


Step 1

Log in to an FDM-managed device.

Step 2

From the FDM-managed main page, click View All Interfaces in the Interfaces panel.

Step 3

Click the Scan Interfaces button:

Step 4

Wait for the interfaces to scan, and then click OK.

Step 5

Deploy your changes on an FDM-managed device.

Step 6

Log in to CDO as an Admin or SuperAdmin.

Step 7

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 8

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 9

Click the FTD tab and select the device with the expected new interface configuration.

Step 10

Click Check for Changes to immediately compare the copy of the configuration on the device with the copy of the configuration stored on CDO. CDO will detect the interface change and report a "Conflict Detected" state on the Inventory page for the device.

Step 11

Resolve the Conflict Detected by clicking Review Conflict and then accepting the out of band changes.


Routing

Routing is the act of moving information across a network from a source to a destination. Along the way, at least one intermediate node is typically encountered. Routing involves two basic activities: determining optimal routing paths and transporting packets through a network.

Using CDO, you can define a default route, and other static routes, for your FDM-managed devices. The following topics explain routing basics and how to use CDO to configure static routing on your FDM-managed device:

About Static Routing and Default Routes

To route traffic to a non-connected host or network, you must define a route to that host or network. That defined route is a static route. Consider also configuring a default route. A default route is for all traffic that is not routed by other means to a default network gateway, typically the next hop router.

Default Route

If you do not know a route to a specific network, the simplest option is to configure a default route that sends all traffic to an upstream router, relying on that router to route the traffic for you. A default route identifies the gateway IP address to which the FDM-managed device sends all IP packets for which you did not define a static route. A default route is simply a static route with 0.0.0.0/0 (IPv4) or ::/0 (IPv6) as the destination IP address.

Static Routes

A static route is a route from one network to another network that you define and enter manually into the routing table. You might want to use static routes in the following cases:

  • Your network is small and stable and you can easily manage manually adding and changing routes between devices.

  • Your networks use an unsupported router discovery protocol.

  • You do not want the traffic or CPU overhead associated with routing protocols.

  • In some cases, a default route is not enough. The default gateway might not be able to reach the destination network, so you must also configure more specific static routes. For example, if the default gateway is outside, then the default route cannot direct traffic to any inside networks that are not directly connected to the FDM-managed device.

  • You are using a feature that does not support dynamic routing protocols.

Limitations:
  • CDO does not currently support the management, monitoring, or use of Virtual Tunnel Interface (VTI) tunnels on ASA or FDM-managed devices. Devices with configured VTI tunnels can be onboarded to CDO but it ignores the VTI interfaces. If a security zone or static route references a VTI, CDO reads the security zone and static route without the VTI reference. CDO support for VTI tunnels is coming soon.

  • FDM-managed device running on software version 7.0 or later allows configuring Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) traffic zones. When the FDM-managed device is onboarded to CDO, it can read but cannot modify the ECMP configuration available in the global VRF routes because it does not allow a route to the same destination network with an identical metric value. You can create and modify ECMP traffic zones through FDM and then read it into CDO. For more information on ECMP, see the "Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Routing" section in the "Routing Basics and Static Routes" chapter of Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager, Version 7.0 or later.

The Routing Table and Route Selection

When NAT translations (xlates) and rules do not determine the egress interface, the system uses the routing table to determine the path for a packet.

Routes in the routing table include a metric called "administrative distance" that provides a relative priority to a given route. If a packet matches more than one route entry, the one with the lowest distance is used. Directly connected networks (those defined on an interface) have the distance 0, so they are always preferred. Static routes have a default distance of 1, but you can create them with any distance between 1-254.

Routes that identify a specific destination take precedence over the default route (the route whose destination is 0.0.0.0/0 or ::/0).

How the Routing Table is Populated

The FDM-managed device routing table can be populated with statically defined routes and directly connected routes. It is possible that the same route is entered in more than one manner. When two routes to the same destination are put into the routing table, the one that remains in the routing table is determined as follows:

  • If the two routes have different network prefix lengths (network masks), then both routes are considered unique and are entered into the routing table. The packet forwarding logic then determines which of the two to use.

For example, assume the following routes are entered in the routing table:

  • 192.168.32.0/24

  • 192.168.32.0/19

Even though the 192.168.32.0/24 route has the longer network prefix, both routes are installed in the routing table because each of these routes has a different prefix length (subnet mask). They are considered different destinations and the packet forwarding logic determines which route to use.

  • If multiple paths to the same destination are entered in the routing table, the route with the better metric, as entered with the static route, is entered into the routing table.

Metrics are values associated with specific routes, ranking them from most preferred to least preferred. The parameters used to determine the metrics differ for different routing protocols. The path with the lowest metric is selected as the optimal path and installed in the routing table. If there are multiple paths to the same destination with equal metrics, load balancing is done on these equal cost paths.

How Forwarding Decisions are Made

Forwarding decisions are made in this order:

  • Use NAT translations (xlates) and rules to determine the egress interface. If the NAT rules do not determine the egress interface, the system uses the routing table to determine the path for a packet.

  • If the destination does not match an entry in the routing table, the packet is forwarded through the interface specified for the default route. If a default route has not been configured, the packet is discarded.

  • If the destination matches a single entry in the routing table, the packet is forwarded through the interface associated with that route.

  • If the destination matches more than one entry in the routing table, then the packet is forwarded out of the interface associated with the route that has the longer network prefix length. For example, a packet destined for 192.168.32.1 arrives on an interface with the following routes in the routing table:

  • 192.168.32.0/24 gateway 10.1.1.2

  • 192.168.32.0/19 gateway 10.1.1.3

In this case, a packet destined to 192.168.32.1 is directed toward 10.1.1.2, because 192.168.32.1 falls within the 192.168.32.0/24 network. It also falls within the other route in the routing table, but 192.168.32.0/24 has the longer prefix within the routing table (24 bits verses 19 bits). Longer prefixes are always preferred over shorter ones when forwarding a packet.


Note


Existing connections continue to use their established interfaces even if a new similar connection would result in different behavior due to a change in routes.


Configure Static and Default Routes for FDM-Managed Devices

Define static routes on an FDM-managed device so it knows where to send packets bound for networks not directly connected to the interfaces on the system.

Consider creating a default route. This is the route for network 0.0.0.0/0. This route defines where to send packets whose egress interface cannot be determined by existing NAT translations, static NAT rules, or other static routes.

You might need other static routes if the default gateway cannot be used to get to all networks. For example, the default route is usually an upstream router on the outside interface. If there are additional inside networks that are not directly connected to the device, and they cannot be accessed through the default gateway, you need static routes for each of those inside networks.

You cannot define static routes for the networks that are directly connected to system interfaces. The system automatically creates these routes.

Procedure

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD device and select the device on which you want to define static routes.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, click Routing.

Step 5

On the Static Routing page, do one of the following:

  • To add a new static route, click the plus button .

  • Click the edit icon for the route you want to edit.

If you no longer need a route, click the trash can icon for the route to delete it.

Step 6

Configure the route properties

  • Protocol-Select whether the route is for an IPv4 or IPv6 address.

  • Interface-Select the interface through which you want to send traffic. The gateway address needs to be accessible through this interface.

  • Gateway-Select the network object that identifies the IP address for the gateway to the destination network. Traffic is sent to this address.

  • Metric-The administrative distance for the route, between 1 and 254. The default is for static routes is 1. If there are additional routers between the interface and the gateway, enter the number of hops as the administrative distance.

    Administrative distance is a parameter used to compare routes. The lower the number, the higher precedence the route is given. Connected routes (networks directly connected to an interface on the device) always take precedence over static routes.

  • Destination Network-Select the network object(s), that identifies the destination network, that contains the host(s), that uses the gateway in this route.

    To define a default route, use the pre-defined any-ipv4 or any-ipv6 network objects, or create an object for the 0.0.0.0/0 (IPv4) or ::/0 (IPv6) network.

Step 7

Click OK.

Step 8

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Static Route Example

See the Static Route Network Diagram for the addresses used in this example.

The goal is to create a static route that allows return traffic to the host at 20.30.1.2 in destination network 20.30.1.0/24.

The packet can take any path to reach the destination. When a network receives a packet on an interface, it determines where to forward the packet for the best route to a destination.


Note


The DMZ does not have a static route as it is connected directly to the interface.


For example, consider the following two routes for reaching the destination.

Route 1:
Procedure

Step 1

Packets come back to the outside interface, 209.165.201.0/27, looking for 20.30.1.2.

Step 2

We direct the packets to use the inside interface to get to the gateway 192.168.1.2, which is on the same network as the destination.

Step 3

From there, we identify the destination network by the gateway address for that network, 20.30.1.1.

Step 4

The IP address 20.30.1.2 is on the same subnet as 20.30.1.1. The router forwards the packet to the switch, the switch forwards the packet to 20.30.1.2.

Interface:Inside Destination_N/W:20.30.1.0/24 Gateway: 192.168.1.2 Metric: 1


Route 2:
Procedure

Step 1

Packets come back to the outside interface, 209.165.201.0/27, looking for 20.30.1.2.

Step 2

We direct the packets to use the internal interface to get to the gateway 192.168.50.20, which is multiple hops away from the destination network.

Step 3

From there, we identify the destination network by the gateway address for that network, 20.30.1.1.

Step 4

The IP address 20.30.1.2 is on the same subnet as 20.30.1.0. The router forwards the packet to the switch, the switch forwards the packet to 20.30.1.2.

Interface:Inside Destination_N/W:20.30.1.0/24 Gateway: 192.168.50.20 Metric: 100

Here is what the completed Add Static Route table would like for these routes.


Monitoring Routing

To monitor and troubleshoot routing, open Firewall Device Manager for the device and open the CLI console or log into the device CLI using SSH and use the following commands:

  • show route displays the routing table for the data interfaces, including routes for directly-connected networks.

  • show ipv6 route displays the IPv6 routing table for the data interfaces, including routes for directly-connected networks.

  • show network displays the configuration for the virtual management interface, including the management gateway. Routing through the virtual interface is not handled by the data interface routing table, unless you specify data-interfaces as the management gateway.

  • show network-static-routes displays static routes configured for the virtual management interface using the configure network static-routes command. Normally, there will not be any static routes, as the management gateway suffices for management routing in most cases. These routes are not available to traffic on the data interfaces. This command is not available in the CLI console.

About Virtual Routing and Forwarding

About VRF

Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) allow multiple instances of a routing table to exist in a router. Firepower Version 6.6 introduces the ability to have a default VRF table and user-created VRF tables. A single VRF table can handle multiple types of varying routing protocols, such as EX, OSPF, BGP, IGRP, etc. Each routing protocol within a VRF table is listed as an entry. In addition to handling multiple types of common routing protocols, you can configure a routing protocol to reference an interface from another VRF. This allows you to segment network paths without using multiple devices.

See About Virtual Routers and Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) for more information.

VRF in CDO

This feature is new to Firepower Version 6.6. When the FDM-managed device is onboarded to CDO, the device routing page reads and supports only the VRFs defined on the global router of the FDM-managed device. To view the global VRF in CDO, select the device from the Inventory page and select Routing from the Management pane located to the right of the window. From here, you can view, modify, and delete the global VRF; note that CDO retains the name of the VRF when reading the configuration from FDM.

CDO firewall device manager doesn't read VRFs configured in the user-defined virtual routers. You must create and manage VRF tables through firewall device manager.

For information on global and user-defined routes, see the "Managing Virtual Routers" section in the "Virtual Routers" chapter of Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager, Version 7.0 or later.

Objects

An object is a container of information that you can use in one or more security policies. Objects make it easy to maintain policy consistency. You can create a single object, use it different policies, modify the object, and that change is propagated to every policy that uses the object. Without objects, you would need to modify all the policies, individually, that require the same change.

When you onboard a device, CDO recognizes all the objects used by that device, saves them, and lists them on the Objects page. From the Objects page, you can edit existing objects and create new ones to use in your security policies.

CDO calls an object used on multiple devices a shared object and identifies them in the Objects page with this badge .

Sometimes a shared object develops some "issue" and is no longer perfectly shared across multiple policies or devices:

  • Duplicate objects are two or more objects on the same device with different names but the same values. These objects usually serve similar purposes and are used by different policies. Duplicate objects are identified by this issue icon:

  • Inconsistent objects are objects on two or more devices with the same name but different values. Sometimes users create objects in different configurations with same name and content but over time the values of these objects diverge which creates the inconsistency. Inconsistent objects are identified by this issue icon:

  • Unused objects are objects that exist in a device configuration but are not referenced by another object, an access-list, or a NAT rule. Unused objects are identified by this issue icon:

You can also create objects for immediate use in rules or policies. You can create an object that is unassociated with any rule or policy. Before 28 June 2024, when you use an unassociated object in a rule or policy, CDO created a copy of it and used the copy. Because of this behavior, you might have observed that there were two instances of the same object in the Objects menu. However, CDO does not do that anymore. You can use an unassociated object in a rule or a policy but there are no duplicate objects that CDO creates.

You can view the objects managed by CDO by navigating to the Objects menu or by viewing them in the details of a network policy.

CDO allows you to manage network and service objects across supported devices from one location. With CDO, you can manage objects in these ways:

  • Search for and filter all your objects based on a variety of criteria.

  • Find duplicate, unused, and inconsistent objects on your devices and consolidate, delete, or resolve those object issues.

  • Find unassociated objects and delete them if they are unused.

  • Discover shared objects that are common across devices.

  • Evaluate the impact of changes to an object on a set of policies and devices before committing the change.

  • Compare a set of objects and their relationships with different policies and devices.

  • Capture objects in use by a device after it has been on-boarded to CDO.


Note


Out-of-band changes that are done to objects are detected as overrides to the object. When such a change happens, the edited value gets added to the object as an override, which can be viewed by selecting the object. To know more about out-of-band changes on devices, see Out-of-Band Changes on Devices.


If you have issues with creating, editing, or reading objects from an onboarded device, see Troubleshoot Cisco Defense Orchestrator for more information.

Objects

An object is a container of information that you can use in one or more security policies. Objects make it easy to maintain policy consistency. You can create a single object, use it different policies, modify the object, and that change is propagated to every policy that uses the object. Without objects, you would need to modify all the policies, individually, that require the same change.

When you onboard a device, CDO recognizes all the objects used by that device, saves them, and lists them on the Objects page. From the Objects page, you can edit existing objects and create new ones to use in your security policies.

CDO calls an object used on multiple devices a shared object and identifies them in the Objects page with this badge .

Sometimes a shared object develops some "issue" and is no longer perfectly shared across multiple policies or devices:

  • Duplicate objects are two or more objects on the same device with different names but the same values. These objects usually serve similar purposes and are used by different policies. Duplicate objects are identified by this issue icon:

  • Inconsistent objects are objects on two or more devices with the same name but different values. Sometimes users create objects in different configurations with same name and content but over time the values of these objects diverge which creates the inconsistency. Inconsistent objects are identified by this issue icon:

  • Unused objects are objects that exist in a device configuration but are not referenced by another object, an access-list, or a NAT rule. Unused objects are identified by this issue icon:

You can also create objects for immediate use in rules or policies. You can create an object that is unassociated with any rule or policy. Before 28 June 2024, when you use an unassociated object in a rule or policy, CDO created a copy of it and used the copy. Because of this behavior, you might have observed that there were two instances of the same object in the Objects menu. However, CDO does not do that anymore. You can use an unassociated object in a rule or a policy but there are no duplicate objects that CDO creates.

You can view the objects managed by CDO by navigating to the Objects menu or by viewing them in the details of a network policy.

CDO allows you to manage network and service objects across supported devices from one location. With CDO, you can manage objects in these ways:

  • Search for and filter all your objects based on a variety of criteria.

  • Find duplicate, unused, and inconsistent objects on your devices and consolidate, delete, or resolve those object issues.

  • Find unassociated objects and delete them if they are unused.

  • Discover shared objects that are common across devices.

  • Evaluate the impact of changes to an object on a set of policies and devices before committing the change.

  • Compare a set of objects and their relationships with different policies and devices.

  • Capture objects in use by a device after it has been on-boarded to CDO.


Note


Out-of-band changes that are done to objects are detected as overrides to the object. When such a change happens, the edited value gets added to the object as an override, which can be viewed by selecting the object. To know more about out-of-band changes on devices, see Out-of-Band Changes on Devices.


If you have issues with creating, editing, or reading objects from an onboarded device, see Troubleshoot Cisco Defense Orchestrator for more information.

Object Types

The following table describes the objects that you can create for your devices and manage using CDO.

Table 1. Common Objects

Object Type

Description

Network

Network groups and network objects (collectively referred to as network objects) define the addresses of hosts or networks.

URL

Use URL objects and groups (collectively referred to as URL objects) to define the URL or IP addresses of web requests. You can use these objects to implement manual URL filtering in access control policies or blocking in Security Intelligence policies.

Table 2. FDM-Managed Device Object Types

Object

Description

Application Filter

An application filter object defines the applications used in an IP connection, or a filter that defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. You can use these objects in policies to control traffic instead of using port specifications.

AnyConnect Client Profile

AnyConnect Client Profile objects are file objects and represent files used in configurations, typically for remote access VPN policies. They can contain an AnyConnect Client Profile and AnyConnect Client Image files.

Certificate Filter

Digital certificates provide digital identification for authentication. Certificates are used for SSL (Secure Socket Layer), TLS (Transport Layer Security), and DTLS (Datagram TLS) connections, such as HTTPS and LDAPS.

DNS Group

DNS servers are needed to resolve fully-qualified domain names (FQDN), such as www.example.com, to IP addresses. You can configure different DNS group objects for management and data interfaces.

Geolocation

A geolocation object defines countries and continents that host the device that is the source or destination of traffic. You can use these objects in policies to control traffic instead of using IP addresses.

IKEv1 Policy

An IKEv1 policy object contain the parameters required for IKEv1 policies when defining VPN connections.

IKEv2 Policy

An IKEv2 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv2 policies when defining VPN connections.

IKEv1 IPSEC Proposal

IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 1 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel.

IKEv2 IPSEC Proposal

IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel.

Network

Network groups and network objects (collectively referred to as network objects) define the addresses of hosts or networks.

Security Zone

A security zone is a grouping of interfaces. Zones divide the network into segments to help you manage and classify traffic.

Service

Service objects, service groups, and port groups are reusable components that contain protocols or ports considered part of the TCP/IP protocol suite.

SGT Group

A SGT dynamic object identifies source or destination addresses based on an SGT assigned by ISE and can then be matched against incoming traffic.

Syslog Server

A syslog server object identifies a server that can receive connection-oriented or diagnostic system log (syslog) messages.

URL

Use URL objects and groups (collectively referred to as URL objects) to define the URL or IP addresses of web requests. You can use these objects to implement manual URL filtering in access control policies or blocking in Security Intelligence policies.

Shared Objects

CDO calls objects on multiple devices with the same name and same contents, shared objects. Shared objects are identified by this icon
on the Objects page. Shared objects make it easy to maintain policies because you can modify an object in one place and that change affects all the other policies that use that object. Without shared objects, you would need to modify all the policies individually that require the same change.

When looking at a shared object, CDO shows you the contents of the object in the object table. Shared objects have exactly the same contents. CDO shows you a combined or "flattened" view of the elements of the object in the details pane. Notice that in the details pane, the network elements are flattened into a simple list and not directly associated with a named object.

Object Overrides

An object override allows you to override the value of a shared network object on specific devices. CDO uses the corresponding value for the devices that you specify when configuring the override. Although the objects are on two or more devices with the same name but different values, CDO doesn't identify them as Inconsistent objects only because these values are added as overrides.

You can create an object whose definition works for most devices, and then use overrides to specify modifications to the object for the few devices that need different definitions. You can also create an object that needs to be overridden for all devices, but its use allows you to create a single policy for all devices. Object overrides allow you to create a smaller set of shared policies for use across devices without giving up the ability to alter policies when needed for individual devices.

For example, consider a scenario where you have a printer server in each of your offices, and you have created a printer server object print-server. You have a rule in your ACL to deny printer servers from accessing the internet. The printer server object has a default value that you want to change from one office to another. You can do this by using object overrides and maintain rule and "printer-server" object consistent across all locations, although their values may be different.

Out-of-band changes that are done to objects are detected as overrides to the object. When such a change happens, the edited value gets added to the object as an override, which can be viewed by selecting the object. To know more about out-of-band changes, see Out-of-Band Changes on Devices.


Note


CDO allows you to override objects associated with the rules in a ruleset. When you add a new object to a rule, you can override it only after you attach a device to the ruleset and save the changes. See Configure Rulesets for an FTD for more information.



Note


If there are inconsistent objects, you can combine them into a single shared object with overrides. For more information, see Resolve Inconsistent Object Issues.


Unassociated Objects

You can create objects for immediate use in rules or policies. You can also create an object that is unassociated with any rule or policy. When you use that unassociated object in a rule or policy, CDO creates a copy of it and uses the copy. The original unassociated object remains among the list of available objects until it is either deleted by a nightly maintenance job, or you delete it.

Unassociated objects remain in CDO as a copy to ensure that not all configurations are lost if the rule or policy associated with the object is deleted accidentally.

To view unassociated objects click in the left-hand pane of the Objects tab and check the Unassociated checkbox.

Compare Objects

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects and choose an option.

Step 2

Filter the objects on the page to find the objects you want to compare.

Step 3

Click the Compare button .

Step 4

Select up to three objects to compare.

Step 5

View the objects, side-by-side, at the bottom of the screen.

  • Click the up and down arrows in the Object Details title bar to see more or less of the Object Details.

  • Expand or collapse the Details and Relationships boxes to see more or less information.

Step 6

(Optional) The Relationships box shows how an object is used. It may be associated with a device or a policy. If the object is associated with a device, you can click the device name and then click View Configuration to see the configuration of the device. CDO shows you the device's configuration file and highlights the entry for that object.


Filters

You can use many different filters on the Inventory and Objects pages to find the devices and objects you are looking for.

To filter, click in the left-hand pane of the Inventory, Policies, and Objects tabs:

The Inventory filter allows you to filter by device type, hardware and software versions, snort version, configuration status, connection states, conflict detection, and secure device connectors, and labels. You can apply filters to find devices within a selected device type tab. You can use filters to find devices within the selected device type tab.


Note


When the FTD tab is opened, the filter pane provides filters to show FDM-managed devices based on the management application through which the devices are accessed from CDO.

  • FDM: Devices managed using FTD API or FDM.

  • FMC-FTD: Devices managed using Firepower Management Center.

  • FTD: Devices managed using FTD Management.


The object filter allows you to filter by device, issue type, shared objects, unassociated objects, and object type. You can include system objects in your results or not. You can also use the search field to search for objects in the filter results that contain a certain name, IP address, or port number.

The object type filter allows you to filter objects by type, such as network object, network group, URL object, URL group, service object, and service group. The shared objects filter allows filtering objects having default values or override values.

When filtering devices and objects, you can combine your search terms to create several potential search strategies to find relevant results.

In the following example, filters are applied to search objects that are "Issues (Used OR Inconsistent) AND Shared Objects with Additional Values.

Object Filters

To filter, click in the left-hand pane of the Objects tab:

  • Filter by Device: Lets you pick a specific device so that you can see objects found on the selected device.

  • Issues: Lets you pick unused, duplicate, and inconsistent objects to view.

  • Ignored Issues: Lets you view all the objects whose inconsistencies you had ignored.

  • Shared Objects: Lets you view all the objects that CDO has found to be shared on more than one device. You can choose to see shared objects with only default values or override values, or both.

  • Unassociated Objects: Lets you view all the objects that are not associated with any rule or policy.

  • Object Type: Lets you select an object type to see only those type of objects that you have selected, such as network objects, network groups, URL objects, URL groups, service objects, and service groups.

Sub filters – Within each main filter, there are sub-filters you can apply to further narrow down your selection. These sub-filters are based on Object Type – Network, Service, Protocol, etc.

The selected filters in this filter bar would return objects that match the following criteria:

* Objects that are on one of two devices. (Click Filter by Device to specify the devices.) AND are

* Inconsistent objects AND are

* Network objects OR Service objects AND

* Have the word "group" in their object naming convention

Because Show System Objects is checked, the result would include both system objects and user-defined objects.

Show System-Defined Objects Filter

Some devices come with pre-defined objects for common services. These system objects are convenient because they are already made for you and you can use them in your rules and policies. There can be many system objects in the objects table. System objects cannot be edited or deleted.

Show System-Defined Objects is off by default. To display system objects in the object table, check Show System-Defined Objects in the filter bar. To hide system objects in the object table, leave Show System Objects unchecked in the filter bar.

If you hide system objects, they will not be included in your search and filtering results. If you show system objects, they will be included in your object search and filtering results.

Configure Object Filters

You can filter on as few or as many criteria as you want. The more categories you filter by, the fewer results you should expect.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects and choose an option.

Step 2

Open the filter panel by clicking the filter icon at the top of the page. Uncheck any filters that have been checked to make sure no objects are inadvertently filtered out. Additionally, look at the search field and delete any text that may have been entered in the search field.

Step 3

If you want to restrict your results to those found on particular devices:

  1. Click Filter By Device.

  2. Search all the devices or click a device tab to search for only devices of a certain kind.

  3. Check the device you want to include in your filter criteria.

  4. Click OK.

Step 4

Check Show System Objects to include system objects in your search results. Uncheck Show System Objects to exclude system objects from your search results.

Step 5

Check the object Issues you want to filter by. If you check more than one issue, objects in any of the categories you check are included in your filter results.

Step 6

Check Ignored issues if you want to see the object that had issues but was ignored by the administrator.

Step 7

Check the required filter in Shared Objects if you are filtering for objects shared between two or more devices.

  • Default Values: Filters objects having only the default values.

  • Override Values: Filters objects having overridden values.

  • Additional Values: Filters objects having additional values.

Step 8

Check Unassociated if you are filtering for objects that are not part of any rule or policy.

Step 9

Check the Object Types you want to filter by.

Step 10

You can also add an object name, IP address, or port number to the Objects search field to find objects with your search criteria among the filtered results.


When to Exclude a Device from Filter Criteria

When adding a device to filtering criteria, the results show you the objects on a device but not the relationships of those objects to other devices. For example, assume ObjectA is shared between ASA1 and ASA2. If you were to filter objects to find shared objects on ASA1, you would find ObjectA but the Relationships pane would only show you that the object is on ASA1.

To see all the devices to which an object is related, don't specify a device in your search criteria. Filter by the other criteria and add search criteria if you choose to. Select an object that CDO identifies and then look in the Relationships pane. You will see all the devices and policies the object is related to.

Unignore Objects

One way to resolve unused, duplicate, or inconsistent objects is to ignore them. You may decide that though an object is unused, a duplicate, or inconsistent, there are valid reasons for that state and you choose to leave the object issue unresolved. At some point in the future, you may want to resolve those ignored objects. As CDO does not display ignored objects when you search for object issues, you will need to filter the object list for ignored objects and then act on the results.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects and choose an option.

Step 2

Filter and search for ignored objects.

Step 3

In the Object table, select the object you want to unignore. You can unignore one object at a time.

Step 4

Click Unignore in the details pane.

Step 5

Confirm your request. Now, when you filter your objects by issue, you should find the object that was previously ignored.


Deleting Objects

You can delete a single object or mulitple objects.

Delete a Single Object

Caution


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Changes you make to network objects and groups on the or Objects > FDM Objects page are reflected in the corresponding cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center network object or group on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the changes to the on-prem management center on which you have these objects.

Deleting a network object or group from either page deletes the object or group from both pages.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, choose Objects and choose an option.

Step 2

Locate the object you want to delete by using object filters and the search field, and select it.

Step 3

Review the Relationships pane. If the object is used in a policy or in an object group, you cannot delete the object until you remove it from that policy or group.

Step 4

In the Actions pane, click the Remove icon .

Step 5

Confirm that you want to delete the object by clicking OK.

Step 6

Review and deploy the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Delete a Group of Unused Objects

As you onboard devices and start resolving object issues, you find many unused objects. You can delete up to 50 unused objects at a time.

Procedure

Step 1

Use the Issues filter to find unused objects. You can also use the Device filter to find objects that are not associated with a device by selecting No Device. Once you have filtered the object list, the object checkboxes appear.

Step 2

Check the Select all checkbox in the object table header to select all the objects found by the filter that appear in the object table; or, check individual checkboxes for individual objects you want to delete.

Step 3

In the Actions pane, click the Remove icon .

Step 4

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Network Objects

A network object can contain a host name, a network IP address, a range of IP addresses, a fully qualified domain name (FQDN), or a subnetwork expressed in CIDR notation. Network groups are collections of network objects and other individual addresses or subnetworks you add to the group. Network objects and network groups are used in access rules, network policies, and NAT rules. You can create, update, and delete network objects and network groups using CDO.

Note that not all platforms support network objects, such as Cisco Merkai and Multicloud Defense; when you share dynamic objects, CDO automatically translates the appropriate information from the originating platform or device into a set of usable information that CDO can use.

Table 3. Pemitted Values of Network Objects

Device type

IPv4 / IPv6

Single Address

Range of addresses

Fully Qualified Domain Name

Subnet using CIDR Notation

FTD

IPv4 and IPv6

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Multicloud Defense

IPv4 and IPv6

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Table 4. Pemitted Contents of a Network Group

Device type

IP Value

Network Object

Network Groups

FTD

No

Yes

Yes

Multicloud Defense

Yes

Yes

Yes

Reusing Network Objects Across Products

If you have a CDO tenant with a cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center and one or more on-prem management centers onboarded to your tenant:

  • When you create a Secure Firewall Threat Defense, FDM-managed threat defense, ASA, or Meraki network object or group, a copy of the object is also added to the objects list on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page used when configuring cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center, and vice versa.

  • When you create a Secure Firewall Threat Defense, FDM-managed threat defense, or ASA network object or group, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each On-Prem Firewall Management Center for which Discover & Manage Network Objects is enabled. From this list, you can choose and deploy the object to the on-prem management center on which you want to use the object and discard the ones that you do not want. Navigate Tools & Services > Firewall Management Center, select the on-prem management center, and click Objects to see your objects in the On-Prem Firewall Management Center user interface and assign them to policies.

Changes you make to network objects or groups on either page apply to the object or group instance on both pages. Deleting an object from one page also deletes the corresponding copy of the object from the other page.

Exceptions:

  • If a network object of the same name already exists for cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center, the new Secure Firewall Threat Defense, FDM-managed threat defense, ASA, or Meraki network object will not be replicated on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page of CDO.

  • Network objects and groups in onboarded threat defense devices that are managed by on-premises Secure Firewall Management Center are not replicated on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page and cannot be used in cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center.

    Note that for on-premises Secure Firewall Management Center instances that have been migrated to cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center, network objects and groups are replicated to the CDO objects page if they are used in policies that were deployed to FTD devices.

  • Sharing Network Objects between CDO and cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is automatically enabled on new tenants but must be requested for existing tenants. If your network objects are not being shared with cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center, contact TAC to have the features enabled on your tenant.

  • Sharing network objects between CDO and On-Prem Management Center is not automatically enabled on CDO for new on-prem management centers onboarded to CDO. If your network objects are not being shared with On-Prem Management Center, ensure Discover & Manage Network Objects toggle button is enabled for the on-prem management center in Settings or contact TAC to have the features enabled on your tenant.

Viewing Network Objects

Network objects you create using CDO and those CDO recognizes in an onboarded device's configuration are displayed on the Objects page. They are labeled with their object type. This allows you to filter by object type to quickly find the object you are looking for.

When you select a network object on the Objects page, you see the object's values in the Details pane. The Relationships pane shows you if the object is used in a policy and on what device the object is stored.

When you click on a network group you see the contents of that group. The network group is a conglomerate of all the values given to it by the network objects.

Create or Edit a Firepower Network Object or Network Groups

A Firepower network object can contain a hostname, an IP address, or a subnet address expressed in CIDR notation. Network groups are conglomerates of network objects and network groups that are used in access rules, network policies, and NAT rules. You can create, read, update, and delete network objects and network groups using CDO.

Firepower network objects and groups can be used by ASA, threat defense, FDM-managed, and Meraki devices. See Reusing Network Objects Across Products.


Note


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

When you create a network object or group on the or Objects > FDM Objects page, a copy of the object is automatically added to the Objects > Other FTD Objects page and vice-versa. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the objects to the on-prem management center on which you want these objects.



Caution


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Changes you make to network objects and groups on the or Objects > FDM Objects page are reflected in the corresponding cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center network object or group on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the changes to the on-prem management center on which you have these objects.

Deleting a network object or group from either page deletes the object or group from both pages.


Table 5. IP addresses that can be added to network objects

Device type

IPv4 / IPv6

Single Address

Range of addresses

Partially Qualified Domain Name (PQDN)

Subnet using CIDR Notation

Firepower IPv4 / IPv6 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Create a Firepower Network Object

Note


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

When you create a network object or group on the or Objects > FDM Objects page, a copy of the object is automatically added to the Objects > Other FTD Objects page and vice-versa. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the objects to the on-prem management center on which you want these objects.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button to create an object.

Step 3

Click FTD > Network.

Step 4

Enter an Object Name.

Step 5

Select Create a network object.

Step 6

In the Value section:

  • Select eq and enter a single IP address, a subnet address expressed in CIDR notation, or a Partially Qualified Domain Name (PQDN).

  • Select range and enter an IP address range.

Note

 

Do not set a host bit value. If you enter a host bit value other than 0, CDO unsets it while creating the object, because the cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center only accepts IPv6 objects with host bits not set.

Step 7

Click Add.

Attention: The newly created network objects aren't associated with any FDM-managed device as they aren't part of any rule or policy. To see these objects, select the Unassociated objects category in object filters. For more information, see Object Filters. Once you use the unassociated objects in a device's rule or policy, such objects are associated with that device.


Create a Firepower Network Group

A network group can contain network objects and network groups. When you create a new network group, you can search for existing objects by their name, IP addresses, IP address range, or FQDN and add them to the network group. If the object isn't present, you can instantly create that object in the same interface and add it to the network group.


Note


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

When you create a network object or group on the or Objects > FDM Objects page, a copy of the object is automatically added to the Objects > Other FTD Objects page and vice-versa. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the objects to the on-prem management center on which you want these objects.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button to create an object.

Step 3

Click FTD > Network.

Step 4

Enter an Object Name.

Step 5

Select Create a network group.

Step 6

In the Values field, enter a value or name. When you start typing, CDO provides object names or values that match your entry.

Step 7

You can choose one of the existing objects shown or create a new one based on the name or value that you have entered.

Step 8

If CDO finds a match, to choose an existing object, click Add to add the network object or network group to the new network group.

Step 9

If you have entered a value or object that is not present, you can perform one of the following:

  • Click Add as New Object With This Name to create a new object with that name. Enter a value and click the checkmark to save it.

  • Click Add as New Object to create a new object. The object name and value are the same. Enter a name and click the checkmark to save it.

It's is possible to create a new object even though the value is already present. You can make changes to those objects and save them.

Note: You can click the edit icon to modify the details. Clicking the delete button doesn't delete the object itself; instead, it removes it from the network group.

Step 10

After adding the required objects, click Save to create a new network group.

Step 11

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Edit a Firepower Network Object

Caution


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Changes you make to network objects and groups on the or Objects > FDM Objects page are reflected in the corresponding cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center network object or group on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the changes to the on-prem management center on which you have these objects.

Deleting a network object or group from either page deletes the object or group from both pages.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the object you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the network object and click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Edit the values in the dialog box in the same fashion that you created them in "Create a Firepower Network Group".

Note

 
Click the delete icon next to remove the object from the network group.

Step 5

Click Save. CDO displays the devices that will be affected by the change.

Step 6

Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any devices affected by it.


Edit a Firepower Network Group

Caution


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Changes you make to network objects and groups on the or Objects > FDM Objects page are reflected in the corresponding cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center network object or group on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the changes to the on-prem management center on which you have these objects.

Deleting a network object or group from either page deletes the object or group from both pages.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the network group you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the network group and click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Change the object name and description if needed.

Step 5

If you want to change the objects or network groups that are already added to the network group, perform the following steps:

  1. Click the edit icon appearing beside the object name or network group to modify them.

  2. Click the checkmark to save your changes. Note: You can click the remove icon to delete the value from a network group.

Step 6

If you want to add new network objects or network groups to this network group, you have to perform the following steps:

  1. In the Values field, enter a new value or the name of an existing network object. When you start typing, CDO provides object names or values that match your entry. You can choose one of the existing objects shown or create a new one based on the name or value that you have entered.

  2. If CDO finds a match, to choose an existing object, click Add to add the network object or network group to the new network group.

  3. If you have entered a value or object that is not present, you can perform one of the following:

    • Click Add as New Object With This Name to create a new object with that name. Enter a value and click the checkmark to save it.

    • Click Add as New Object to create a new object. The object name and value are the same. Enter a name and click the checkmark to save it.

It's is possible to create a new object even though the value is already present. You can make changes to those objects and save them.

Step 7

Click Save. CDO displays the policies that will be affected by the change.

Step 8

Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any devices affected by it.

Step 9

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Add an Object Override

Caution


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Changes you make to network objects and groups on the or Objects > FDM Objects page are reflected in the corresponding cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center network object or group on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the changes to the on-prem management center on which you have these objects.

Deleting a network object or group from either page deletes the object or group from both pages.


Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar on the left, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the object to which you want to add an override, using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the network object and click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Enter the value in the Override Values dialog box and click + Add Value.

Important

 
The override you are adding must have the same type of value that the object contains. For example, to a network object, you can configure an override only with a network value and not a host value.

Step 5

Once you see that the value is added, click the cell in the Devices column in Override Values.

Step 6

Click Add Devices, and choose the device to which you want the override to be added. The device you select must contain the object to which you are adding the override.

Step 7

Click Save. CDO displays the devices that will be affected by the change.

Step 8

Click Confirm to finalize the addition of the override to the object and any devices affected by it.

Note

 
You can add more than one override to an object. However, you must select a different device, which contains the object, each time you are adding an override.

Step 9

See Object Overrides to know more about object overrides and Edit Object Overrides to edit an existing override.


Edit Object Overrides

You can modify the value of an existing override as long as the object is present on the device.

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar on the left, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the object having override you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the object having override and click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Modify the override value:

  • Click the edit icon to modify the value.

  • Click on the cell in the Devices column in Override Values to assign new devices. You can select an already assigned device and click Remove Overrides to remove overrides on that device.

  • Click arrow in Override Values to push and make it as the default value of the shared object.

  • Click the delete icon next to the override you want to remove.

Step 5

Click Save. CDO displays the devices that will be affected by the change.

Step 6

Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any devices affected by it.

Step 7

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Add Additional Values to a Shared Network Group

The values in a shared network group that are present on all devices associated with it are called "default values". CDO allows you to add "additional values" to the shared network group and assign those values to some devices associated with that shared network group. When CDO deploys the changes to the devices, it determines the contents and pushes the "default values" to all devices associated with the shared network group and the "additional values" only to the specified devices.

For example, consider a scenario where you have four AD main servers in your head office that should be accessible from all your sites. Therefore, you have created an object group named "Active-Directory" to use in all your sites. Now you want to add two more AD servers to one of your branch offices. You can do this by adding their details as additional values specific to that branch office on the object group "Active-Directory". These two servers do not participate in determining whether the object "Active-Directory" is consistent or shared. Therefore, the four AD main servers are accessible from all your sites, but the branch office (with two additional servers) can access two AD servers and four AD main servers.


Note


If there are inconsistent shared network groups, you can combine them into a single shared network group with additional values. See Resolve Inconsistent Object Issues for more information.



Caution


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Changes you make to network objects and groups on the or Objects > FDM Objects page are reflected in the corresponding cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center network object or group on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the changes to the on-prem management center on which you have these objects.

Deleting a network object or group from either page deletes the object or group from both pages.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the shared network group you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

  • The Devices field shows the devices the shared network group is present.

  • The Usage field shows the rulesets associated with the shared network group.

  • The Default Values field specifies the default network objects and their values associated with the shared network group that was provided during their creation. Next to this field, you can see the number of devices that contain this default value, and you can click to see their names and device types. You can also see the rulesets associated with this value.

Step 4

In the Additional Values field, enter a value or name. When you start typing, CDO provides object names or values that match your entry.

Step 5

You can choose one of the existing objects shown or create a new one based on the name or value that you have entered.

Step 6

If CDO finds a match, to choose an existing object, click Add to add the network object or network group to the new network group.

Step 7

If you have entered a value or object that is not present, you can perform one of the following:

  • Click Add as New Object With This Name to create a new object with that name. Enter a value and click the checkmark to save it.

  • Click Add as New Object to create a new object. The object name and value are the same. Enter a name and click the checkmark to save it.

It's is possible to create a new object even though the value is already present. You can make changes to those objects and save them.

Step 8

In the Devices column, click the cell associated with the newly added object and click Add Devices.

Step 9

Select the devices that you want and click OK.

Step 10

Click Save. CDO displays the devices that will be affected by the change.

Step 11

Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any devices affected by it.

Step 12

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Edit Additional Values in a Shared Network Group

Caution


If cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Changes you make to network objects and groups on the or Objects > FDM Objects page are reflected in the corresponding cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center network object or group on the Objects > Other FTD Objects page. In addition, an entry is created in the Devices with Pending Changes page for each on-prem management center with Discover & Manage Network Objects enabled, from which you can choose and deploy the changes to the on-prem management center on which you have these objects.

Deleting a network object or group from either page deletes the object or group from both pages.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the object having the override you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Modify the override value:

  • Click the edit icon to modify the value.

  • Click the cell in the Devices column to assign new devices. You can select an already assigned device and click Remove Overrides to remove overrides on that device.

  • Click arrow in Default Values to push and make it an additional value of the shared network group. All devices associated with the shared network group are automatically assigned to it.

  • Click arrow in Override Values to push and make it as default objects of the shared network group.

  • Click the delete icon next to remove the object from the network group.

Step 5

Click Save. CDO displays the devices that will be affected by the change.

Step 6

Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any devices affected by it.

Step 7

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Deleting Network Objects and Groups in CDO

If Cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center is deployed on your tenant:

Deleting a network object or group from the or Objects > FDM Objects page deletes the replicated network object or group from the Objects > Other FTD Objects page and vice-versa.

URL Objects

URL objects and URL groups are used by Firepower devices. Use URL objects and groups (collectively referred to as URL objects) to define the URL or IP addresses of web requests. You can use these objects to implement manual URL filtering in access control policies or blocking in Security Intelligence policies. A URL object defines a single URL or IP address, whereas a URL group defines more than one URL or IP address.

Before You Begin

When creating URL objects, keep the following points in mind:

  • If you do not include a path (that is, there is no / character in the URL), the match is based on the server's hostname only. The hostname is considered a match if it comes after the :// separator, or after any dot in the hostname. For example, ign.com matches ign.com and www.ign.com, but it does not match verisign.com.

  • If you include one or more / character, the entire URL string is used for a substring match, including the server name, path, and any query parameters. However, we recommend that you do not use manual URL filtering to block or allow individual web pages or parts of sites, as servers can be reorganized and pages moved to new paths. Substring matching can also lead to unexpected matches, where the string you include in the URL object also matches paths on unintended servers or strings within query parameters.

  • The system disregards the encryption protocol (HTTP vs HTTPS). In other words, if you block a website, both HTTP and HTTPS traffic to that website is blocked, unless you use an application condition to target a specific protocol. When creating a URL object, you do not need to specify the protocol when creating an object. For example, use example.com rather than http://example.com.

  • If you plan to use a URL object to match HTTPS traffic in an access control rule, create the object using the subject common name in the public key certificate used to encrypt the traffic. Also, the system disregards subdomains within the subject common name, so do not include subdomain information. For example, use example.com rather than www.example.com.

    However, please understand that the subject common name in the certificate might be completely unrelated to a web site's domain name. For example, the subject common name in the certificate for youtube.com is *.google.com (this of course might change at any time). You will get more consistent results if you use the SSL Decryption policy to decrypt HTTPS traffic so that URL filtering rules work on decrypted traffic.


    Note


    URL objects will not match HTTPS traffic if the browser resumes a TLS session because the certificate information is no longer available. So even if you carefully configure the URL object, you might get inconsistent results for HTTPS connections.


Create or Edit an FDM-Managed URL Object

URL objects are reusable components that specify a URL or IP address.

To create a URL object, follow these steps:

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar on the left, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click Create Object > FTD > URL.

Step 3

Enter an object name and description.

Step 4

Select Create a URL object.

Step 5

Enter the specific URL or IP address for your object.

Step 6

Click Add.


Create a Firepower URL Group

A URL group can be made up of one or more URL objects representing one or more URLs or IP addresses. The Firepower Device Manager and Firepower Management Center also refer to these objects as "URL Objects."

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click Create Object > FTD > URL.

Step 3

Enter an object name and description.

Step 4

Select Create a URL group.

Step 5

Add an existing object by clicking Add Object, selecting an object, and clicking Select. Repeat this step to add more objects.

Step 6

Click Add when you are done adding URL objects to the URL group.


Edit a Firepower URL Object or URL Group
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Filter the objects to find the object you want to edit and then select the object in the object table.

Step 3

In the details pane, click to edit.

Step 4

Edit the values in the dialog box in the same fashion that you created them in the procedures above.

Step 5

Click Save.

Step 6

CDO displays the policies that will be affected by the change. Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any policy affected by it.


Application Filter Objects

Application filter objects are used by Firepower devices. An application filter object defines the applications used in an IP connection, or a filter that defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. You can use these objects in policies to control traffic instead of using port specifications.

Although you can specify individual applications, application filters simplify policy creation and administration. For example, you could create an access control rule that identifies and blocks all high risk, low business relevance applications. If a user attempts to use one of those applications, the session is blocked.

You can select applications and application filters directly in a policy without using application filter objects. However, an object is convenient if you want to create several policies for the same group of applications or filters. The system includes several pre-defined application filters, which you cannot edit or delete.


Note


Cisco frequently updates and adds additional application detectors via system and vulnerability database (VDB) updates. Thus, a rule blocking high risk applications can automatically apply to new applications without you having to update the rule manually.



Note


When an FDM-managed device is onboarded to CDO, it converts the application filters to application filter objects without altering the rule defined in Access Rule or SSL Decryption. Because of a configuration change, the device's configuration status is changed to 'Not Synced' and requires configuration deployment from CDO. In general, FDM does not convert the application filters to application filter objects until you manually save the filters.


Create and Edit a Firepower Application Filter Object

An application filter object allows you to target hand-picked applications or a group of applications identified by the filters. This application filter objects can be used in policies.

Create a Firepower Application Filter Object

To create an application filter object, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click Create Object > FTD > Application Service.

Step 3

Enter an object name for the object and optionally, a description.

Step 4

Click Add Filter and select the applications and filters to add to the object.

The initial list shows applications in a continually scrolling list. Click Advanced Filter to see the filter options and to get an easier view for selecting applications. Click Add when you have made your selections. You can repeat the process to add additional applications or filters.

Note

 

Multiple selections within a single filter criteria have an OR relationship. For example, Risk is High OR Very High. The relationship between filters is AND, so Risk is High OR Very High, AND Business Relevance is Low OR Very Low. As you select filters, the list of applications in the display updates to show only those that meet the criteria. You can use these filters to help you find applications that you want to add individually, or to verify that you are selecting the desired filters to add to the rule.

Risks: The likelihood that the application is used for purposes that might be against your organization's security policy, from very low to very high.

Business Relevance: The likelihood that the application is used within the context of your organization's business operations, as opposed to recreationally, from very low to very high.

Types: The type of application.

  • Application Protocol: Application protocols such as HTTP and SSH, which represent communications between hosts.

  • Client Protocol: Clients such as web browsers and email clients, which represent software running on the host.

  • Web Application: Web applications such as MPEG video and Facebook, which represent the content or requested URL for HTTP traffic.

Categories: A general classification for the application that describes its most essential function.

Tags: Additional information about the application, similar to category.

For encrypted traffic, the system can identify and filter traffic using only the applications tagged SSL Protocol. Applications without this tag can only be detected in unencrypted or decrypted traffic. Also, the system assigns the decrypted traffic tag to applications that the system can detect in decrypted traffic only, not encrypted or unencrypted.

Applications List (bottom of the display): This list updates as you select filters from the options above the list, so you can see the applications that currently match the filter. Use this list to verify that your filter is targeting the desired applications when you intend to add filter criteria to the rule. To add a specific application or applications to your object, select them from the filtered list. Once you select the applications, the filter will no longer apply. If you want the filter itself to be the object, do not select an application from the list. Then the object will represent ever application identified by the filter.

Step 5

Click OK to save your changes.


Edit a Firepower Application Filter Object
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the object you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the object you want to edit.

Step 4

Click the edit icon in the Actions pane of the details panel.

Step 5

Edit the values in the dialog box in the same fashion that you created them in the procedures above.

Step 6

Click Save.

Step 7

CDO displays the policies that will be affected by the change. Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any policy affected by it.


Geolocation Objects

A geolocation object defines countries and continents that host the device that is the source or destination of traffic. You can use these objects in policies to control traffic instead of using IP addresses. For example, using geographical location, you could easily restrict access to a particular country without needing to know all of the potential IP addresses used there.

You can typically select geographical locations directly in a policy without using geolocation objects. However, an object is convenient if you want to create several policies for the same group of countries and continents.

Update Geolocation Database

To ensure that you are using up-to-date geographical location data to filter your traffic, Cisco strongly recommends that you regularly update the geolocation database (GeoDB). At this time, this is not a task that you can perform using CDO. See the following sections of the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for the version your device is running to learn more about the GeoDB and how to update it.

  • Updating System Databases and Feeds

  • Updating System Databases

Create and Edit a Firepower Geolocation Filter Object

You can create a geolocation object by itself on the object page or when creating a security policy. This procedure creates a geolocation object from the object page.

To create a geolocation object, follow these steps:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click Create Object > FTD > Geolocation.

Step 3

Enter an object name for the object and optionally, a description.

Step 4

In the filter bar, start typing the name of a country or a region and you are presented with a list of possible matches.

Step 5

Check the country, countries, or regions that you want to add to the object.

Step 6

Click Add.


Edit a Geolocation Object
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, choose Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Use the filter panes and search field to locate your object.

Step 3

In the Actions pane, click Edit.

Step 4

You can change the name of the object and add or remove countries and regions to your object.

Step 5

Click Save.

Step 6

You will be notified if any devices are impacted. Click Confirm.

Step 7

If a device or policy was impacted, open the Inventory page and Preview and Deploy the changes to the device.


DNS Group Objects

Domain Name System (DNS) groups define a list of DNS servers and some associated attributes. DNS servers are needed to resolve fully-qualified domain names (FQDN), such as www.example.com, to IP addresses. You can configure different DNS group objects for management and data interfaces.

FDM-managed devices must have a DNS server configured prior to creating a new DNS Group Object. You can either add a DNS Server to the Firepower Threat Defense Device Settings in CDO or create a DNS server in firewall device manager and then sync the FDM-managed configuration to CDO. To create or modify the DNS server settings in firewall device manager, see Configuring DNS for Data and Management Interfaces in the Cisco Firepower Device Manager Configuration Guide, Version 6.4. or later.

Create a DNS Group Object

Use the following procedure to create a new DNS group object in CDO:

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar on the left, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button to create an object.

Step 3

Click FTD > DNS Group.

Step 4

Enter an Object Name.

Step 5

(Optional) Add a description.

Step 6

Enter the IP address of a DNS server. You can add up to six DNS servers; click the Add DNS Server. If you want to remove a server address, click the delete icon.

Note

 

The list is in priority order: the first server in the list is always used, and subsequent servers are used only if a response is not received from the servers above it. Although you can add up to six servers, only the first 3 servers listed will be used for the management interface.

Step 7

Enter the Domain Search Name. This domain is added to hostnames that are not fully-qualified, for example, serverA instead of serverA.example.com.

Step 8

Enter the amount of Retries. The number of times, from 0 to 10, to retry the list of DNS servers when the system does not receive a response. The default is 2. This setting applies to DNS groups used on the data interfaces only.

Step 9

Enter the Timeout value. The number of seconds, from 1 to 30, to wait before trying the next DNS server. The default is 2 seconds. Each time the system retries the list of servers, this timeout doubles. This setting applies to DNS groups used on the data interfaces only.

Step 10

Click Add.


Edit a DNS Group Object

You can edit a DNS group object that was created in CDO or in firewall device manager. Use the following procedure to edit an existing DNS group object:

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar on the left, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the DNS Group Object you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the object and click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Edit any of the following entries:

  • Object Name.

  • Description.

  • DNS Server. You can edit, add, or remove DNS servers from this list.

  • Domain Search Name.

  • Retries.

  • Timeout.

Step 5

Click Save.

Step 6

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Delete a DNS Group Object

Use the following procedure to delete a DNS Group Object from CDO:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the DNS Group Object you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the object and click the Remove icon .

Step 4

Confirm you want to delete the DNS group object and click Ok.

Step 5

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Add a DNS Group Object as an FDM-Managed DNS Server

You can add a DNS group object as the preferred DNS Group for either the Data Interface or the Management Interface. See FDM-Managed Device Settings for more information.

Certificate Objects

Digital certificates provide digital identification for authentication. Certificates are used for SSL (Secure Socket Layer), TLS (Transport Layer Security), and DTLS (Datagram TLS) connections, such as HTTPS and LDAPS.

See the About Certificates and Configuring Certificates following sections of the Resuable Objects chapter of the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for the version your device is running.

About Certificates

Digital certificates provide digital identification for authentication. A digital certificate includes information that identifies a device or user, such as the name, serial number, company, department, or IP address. A digital certificate also includes a copy of the public key for the user or device. Certificates are used for SSL (Secure Socket Layer), TLS (Transport Layer Security), and DTLS (Datagram TLS) connections, such as HTTPS and LDAPS.

You can create the following types of certificate:

  • Internal certificates—Internal identity certificates are certificates for specific systems or hosts. You can generate these yourself using the OpenSSL toolkit or get them from a Certificate Authority. You can also generate a self-signed certificate.

    The system comes with the following pre-defined internal certificates, which you can use as is or replace: DefaultInternalCertificate and DefaultWebServerCertificate

  • Internal Certificate Authority (CA) certificates—Internal CA certificates are certificates that the system can use to sign other certificates. These certificates differ from internal identity certificates with respect to the basic constraints extension and the CA flag, which are enabled for CA certificates but disabled for identity certificates. You can generate these yourself using the OpenSSL toolkit or get them from a Certificate Authority. You can also generate a self-signed internal CA certificate. If you configure self-signed internal CA certificates, the CA runs on the device itself.

    The system comes with the following pre-defined internal CA certificate, which you can use as is or replace: NGFW-Default-InternalCA

  • Trusted Certificate Authority (CA) certificates—A trusted CA certificate is used to sign other certificates. It is self-signed and called a root certificate. A certificate that is issued by another CA certificate is called a subordinate certificate.

    Certificate Authorities (CAs) are trusted authorities that "sign" certificates to verify their authenticity, thereby guaranteeing the identity of the device or user. CAs issue digital certificates in the context of a PKI, which uses public-key or private-key encryption to ensure security. A CA can be a trusted third party, such as VeriSign, or a private (in-house) CA that you establish within your organization. CAs are responsible for managing certificate requests and issuing digital certificates.

    The system includes many trusted CA certificates from third party Certificate Authorities. These are used by SSL decryption policies for Decrypt Re-Sign actions.

For more information, see the Certificate Types Used by Feature section of the Reusable Objects chapter of the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for the version your device is running.

Certificate Types Used by Feature

You need to create the right type of certificate for each feature. The following features require certificates.

Identity Policies (Captive Portal)—Internal Certificate

(Optional.) Captive portal is used in identity policies. Users must accept this certificate when authenticating to the device for purposes of identifying themselves and receiving the IP address associated with their usernames. If you do not supply a certificate, the device uses an automatically generated certificate.

SSL Decryption Policy—Internal, Internal CA, and Trusted CA Certificates.

(Required.) The SSL decryption policy uses certificates for the following purposes:

  • Internal certificates are used for known key decryption rules.

  • Internal CA certificates are used for decrypt re-sign rules when creating the session between the client and FDM-managed device.

  • Trusted CA certificates

    • They are used indirectly for decrypt re-sign rules when creating the session between the FDM-managed device and server. Unlike the other certificates, you do not directly configure these certificates in the SSL decryption policy; they simply need to be uploaded to the system. The system includes a large number of trusted CA certificates, so you might not need to upload any additional certificates.

    • When creating an Active Directory Realm object and configuring the directory server to use encryption.

Configuring Certificates

Certificates used in identity policies or SSL decryption policies must be an X509 certificate in PEM or DER format. You can use OpenSSL to generate certificates if needed, obtain them from a trusted Certificate Authority, or create self-signed certificates.

Use these procedures to configure certificate objects:

Uploading Internal and Internal CA Certificates

Internal identity certificates are certificates for specific systems or hosts. You can generate these yourself using the OpenSSL toolkit or get them from a Certificate Authority. You can also generate a self-signed certificate.

Internal Certificate Authority (CA) certificates (Internal CA certificates) are certificates that the system can use to sign other certificates. These certificates differ from internal identity certificates with respect to the basic constraints extension and the CA flag, which are enabled for CA certificates but disabled for identity certificates. You can generate these yourself using the OpenSSL toolkit or get them from a Certificate Authority. You can also generate a self-signed internal CA certificate. If you configure self-signed internal CA certificates, the CA runs on the device itself.

For information on the features that use these certificates, see Certificate Type Used by Feature.

Procedure

This procedure creates an internal or internal CA certificate by uploading a certificate file or pasting existing certificate text into a text box. If you want to generate a self signed certificate, see Generating Self-Signed Internal and Internal CA Certificates.

To create an internal or internal CA certificate object, or when adding a new certificate object to a policy, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

Do one of the following:

  • Create the certificate object in the Objects page:

    1. In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

    2. Click the plus button and select FTD > Certificate

  • Click Create New Object when adding a new certificate object to a policy.

Step 2

Enter a Name for the certificate. The name is used in the configuration as an object name only, it does not become part of the certificate itself.

Step 3

In step 1, select Internal Certificate or Internal CA.

Step 4

In step 2, select Upload to upload the certificate file.

Step 5

In step 3, in the Server Certificate area, paste the certificate contents in the text box or upload the certificate file as explained in the wizard. If you paste the certificate into the text box, the certificate must include the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END CERTIFICATE lines. For example:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
 MIICMTCCAZoCCQDdUV3NGK/cUjANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQsFADBdMQswCQYDVQQGEwJV
UzETMBEGA1UECAwKU29tZS1TdGF0ZTEhMB8GA1UECgwYSW50ZXJuZXQgV2lkZ2l0
(...5 lines removed...)
shGJDReRYJQqilhHZrYTWZAYTrD7NQPHutK+ZiJng67cPgnNDuXEn55UwMOQoHBp
HMUwmhiGZlzJM8BpX2Js2yQ3ms30pr8rO+gPCPMCAwEAATANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQsF
AAOBgQCB02CebA6YjJCGr2CJZrQSeUwSveRBpmOuoqm98o2Z+5gJM5CkqgfxwCUn
RV7LRfQGFYd76V/5uor4Wx2ZCjqy6+zuQEm4ZxWNSZpA9UBixFXJCs9MBO4qkG5D
vlk3WYJfcgyJ10h4E4b0W2xiixBU+xoOTLRATnbKY36EWAG5cw==
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

Step 6

In step 3, in the Certificate Key area, paste the key contents into the Certificate Key text box or upload the key file as explained in the wizard. If you paste the key into the text box, the key must include the BEGIN PRIVATE KEY or BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY and END PRIVATE KEY or END PRIVATE KEY lines.

Note

 

The key cannot be encrypted.

Step 7

Click Add.


Uploading Trusted CA Certificates

A trusted Certificate Authority (CA) certificate is used to sign other certificates. It is self-signed and called a root certificate. A certificate that is issued by another CA certificate is called a subordinate certificate.

For information on the features that use these certificates, see Certificate Type Used by Feature.

Obtain a trusted CA certificate from an external certificate authority, or create one using your own internal CA, for example, with OpenSSL tools. Then, use the following procedure to upload the certificate.

Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

Do one of the following:

  • Create the certificate object in the Objects page:

    1. In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

    2. Click the plus button and select FTD > Certificate.

  • Click Create New Object when adding a new certificate object to a policy.

Step 2

Enter a Name for the certificate. The name is used in the configuration as an object name only, it does not become part of the certificate itself.

Step 3

In step 1, select External CA Certificate and click Continue. The wizard advances to step 3.

Step 4

In step 3, in the Certificate Contents area, paste the certificate contents in the text box or upload the certificate file as explained in the wizard.

The certificate must follow these guidelines:

  • The name of the server in the certificate must match the server Hostname / IP Address. For example, if you use 10.10.10.250 as the IP address but ad.example.com in the certificate, the connection fails.

  • The certificate must be an X509 certificate in PEM or DER format.

  • The certificate you paste must include the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END CERTIFICATE lines. For example:

    -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
    MIIFgTCCA2mgAwIBAgIJANvdcLnabFGYMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBCwUAMFcxCzAJBgNV
    BAYTAlVTMQswCQYDVQQIDAJUWDEPMA0GA1UEBwwGYXVzdGluMRQwEgYDVQQKDAsx
    OTIuMTY4LjEuMTEUMBIGA1UEAwwLMTkyLjE2OC4xLjEwHhcNMTYxMDI3MjIzNDE3
    WhcNMTcxMDI3MjIzNDE3WjBXMQswCQYDVQQGEwJVUzELMAkGA1UECAwCVFgxDzAN
    BgNVBAcMBmF1c3RpbjEUMBIGA1UECgwLMTkyLjE2OC4xLjExFDASBgNVBAMMCzE5
    Mi4xNjguMS4xMIICIjANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOCAg8AMIICCgKCAgEA5NceYwtP
    ES6Ve+S9z7WLKGX5JlF58AvH82GPkOQdrixn3FZeWLQapTpJZt/vgtAI2FZIK31h
    (...20 lines removed...)
    hbr6HOgKlOwXbRvOdksTzTEzVUqbgxt5Lwupg3b2ebQhWJz4BZvMsZX9etveEXDh
    PY184V3yeSeYjbSCF5rP71fObG9Iu6+u4EfHp/NQv9s9dN5PMffXKieqpuN20Ojv
    2b1sfOydf4GMUKLBUMkhQnip6+3W
    -----END CERTIFICATE-----

Step 5

Click Add.


Generating Self-Signed Internal and Internal CA Certificates

Internal identity certificates are certificates for specific systems or hosts. You can generate these yourself using the OpenSSL toolkit or get them from a Certificate Authority. You can also generate a self-signed certificate.

Internal Certificate Authority (CA) certificates (Internal CA certificates) are certificates that the system can use to sign other certificates. These certificates differ from internal identity certificates with respect to the basic constraints extension and the CA flag, which are enabled for CA certificates but disabled for identity certificates. You can generate these yourself using the OpenSSL toolkit or get them from a Certificate Authority. You can also generate a self-signed internal CA certificate. If you configure self-signed internal CA certificates, the CA runs on the device itself.

You can also create these certificates using OpenSSL, or obtain them from a trusted CA, and upload them. For more information, see Uploading Internal and Internal CA Certificates.

For information on the features that use these certificates, see Certificate Type Used by Feature.


Note


New self-signed certificates are generated with a 5-year validity term. Be sure to replace certificates before they expire.



Warning


Upgrading devices that have self-signed certificates may experience issues; see New Certificate Detected for more information.


Procedure

This procedure generates a self-signed certificate by entering the appropriate certificate field values in a wizard. If you want to create an internal or internal CA certificate by uploading a certificate file, see Uploading Internal and Internal CA Certificates.

To generate a self-signed certificate, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

Do one of the following:

  • Create the certificate object in the Objects page:

    1. In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

    2. Click the plus button and select FTD > Certificate.

  • Click Create New Object when adding a new certificate object to a policy.

Step 2

Enter a Name for the certificate. The name is used in the configuration as an object name only, it does not become part of the certificate itself.

Step 3

In step 1, select Internal Certificate or Internal CA.

Step 4

In step 2, select Self-Signed to create the self-signed certificate in this step.

Step 5

Configure at least one of the following for the certificate subject and issuer information.

  • Country (C)— Select the country code from the drop-down list.

  • State or Province (ST)— The state or province to include in the certificate.

  • Locality or City (L)— The locality to include in the certificate, such as the name of the city.

  • Organization (O)— The organization or company name to include in the certificate.

  • Organizational Unit (Department) (OU)— The name of the organization unit (for example, a department name) to include in the certificate.

  • Common Name (CN)— The X.500 common name to include in the certificate. This could be the name of the device, web site, or another text string. This element is usually required for successful connections. For example, you must include a CN in the internal certificate used for remote access VPN.

Step 6

Click Add.


About IPsec Proposals

IPsec is one of the most secure methods for setting up a VPN. IPsec provides data encryption at the IP packet level, offering a robust security solution that is standards-based. With IPsec, data is transmitted over a public network through tunnels. A tunnel is a secure, logical communication path between two peers. Traffic that enters an IPsec tunnel is secured by a combination of security protocols and algorithms called a transform set. During the IPsec security association (SA) negotiation, peers search for a transform set that is the same at both peers.

There are separate IPsec proposal objects based on the IKE version, IKEv1, or IKEv2:

  • When you create an IKEv1 IPsec proposal, you select the mode in which IPsec operates, and define the required encryption and authentication types. You can select single options for the algorithms. If you want to support multiple combinations in a VPN, create and select multiple IKEv1 IPsec Proposal objects.

  • When you create an IKEv2 IPsec proposal, you can select all of the encryption and hash algorithms allowed in a VPN. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer until a match is found. This allows you to potentially send a single proposal to convey all the allowed combinations instead of the need to send each allowed combination individually as with IKEv1.

The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) is used for both IKEv1 and IKEv2 IPsec proposals. It provides authentication, encryption, and antireplay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50.


Note


We recommend using both encryption and authentication on IPsec tunnels.


The following topics explain how to configure IPsec proposals for each IKE version:

Managing an IKEv1 IPsec Proposal Object

IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel. There are separate objects for IKEv1 and IKEv2. Currently, CDO supports IKEv1 IPsec proposal objects.

The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) is used for both IKEv1 and IKEv2 IPsec proposals. It provides authentication, encryption, and anti-replay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50.


Note


We recommend using both encryption and authentication on IPsec tunnels.


Create or Edit an IKEv1 IPsec Proposal Object

There are several pre-defined IKEv1 IPsec proposals. You can also create new proposals to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create IKEv1 IPsec Proposals objects while editing the IKEv1 IPsec settings in a Site-to-Site VPN connection by clicking the Create New IKEv1 Proposal link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FTD > IKEv1 IPsec Proposal to create the new object.

  • In the object page, select the IPsec proposal you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name for the new object.

Step 4

Select the Mode in which the IKEv1 IPsec Proposal object operates.

  • Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet. The IPSec header is added between the original IP header and a new IP header. This is the default. Use tunnel mode when the firewall is protecting traffic to and from hosts positioned behind the firewall. Tunnel mode is the normal way regular IPSec is implemented between two firewalls (or other security gateways) that are connected over an untrusted network, such as the Internet.

  • Transport mode encapsulates only the upper-layer protocols of an IP packet. The IPSec header is inserted between the IP header and the upper-layer protocol header (such as TCP). Transport mode requires that both the source and destination hosts support IPSec, and can only be used when the destination peer of the tunnel is the final destination of the IP packet. Transport mode is generally used only when protecting a Layer 2 or Layer 3 tunneling protocol such as GRE, L2TP, and DLSW.

Step 5

Select the ESP Encryption (Encapsulating Security Protocol encryption) algorithm for this proposal. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

Step 6

Select the ESP Hash or integrity algorithm to use for authentication. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use.

Step 7

Click Add.


Managing an IKEv2 IPsec Proposal Object

IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel.

When you create an IKEv2 IPsec proposal, you can select all of the encryption and hash algorithms allowed in a VPN. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer until a match is found. This allows you to potentially send a single proposal to convey all the allowed combinations instead of the need to send each allowed combination individually as with IKEv1.

Create or Edit an IKEv2 IPsec Proposal Object

There are several pre-defined IKEv2 IPsec proposals. You can also create new proposals to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create IKEv2 IPsec Proposals objects while editing the IKEv2 IPsec settings in a VPN connection by clicking the Create New IPsec Proposal link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FTD > IKEv2 IPsec Proposal to create the new object.

  • In the object page, select the IPsec proposal you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name for the new object.

Step 4

Configure the IKE2 IPsec proposal objects:

  • Encryption—The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) encryption algorithm for this proposal. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

  • Integrity Hash—The hash or integrity algorithm to use for authentication. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use.

Step 5

Click Add.


About Global IKE Policies

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is a key management protocol that is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

The IKE negotiation comprises two phases. Phase 1 negotiates a security association between two IKE peers, which enables the peers to communicate securely in Phase 2. During Phase 2 negotiation, IKE establishes SAs for other applications, such as IPsec. Both phases use proposals when they negotiate a connection. An IKE proposal is a set of algorithms that two peers use to secure the negotiation between them. IKE negotiation begins by each peer agreeing on a common (shared) IKE policy. This policy states which security parameters are used to protect subsequent IKE negotiations.

IKE policy objects define the IKE proposals for these negotiations. The objects that you enable are the ones used when the peers negotiate a VPN connection: you cannot specify different IKE policies per connection. The relative priority of each object determines which of these policies are tried first, with the lower number being a higher priority. The connection is not established if the negotiation fails to find a policy that both peers can support.

To define the global IKE policy, you select which objects to enable for each IKE version. If the pre-defined objects do not satisfy your requirements, create new policies to enforce your security policy.

The following procedure explains how to configure the global policy through the Objects page. You can also enable, disable, and create policies when editing a VPN connection by clicking Edit for the IKE Policy settings.

The following topics explain how to configure IKE policies for each version:

Managing IKEv1 Policies
About IKEv1 Policy

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 1 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv1 policies when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

There are several pre-defined IKEv1 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

Create or Edit an IKEv1 Policy

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create an IKEv1 policy while editing the IKE settings in a Site-to-Site VPN connection by clicking the Create New IKEv1 Policy link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FTD > IKEv1 Policy to create a new IKEv1 policy.

  • In the object page, select the IKEv1 policy you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name, up to 128 characters.

Step 4

Configure the IKEv1 properties.

  • Priority—The relative priority of the IKE policy, from 1 to 65,535. The priority determines the order of the IKE policy compared by the two negotiating peers when attempting to find a common security association (SA). If the remote IPsec peer does not support the parameters selected in your highest priority policy, it tries to use the parameters defined in the next lowest priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority.

  • Encryption—The encryption algorithm used to establish the Phase 1 security association (SA) for protecting Phase 2 negotiations. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

  • Diffie-Hellman Group—The Diffie-Hellman group to use for deriving a shared secret between the two IPsec peers without transmitting it to each other. A larger modulus provides higher security but requires more processing time. The two peers must have a matching modulus group. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use.

  • Lifetime—The lifetime of the security association (SA), in seconds, from 120 to 2147483647 or blank. When the lifetime is exceeded, the SA expires and must be renegotiated between the two peers. As a general rule, the shorter the lifetime (up to a point), the more secure your IKE negotiations will be. However, with longer lifetimes, future IPsec security associations can be set up more quickly than with shorter lifetimes. The default is 86400. To specify an unlimited lifetime, enter no value (leave the field blank).

  • Authentication—The method of authentication to use between the two peers. For more information, see Deciding Which Authentication Method to Use.

    • Preshared Key—Use the preshared key that is defined on each device. These keys allow for a secret key to be shared between two peers and to be used by IKE during the authentication phase. If the peer is not configured with the same preshared key, the IKE SA cannot be established.

    • Certificate—Use the device identity certificates for the peers to identify each other. You must obtain these certificates by enrolling each peer in a Certificate Authority. You must also upload the trusted CA root and intermediate CA certificates used to sign the identity certificates in each peer. The peers can be enrolled in the same or a different CA. You cannot use self-signed certificates for either peer.

  • Hash—The hash algorithm for creating a message digest, which is used to ensure message integrity. For an explanation of the options, see Encryption and Hash Algorithms Used in VPN.

Step 5

Click Add.


Managing IKEv2 Policies
About IKEv2 Policy

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 2 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv2 policies when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

There are several pre-defined IKEv2 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

Create or Edit an IKEv2 Policy

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create an IKEv2 policy while editing the IKE settings in a Site-to-Site VPN connection by clicking the Create New IKEv2 Policy link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar on the left, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FTD > IKEv2 Policy to create a new IKEv2 policy.

  • In the object page, select the IKEv2 policy you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name, up to 128 characters.

Step 4

Configure the IKEv2 properties.

  • Priority—The relative priority of the IKE policy, from 1 to 65,535. The priority determines the order of the IKE policy compared by the two negotiating peers when attempting to find a common security association (SA). If the remote IPsec peer does not support the parameters selected in your highest priority policy, it tries to use the parameters defined in the next lowest priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority.

  • State—Whether the IKE policy is enabled or disabled. Click the toggle to change the state. Only enabled policies are used during IKE negotiations.

  • Encryption—The encryption algorithm used to establish the Phase 1 security association (SA) for protecting Phase 2 negotiations. Select all algorithms that you want to allow, although you cannot include both mixed-mode (AES-GCM) and normal mode options in the same policy. (Normal mode requires that you select an integrity hash, whereas mixed-mode prohibits a separate integrity hash selection.) The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

  • Diffie-Hellman Group—The Diffie-Hellman group to use for deriving a shared secret between the two IPsec peers without transmitting it to each other. A larger modulus provides higher security but requires more processing time. The two peers must have a matching modulus group. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest group until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use.

  • Integrity Hash—The integrity portion of the hash algorithm for creating a message digest, which is used to ensure message integrity. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. The integrity hash is not used with the AES-GCM encryption options. For an explanation of the options, see Encryption and Hash Algorithms Used in VPN.

  • Pseudo-Random Function (PRF) Hash—The pseudo-random function (PRF) portion of the hash algorithm, which is used as the algorithm to derive keying material and hashing operations required for the IKEv2 tunnel encryption. In IKEv1, the Integrity and PRF algorithms are not separated, but in IKEv2, you can specify different algorithms for these elements. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Encryption and Hash Algorithms Used in VPN.

  • Lifetime—The lifetime of the security association (SA), in seconds, from 120 to 2147483647 or blank. When the lifetime is exceeded, the SA expires and must be renegotiated between the two peers. As a general rule, the shorter the lifetime (up to a point), the more secure your IKE negotiations will be. However, with longer lifetimes, future IPsec security associations can be set up more quickly than with shorter lifetimes. The default is 86400. To specify an unlimited lifetime, enter no value (leave the field blank).

Step 5

Click Add.


RA VPN Objects

Security Zone Object

A security zone is a grouping of interfaces. Zones divide the network into segments to help you manage and classify traffic. You can define multiple zones, but a given interface can be in one zone only.

The Firepower system creates the following zones during initial configuration and they are displayed in CDO's object page. You can edit zones to add or remove interfaces, or you can delete the zones if you no longer use them.

  • inside_zone-Includes the inside interface. This zone is intended to represent internal networks.

  • outside_zone-Includes the outside interface. This zone is intended to represent networks external to your control, such as the internet.

Typically, you would group interfaces by the role they play in your network. For example, you would place the interface that connects to the internet in the outside_zone security zone, and all of the interfaces for your internal networks in the inside_zone security zone. Then, you could apply access control rules to traffic coming from the outside zone and going to the inside zone.

Before creating zones, consider the access rules and other policies you want to apply to your networks. For example, you do not need to put all internal interfaces into the same zone. If you have 4 internal networks, and you want to treat one differently than the other three, you can create two zones rather than one. If you have an interface that should allow outside access to a public web server, you might want to use a separate zone for the interface.

Create or Edit a Firepower Security Zone Object

A security zone is a grouping of interfaces. Zones divide the network into segments to help you manage and classify traffic. You can define multiple zones, but a given interface can be in one zone only. For more information see, Security Zone Object.

A security zone object is not associated with a device unless it is used in a rule for that device.

Create a Security Zone Object

To create a security zone object, follow these instructions:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button and select FTD > Security Zone to create the object.

Step 3

Give the object a name and, optionally, a description.

Step 4

Select the interfaces to put in the security zone.

Step 5

Click Add.


Edit a Security Zone Object

After onboarding an FDM-managed device, you will find there are already at least two security zones, one is the inside_zone and the other is the outside_zone. These zones can be edited or deleted. To edit any security zone object, follow these instructions:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Find the object you want to edit:

  • If you know the name of the object, you can search for it in the Objects page:

    • Filter the list by security zone.

    • Enter the name of the object in the search field.

    • Select the object.

  • If you know the object is associated with a device, you can search for it starting on the Inventory page.

    • In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

    • Click the Devices tab.

    • Click the apporpriate tab.

    • Use the device filter and search bar to locate your device.

    • Select the device.

    • In the Management pane at the right, click Objects.

    • Use the object filter and search bar to locate the object you are looking for.

Note

 

If the security zone object you created is not associated with a rule in a policy for your device, it is considered "unassociated" and you will not see it among the search results for a device.

Step 3

Select the object.

Step 4

Click the Edit icon in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 5

After editing any of the attributes of the object. Click Save.

Step 6

After clicking Save you receive a message explaining how these changes will affect other devices. Click Confirm to save the changes or Cancel.


Service Objects

Firepower Service Objects

FTD service objects, service groups, and port groups are reusable components that contain protocols or ports considered part of the IP protocol suite.

FTD service groups are collections of service objects. A service group may contain objects for one or more protocols. You can use the objects and groups in security policies for purposes of defining network traffic matching criteria, for example, to use access rules to allow traffic to specific TCP ports. The system includes several pre-defined objects for common services. You can use these objects in your policies; however, you cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

Firepower Device Manager and Firepower Management Center refer to service objects as port objects and service groups and port groups.

See Create and Edit Firepower Threat Defense Service Objects for more information.

Protocol Objects

Protocol objects are a type of service object that contain less-commonly used or legacy protocols. Protocol objects are identified by a name and protocol number. CDO recognizes these objects in ASA and Firepower (FDM-managed device) configurations and gives them their own filter of "Protocols" so you can find them easily.

See Create and Edit Firepower Threat Defense Service Objects for more information.

ICMP Objects

An Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) object is a service object specifically for ICMP and IPv6-ICMP messages. CDO recognizes these objects in ASA and Firepower configurations when those devices are onboarded and CDO gives them their own filter of "ICMP" so you can find the objects easily.

Using CDO, you can rename or remove ICMP objects from an ASA configuration. You can use CDO to create, update, and delete ICMP and ICMPv6 objects in a Firepower configuration.


Note


For the ICMPv6 protocol, AWS does not support choosing specific arguments. Only rules that allow all ICMPv6 messages are supported.

See Create and Edit Firepower Threat Defense Service Objects for more information.


Create and Edit Firepower Service Objects

To create a firepower service object, follow these steps:

firewall device manager (FDM-managed) service objects are reusable components that specify a TCP/IP protocol and a port. The firewall device manager, On-Prem Firewall Management Center and Cloud-delivered Firewall Management Center refer to these objects as "Port Objects."

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue button on the right to create an object, and select FTD > Service.

Step 3

Enter an object name and description.

Step 4

Select Create a service object.

Step 5

Click the Service Type button and select the protocol for which you want to create an object.

Step 6

Configure the protocol as follows:

Step 7

Click Add.

Step 8

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Create a Firepower Service Group

A service group can be made up of one or more service objects representing one or more protocols. The service objects need to be created before they can be added to the group. The Firepower Device Manager and Firepower Management Center refer to these objects as "Port Objects."

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue button on the right to create an object, and select FTD > Service.

Step 3

Enter an object name and description.

Step 4

Select Create a service group.

Step 5

Add an object to the group by clicking Add Object.

  • Click Create to create a new object as you did above in Create a Firepower Service Object above.

  • Click Choose to add an existing service object to the group. Repeat this step to add more objects.

Step 6

Click Add when you are done adding service objects to the service group.

Step 7

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Edit a Firepower Service Object or Service Group
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Filter the objects to find the object you want to edit and then select the object in the object table.

Step 3

In the Actions pane, click Edit .

Step 4

Edit the values in the dialog box in the same fashion that you created them in the procedures above.

Step 5

Click Save.

Step 6

CDO displays the policies that will be affected by the change. Click Confirm to finalize the change to the object and any policy affected by it.

Step 7

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Security Group Tag Group

Security Group Tags
About Security Group Tags

If you use Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) to define and use security group tag (SGT) for classifying traffic in a Cisco TrustSec network, you can write access control rules that use SGT as matching criteria. Thus, you can block or allow access based on security group membership rather than IP addresses.

In ISE, you can create a SGT and assign host or network IP addresses to each tag. If you assign an SGT to a user's account, the SGT is assigned to the user's traffic. After you configure FDM-managed device to connect to an ISE server and create the SGT, you can create SGT groups in CDO and build access control rules around them. Note that you must configure ISE's SGT Exchange Protocol (SXP) mapping before you can associate an SGT to an FDM-managed device. See Security Group Tag Exchange Protocol in the Cisco Identity Services Engine Administrator Guide of the version you are currently running for more information.

When an FDM-managed device evaluates SGT as a traffic matching criteria for an access control rule, it uses the following priority:

  1. The source SGT defined in the packet, if any. No destination matching is done using this technique. For the SGT to be in the packet, the switches and routers in the network must be configured to add them. See the ISE documentation for information on how to implement this method.

  2. The SGT assigned to the user session, as downloaded from the ISE session directory. You need to enable the option to listen to session directory information for this kind of SGT matching, but this option is on by default when you first create the ISE identity source. The SGT can be matched to source or destination. Although not required, you would also normally set up a passive authentication identity rule, using the ISE identity source along with an AD realm, to collect user identity information.

  3. The SGT-to-IP address mapping downloaded using SXP. If the IP address is within the range for an SGT, then the traffic matches the access control rule that uses the SGT. The SGT can be matched to source or destination.


    Note


    You cannot use the information retrieved from ISE directly in an access control rule. Instead, you need to create SGT groups, which refer to the downloaded SGT information. Your SGT groups can refer to more than one SGT, so you can apply policy based on a relevant collections of tags if that is appropriate.


Version Support

CDO currently supports SGT and SGT groups on FDM-managed devices running Version 6.5 and later. an FDM-managed device allows you to configure and connect to an ISE server in Version 6.5 and later but not does not support SGT configuration in the UI until Version 6.7.

From the FDM-managed UI, this means that an FDM-managed device running Version 6.5 or later can download SXP mappings of SGTs but cannot be manually added to objects or access control rules. To make changes to the SGTs for devices running Version 6.5 or Version 6.6, you must use the ISE UI. If the device running Version 6.5 is onboarded to CDO, however, you can see the current SGTs associated with the device and create SGT groups.

SGT in CDO
Security Group Tags

SGTs are read-only in CDO. You cannot create or edit an SGT in CDO. To create an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Administrator Guide of the version your are currently running.

SGT Groups

Note


An FDM-managed device refers to groups of SGTs as SGT dynamic objects. In CDO, these lists of tags are currently called SGT groups. You can create an SGT group in CDO without referring to the FDM-managed device or ISE UI.


Use SGT groups to identify source or destination addresses based on an SGT assigned by ISE. You can then use the objects in access control rules for purposes of defining traffic matching criteria. You cannot use the information retrieved from ISE directly in an access control rule. Instead, you need to create SGT groups, which refer to the downloaded SGT information.

Your SGT groups can refer to more than one SGT, so you can apply policy based on relevant collections of tags if that is appropriate.

In order to create an SGT group in CDO, you must have at least one SGT already configured and SGT mappings from an ISE server configured for the FDM-managed console of the device you want to use. Note that if more than one FDM-managed device is associated with the same ISE server, an SGT or SGT group can be applied to more than one device. If a device is not associated with an ISE server, you cannot include SGT objects in your access control rule, or apply an SGT group to that device configuration.

SGT Groups in Rules

SGT groups can be added to access control rules; they appear as source or destination network objects. For more information about how networks work in rules, see Source and Destination Criteria in an FDM Access Control Rule.

You can create an SGT group from the Objects page. See Create an SGT Group for more information.

Create an SGT Group

To create an SGT group that can be used for an access control rule, use the following procedure:

Before you begin

You must have the following configurations or environments configured prior to creating a security group tag (SGT) group:

  • FDM-managed device must be running at least Version 6.5.

  • You must configure the ISE identity source to subscribe to SXP mappings and enable deploy changes. To manage SXP mappings, see Configure Security Groups and SXP Publishing in ISE of the Firepower Device Manager Configuration Guide for the version you're using, Version 6.7 and later.

  • All SGTs must be created in ISE. To create an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Configuration Guide of the version your are currently running.

Procedure

Step 1

On the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button to create an object.

Step 3

Click FTD > Network.

Step 4

Enter an Object Name.

Step 5

(Optional) Add a description.

Step 6

Click SGT and use the drop-down menu to check all the applicable SGTs you want included in the group. You can sort the list by SGT name.

Step 7

Click Save.

Note

 

You cannot create or edit SGTs in CDO, you can only add or remove them from an SGT group. To create or edit an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Configuration Guide of the version you are currently running.


Edit an SGT Group

To edit an SGT group, use the following procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the SGT group you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the SGT group and click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Modify the SGT group. Edit the name, description, or the SGTs associated with the group.

Step 5

Click Save.

Note

 

You cannot create or edit SGTs in CDO, you can only add or remove them from an SGT group. To create or edit an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Configuration Guide of the version you are currently running.


Add an SGT Group to an Access Control Rule

To add an SGT group to an access control rule, use the following procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want to add the SGT group to.

Step 4

In theManagement pane, select Policy.

Step 5

Click the blue plus button for either the Source or Destination objects and select SGT Groups.

Step 6

Locate the SGT group(s) you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 7

Click Save.

Step 8

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.

Note

 

If you need to create an additional SGT group, click Create New Object. Fill in the required information mentioned in Create an FTD SGT Group and Add the SGT group to the rule.


Syslog Server Objects

FDM-managed devices have a limited capacity to store events. To maximize storage for events, you can configure an external server. A system log (syslog) server object identifies a server that can receive connection-oriented or diagnostic syslog messages. If you have a syslog server set up for log collection and analysis, you can use the CDO to create objects to define them and use the objects in the related policies.

Create and Edit Syslog Server Objects

To create a new syslog server object, follow these steps:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the Create Object button .

Step 3

Select Syslog Server under FDM-managed device object types

Step 4

Configure the syslog server object properties:

  • IP Address—Enter the IP address of the syslog server.

  • Protocol Type—Select the protocol that your syslog server uses to receive messages. If you select TCP, the system can recognize when the syslog server is not available, and stops sending events until the server is available again.

  • Port Number—Enter a valid port number to use for syslog. If your syslog server uses default ports, enter 514 as the default UDP port or 1470 as the default TCP port. If the server does not use default ports, enter the correct port number. The port must be in the range 1025 to 65535.

  • Select an interface—Select which interface should be used for sending diagnostic syslog messages. Connection and intrusion events always use the management interface. Your interface selection determines the IP address associated with syslog messages. Note that you can only select one of the options listed below. You cannot select both. Select one of the following options:

    • Data Interface—Use the data interface you select for diagnostic syslog messages. Select an interface from the generated list. If the server is accessible through a bridge group member interface, select the bridge group interface (BVI). If it is accessible through the Diagnostic interface (the physical management interface), we recommend that you select Management Interface instead of this option. You cannot select a passive interface. For connection and intrusion syslog messages, the source IP address will either be for the management interface, or for the gateway interface if you route through data interfaces.

    • Management Interface—Use the virtual management interface for all types of syslog messages. The source IP address will either be for the management interface, or for the gateway interface if you route through data interfaces.

Step 5

Click Add.

Step 6

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Edit Syslog Server Objects

To edit an existing syslog server object, follow these steps:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the desired syslog server object and select it. You can filter the object list by the syslog server object type.

Step 3

In the Actions pane, click Edit.

Step 4

Make the desired edits and click Save.

Step 5

Confirm the changes you made.

Step 6

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Create a Syslog Server Object for Secure Logging Analytics (SaaS)

Create a syslog server object with the IP address, TCP port, or UDP port of the Secure Event Connector (SEC) you want to send events to. You would create one syslog object for every SEC that you have onboarded to your tenant but you would only send events from one rule to one syslog object representing one SEC.

Prerequisite

This task is part of a larger workflow. See Implementing Secure Logging Analytics (SaaS) for FDM-Managed Devices before you begin.

Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the Create Object button .

Step 3

Select Syslog Server under FDM-managed device object types.

Step 4

Configure the syslog server object properties. To find these properties of the SEC, from the navigation pane on the left, choose Tools & Services > Secure Connectors. Then select the Secure Event Connector you want to configure the syslog object for and look in the Details pane on the right.

  • IP Address—Enter the IP address of the SEC.

  • Protocol Type—Select TCP or UDP.

  • Port Number—Enter port 10125 if you selected TCP or 10025 if you selected UDP.

  • Select an interface—Select the interface configured to reach the SEC.

Note

 

FDM-managed device supports one syslog object per IP address so you will have to choose between using TCP and UDP.

Step 5

Click Add.


What to do next

Continue with Step 3 of Existing CDO Customer Workflow to Implement Secure Logging Analytics (SaaS) and Send Events through the Secure Event Connector to the Cisco Cloud.

Manage Security Policies in CDO

Security policies examine network traffic with the ultimate goal of allowing the traffic to its intended destination or dropping it if a security threat is identified. You can use CDO to configure security policies on many different types of devices.

FDM Policy Configuration

Security policies examine network traffic with the ultimate goal of allowing the traffic to its intended destination or dropping it if a security threat is identified. Use CDO to manage all the components of FDM-managed device's security policies.

FDM-Managed Access Control Policy

You can use CDO to manage the access control policy of an FDM-managed device. The access control policy controls access to network resources by evaluating network traffic against access control rules. The FDM-managed device compares the criteria of the access control rules, in the order they appear in the access control policy, to the network traffic. When all the traffic conditions in an access control rule are

  • Trust—Allow traffic without further inspection of any kind.

  • Allow—Allow the traffic subject to the intrusion and other inspection settings in the policy.

  • Block—Drop the traffic unconditionally. The traffic is not inspected.

If none of the rules in the access control policy match the network traffic, the FDM-managed device takes the default action listed below the access control rules.

Read an FDM-Managed Access Control Policy

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device whose policy it is you want to read.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, select Policy.

Step 5

To ensure that you see the whole policy, click Show All in the Filter panel.

Step 6

Toggle the rule column display to view the rules with more or fewer column. If you are used to viewing access control rules in an FDM-managed device, toggle the rule column display to show more columns.

Here is an example of how to read a rule in a policy. All traffic is evaluated against rule 1 first for a match. If the traffic matches rule 1, the action for that rule is applied to the traffic. Traffic that originates from the inside zone, AND originates from Africa OR Australia, AND originates from HTTP or HTTPS ports, AND arrives at the outside zone, AND arrives at the Aland Islands OR Albania, AND arrives at any port, AND arrives at ABC OR About.com is allowed to flow from the source to the destination. We can also see that an intrusion policy and a file policy are applied to the rule and that events from the rule are being logged.


Configure the FDM Access Control Policy

FDM-managed devices have a single policy. A section of that policy has access control rules. For ease of discussion, we refer to the section of the policy that has access control rules as the access control policy. After onboarding the FDM-managed device, you add rules to, or edit rules in, the access control policy.

If you are onboarding a new FDM-managed device, it may be that there are no rules in the policy that was imported. In that case, when you open the FDM Policy page, you will see the message, "No results found." If you see that message, you can start adding rules to the FDM-Managed Device Policy and then deploy them to the device from CDO.

Tips Before you Begin

When adding conditions to access control rules, consider the following tips:

  • You can create custom objects for some of the conditions at the time you add them to the rule. Look in the dialog boxes for a link to create custom objects.

  • You can configure multiple conditions per rule. Traffic must match all the conditions in the rule for the rule to apply to traffic. For example, you can use a single rule to perform URL filtering for specific hosts or networks.

  • For each condition in a rule, you can add up to 50 criteria. Traffic that matches any of a condition's criteria satisfies the condition. For example, you can use a single rule to apply application control for up to 50 applications or application filters. Thus, there is an OR relationship among the items in a single condition, but an AND relationship between condition types (for example, between source/destination and application).

  • Some features require that you have enabled the appropriate Firepower licenses.

  • Some editing tasks may not require you to enter the edit mode. From the policy page, you can modify a condition in the rule by clicking the + button within that condition column and select the desired object or element in the popup dialog box. You can also click the x on an object or element to remove it from the rule.

Create or Edit an FDM-Managed Access Control Policy

Use this procedure to edit an FDM-managed access control policy using Cisco Defense Orchestrator:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and whose access control whose policy you want to edit.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, select Policy.

Step 5

Do any of the following:

  • To create a new rule, click the blue plus button .

  • To edit an existing rule, select the rule and click the edit icon in the Actions pane. (Simple edits may also be performed inline without entering edit mode.)

  • To delete a rule you no longer need, select the rule and click the remove icon in the Actions pane.

  • To move a rule within the policy, select the rule in the access control table and click the up or down arrow at the end of the rule row to move the rule.

When editing or adding a rule, continue with the remaining steps in this procedure.

Step 6

In the Order field, select the position for the rule within the policy. Network traffic is evaluated against the list of rules in numerical order, 1 to "last."

Rules are applied on a first-match basis, so you must ensure that rules with highly specific traffic matching criteria appear above policies that have more general criteria that would otherwise apply to the matching traffic.

The default is to add the rule to the end of the list. If you want to change a rule's location later, edit this option.

Step 7

Enter the rule name. You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and these special characters: + . _ -

Step 8

Select the action to apply if the network traffic is matched by the rule:

  • Trust—Allow traffic without further inspection of any kind.

  • Allow—Allow the traffic subject to the intrusion and other inspection settings in the policy.

  • Block—Drop the traffic unconditionally. The traffic is not inspected.

Step 9

Define the traffic matching criteria by using any combination of attributes in the following tabs:

  • Source—Click the Source tab and add or remove security zones (interfaces), networks (which include networks, continents, and custom geolocations), or ports from which the network traffic originated. The default value is "Any."

  • Destination—Click the Destination tab and add or remove the security zones (interfaces), networks (which include networks, continents and custom geolocations), or ports on which the traffic arrives. The default value is "Any." See Source and Destination Criteria in an FDM Access Control Rule.

  • Applications—Click the Application tab and add or remove a web application, or a filter that defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. The default is any application. See Application Criteria in an FDM Access Control Rule

  • URLs—Click the URL tab and add or remove a URL or URL category of a web request. The default is any URL. See URL Conditions in an FDM Access Control Rule to learn how to fine-tune this condition using URL categories and reputation filters.

  • Users—Active Directory realm objects, special identities (failed authentication, guest, no authentication required, unknown), and user groups added to the rule from firewall device manager are visible in the rule row but it is not yet editable in CDO.

    Caution

     

    Individual user-objects are not yet visible in an access control policy rule in CDO. Log in to an FDM-managed device to see how an individual user-object may affect an access control policy rule.

Step 10

(Optional, for rules with the Allow action) Click the Intrusion Policy tab to assign an intrusion inspection policy to inspect traffic for intrusions and exploits. See Intrusion Policy Settings in an FDM Access Control Rule.

  1. To log Intrusion events generated by intrusion policy rules, see " Configure Logging Settings " for the device.

Step 11

(Optional, for rules with the Allow action) Click the File Policy tab to assign a file policy that inspects traffic for files that contain malware and for files that should be blocked. See File Policy Settings in an FDM Access Control Rule.

  1. To log file events enerated by file policy rules, see "Configuring Logging Settings" for the device.

Step 12

(Optional) Click the logging tab to enable logging and collect connection events reported by the access control rule.

See Logging Settings in an FDM Access Control Rule for more information on logging settings.

If you subscribe to Cisco Security Analytics and Logging, you can configure connection events in CDO and send them to the Secure Event Connector (SEC) by configuring a syslog object with the SEC's IP address and port. See Cisco Security Analytics and Logging for more information about this feature. You would create one syslog object for every SEC that you have onboarded to your tenant, but you would only send events generated by one rule, to one syslog object, representing one SEC.

Step 13

Click Save. You are now done configuring a specific rule in the security policy.

Step 14

You can now configure the Default Action for the security policy as a whole. The Default Action defines what happens if network traffic does not match any of the rules in the access control policy, intrusion policy, or file/malware policy.

Step 15

Click the Default Action for the policy.

Step 16

Configure an intrusion policy as you did in step 9, above.

Step 17

Configure logging connection events generated by the Default Action.

If you subscribe to Cisco Security Analytics and Logging, you can send events generated by the default action to a Secure Event Connector (SEC) by configuring a syslog object with the SEC's IP address and port. See Cisco Security Analytics and Logging for more information about this feature. You would create one syslog object for every SEC that you have onboarded to your tenant, but you would only send events generated by rule to one syslog object, representing one SEC.

Step 18

(Optional) For any rule that you created, you can select it and add a comment about it in the Add Comments field. To learn more about rule comments see, Adding Comments to Rules in FTD Policies and Rulesets.

Step 19

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configuring Access Policy Settings

You can configure settings that apply to the access policy, rather than to specific rules within the policy.

Procedure

These settings apply to the access policy as a whole, rather than to specific rules within the policy.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and whose access control whose policy you want to edit.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, select Policy.

Step 5

Click the Settings icon and configure these settings:

  • TLS Server Identity Discovery - TLS 1.3 certificates are encrypted. For traffic encrypted with TLS 1.3 to match access rules that use application or URL filtering, the system must decrypt the TLS 1.3 certificate. We recommend that you enable this option to ensure encrypted connections are matched to the right access control rule. The setting decrypts the certificate only; the connection remains encrypted. Enabling this option is sufficient to decrypt TLS 1.3 certificates; you do not need to create a corresponding SSL decryption rule. Available for FDM-managed devices running software version 6.7 or later.

  • Reputation Enforcement on DNS Traffic - Enable this option to apply your URL filtering category and reputation rules to DNS lookup requests. If the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) in the lookup request has a category and reputation that you are blocking, the system blocks the DNS reply. Because the user does not receive a DNS resolution, the user cannot complete the connection. Use this option to apply URL category and reputation filtering to non-web traffic. For more information, see DNS Request Filtering. Available for FDM-managed devices running software version 7.0 and later.

Step 6

Click Save.


About TLS Server Identity Discovery

Typically, the TLS 1.3 certificates are encrypted. For traffic encrypted with TLS 1.3 to match access rules that use application or URL filtering, the system must decrypt the TLS 1.3 certificate. We recommend that you enable early application detection and URL categorization to ensure encrypted connections are matched to the right access control rule. This setting decrypts the certificate only; the connection remains encrypted.


Note


This feature is currently available for FDM-managed devices running on software version 6.7 or later.


Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and whose access control whose policy you want to edit.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, select Policy.

Step 5

Click the settings button.

Step 6

Click the slider next to TLS Server Identity Discovery to enable early application detection and URL categorization for encrypted connections.

Step 7

Click Save.


Copy FDM-Managed Access Control Rules

Use this procedure to copy access control rules by copying it from their current position and pasting them to a new position in the same policy or by pasting them to the policy of a different FDM-managed device. You can paste the rule before or after other rules in the policy, so the rule evaluates that network traffic in its proper order within the policy.

Copy Rules within the Device

To copy rules within an FDM-managed device, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the FDM-managed device you whose policy it is you want to edit.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 5

Select one or more access control rules you want to copy and click Copy in the Actions pane on the right.

Step 6

In the policy where you want to paste the rule(s), select the rule that your copied rule(s) should precede or follow and, in the Actions pane, click one fo the following options:

  • Paste Beforeautomatically pastes one or more copied rules above the selected rule, so the copied rule is ordered above it.

  • Paste Afterautomatically pastes one or more copied rules below the selected rule, so the copied rule is ordered below it.

The paste operation can be performed multiple times at any required position.

Note

 

When pasting rules within an FDM-managed device, if a rule with the same name exists, '- Copy' is appended to the original name. If the renamed name also exists, '- Copy n' is appended to the original name. For example, 'rule name - Copy 2'.

Step 7

Review your changes and Deploy Configuration Changes from Cisco Defense Orchestrator to FTD now or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Copy Rules from One FDM-Managed Device Policy to Another FDM-Managed Device Policy

When copying rules from one FDM-managed device policy to another FDM-managed device policy, objects associated with those rules are copied to the new FDM-managed device as well.

CDO validates some conditions when pasting the rules. For more information, see Behavior of Objects when Pasting Rules to Another FTD.


Important


Important: CDO allows you to copy rules from one FDM-managed device to another FDM-managed device only if the same software versions on both devices are the same. If the software version is different, the "Rules could not be pasted because they are not compatible with the version of this device" error appears when you attempt to paste the rules. You can click the Details link to know the details.

To copy rules to another FDM-managed device, follow this procedure:


Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want to copy the rule from.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 5

Select one or more access control rules you want to copy and click Copy in the Actions pane on the right.

Step 6

Click Inventory and navigate to the FDM-managed device you want to paste the rules to.

Step 7

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 8

In the policy where you want to paste the rule(s) you just copied, select the rule that your copied rule(s) should precede or follow and, in the Actions pane, click Paste Before or Paste After.

Step 9

Select any access control rule you want for pasting the copied rules around it and in the Actions pane, click one of the following options:

  • Paste Before automatically one or more rules above the selected rule, so the copied rules evaluate network traffic before the selected rule.

  • Paste After automatically one or more rules below the selected rule, so the copied rules evaluate network traffic after the selected rule.

The paste operation can be performed multiple times at any required position.

Note

 

When pasting rules to another FDM-managed device, if a rule with the same name exists, '-Copy' is appended to the original name. If the renamed name also exists, '-Copy n' is appended to the original name. For example, 'rule name-Copy 2'.

Step 10

When you copy rules from one FDM-managed device to another, the Configuration Status of the destination device is in 'Not Synced' state. Review your changes and Deploy Configuration Changes from Cisco Defense Orchestrator to FTD now or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Move FDM-Managed Access Control Rules

Use this feature to move access control rules by cutting it from their current position in a policy and pasting them to a new position in the same policy or to the policy of a different FDM-managed device. You can paste the rule before or after other rules in a policy, so the rule evaluates that network traffic in its proper order within the policy.

Move Rules within the Device

To move rules within an FDM-managed device, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the FDM-managed device whose policy it is you want to edit.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 5

Select one or more access control rules you want to move and click Cutin the Actions pane on the right. The selected rules are highlighted in yellow. Note: If you want to cancel your selection, select any rule and click Copy.

Step 6

In the policy where you want to paste the rule(s) you just cut, select the rule that the cut rule(s) should precede or follow and, in the Actions pane, click one of the following options:

  • Paste Before automatically pastes one or more rules above the selected rule, so the cut rules evaluate network traffic before the selected rule.

  • Paste After automatically pastes one or more rules below the selected rule, so the cut rules evaluate network traffic after the selected rule.

The paste operation can be performed multiple times at any required position.

Note

 

When pasting rules within an FDM-managed device, if a rule with the same name exists, '- Copy' is appended to the original name. If the renamed name also exists, '- Copy n' is appended to the original name. For example, 'rule name - Copy 2'.

Step 7

Review your changes and Deploy Configuration Changes from Cisco Defense Orchestrator to FTD now or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Move a Rule from One FDM-Managed Device Policy to Another FDM-Managed Device Policy

When moving rules from one FDM-managed device policy to another FDM-managed device policy, objects associated with those rules are copied to the new FDM-managed device as well.

CDO validates some conditions when pasting the rules. For more information on those conditions, see Behavior of Objects when Pasting Rules to Another FTD.

To move rules to another FDM-managed device, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the FDM-managed device you want to copy the rule from.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 5

Select one or more access control rules you want to move and click Cut in the Actions pane on the right.

Step 6

Click Inventory and navigate to the FDM-managed device you want to move one or more selected rules to.

Step 7

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 8

In the policy where you want to paste the rule(s) you just cut, select the rule that your cut rule should precede or follow and, in the Actions pane, click Paste Before or Paste After.

  • Paste Before automatically one or more rules above the selected rule, so the cut rules evaluate network traffic before the selected rule.

  • Paste After automatically one or more rules below the selected rule, so the cut rules evaluate network traffic after the selected rule.

The paste operation can be performed multiple times at any required position.

Note

 

When pasting rules within an FDM-managed device, if a rule with the same name exists, '-Copy' is appended to the original name. If the renamed name also exists, '- Copy n' is appended to the original name. For example, 'rule name - Copy 2'.

Step 9

When you copy rules from one FDM-managed device to another, the Configuration Status of source and destination devices are in 'Not Synced' state. Review your changes and Deploy Configuration Changes from Cisco Defense Orchestrator to FDM-Managed Devices now or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Behavior of Objects when Pasting Rules to Another Device

If the rules you cut or copied contain objects, and you paste those rules into another FDM-managed device policy, CDO copies the objects in those rules to the destination FDM-managed device when any of the following conditions are met:

For all types of objects (except security zone)

  • The destination device does not contain the object; in that case, CDO creates the object in the destination device first and then pastes the rule.

  • The destination device contains the object with the same name and the same values as the source device.

For security zone objects

  • The destination device contains the security zone object with the same name and the same interfaces as the source.

  • The destination device does not contain the same security zone object and has interfaces for use on the destination.

  • The destination device contains the security zone object, which is empty and has interfaces for use on the destination.

For objects with Active Directory (AD) realm

  • CDO pastes the rule with Active Directory (AD) realm objects only if the realm with the same name already present on the target device.


Important


The paste operation fails in the following conditions:

  • If there are differences in the vulnerability, geolocation, intrusion, or URL databases between the two device versions, CDO cannot paste the rules into the target device. You need to recreate the rules manually in the new device.

  • If the rule you are adding has a security zone that contains the interface of type 'management-only'.


Source and Destination Criteria in an FDM-Managed Access Control Rule

The Source and Destination criteria of an access rule define the security zones (interfaces) through which the traffic passes, the IP addresses or the country or continent (geographical location) for the IP address, or the protocols and ports used in the traffic. The default is any zone, address, geographical location, protocol, and port.

To modify the source or destination conditions in an access control rule you can edit the rule using the procedure in Configure the FDM Access Control Policy. Simple edits may be performed without entering edit mode. From the policy page, you can modify a condition in the rule by selecting the rule and clicking the + button within the source or destination condition column and selecting a new object or element in the popup dialog box. You can also click the x on an object or element to remove it from the rule.

You can use the following criteria to identify the source and destination to match in the rule.

Source Zones, Destination Zones

The security zone objects that define the interfaces through which the traffic passes. You can define one, both, or neither criteria: any criteria not specified applies to traffic on any interface.

  • To match traffic leaving the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Destination Zones.

  • To match traffic entering the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Source Zones.

  • If you add both source and destination zone conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from one of the specified source zones and egress through one of the destination zones.

Use this criteria when the rule should apply based on where the traffic enters or exits the device. For example, if you want to ensure that all traffic going to inside hosts gets intrusion inspection, you would select your inside zone as the Destination Zones while leaving the source zone empty. To implement intrusion filtering in the rule, the rule action must be Allow, and you must select an intrusion policy in the rule.


Note


You cannot mix passive and routed security zones in a single rule. In addition, you can specify passive security zones as source zones only, you cannot specify them as destination zones.


Source Networks, Destination Networks

The network objects or geographical locations that define the network addresses or locations of the traffic.

  • To match traffic from an IP address or geographical location, configure the Source Networks.

  • To match traffic to an IP address or geographical location, configure the Destination Networks.

  • If you add both source and destination network conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from one of the specified IP addresses and be destined for one of the destination IP addresses.

When you add this criteria, you select from the following tabs:

  • Network—Select the network objects or groups that define the source or destination IP addresses for the traffic you want to control. You can use objects that define the address using the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN); the address is determined through a DNS lookup.

  • Geolocation—Select the geographical location to control traffic based on its source or destination country or continent. Selecting a continent selects all countries within the continent. Besides selecting geographical location directly in the rule, you can also select a geolocation object that you created to define the location. Using geographical location, you could easily restrict access to a particular country without needing to know all of the potential IP addresses used there.


Note


To ensure that you are using up-to-date geographical location data to filter your traffic, Cisco strongly recommends that you regularly update the geolocation database (GeoDB).


Source Ports, Destination Ports/Protocols

The port objects that define the protocols used in the traffic. For TCP/UDP, this can include ports. For ICMP, it can include codes and types.

  • To match traffic from a protocol or port, configure the Source Ports. Source ports can be TCP/UDP only.

  • To match traffic to a protocol or port, configure the Destination Ports/Protocols. If you add only destination ports to a condition, you can add ports that use different transport protocols. ICMP and other non-TCP/UDP specifications are allowed in destination ports only; they are not allowed in source ports.

  • To match traffic both originating from specific TCP/UDP ports and destined for specific TCP/UDP ports, configure both. If you add both source and destination ports to a condition, you can only add ports that share a single transport protocol, TCP or UDP. For example, you could target traffic from port TCP/80 to port TCP/8080.

URL Conditions in an FDM-Managed Access Control Rule

The URL conditions of an access control rule defines the URL used in a web request, or the category to which the requested URL belongs. For category matches, you can also specify the relative reputation of sites to allow or block. The default is to allow all URLs.

URL categories and reputations allow you to quickly create URL conditions for access control rules. For example, you could block all Gaming sites, or all high risk Social Networking sites. If a user attempts to browse to any URL with that category and reputation combination, the session is blocked.

Using category and reputation data also simplifies policy creation and administration. It grants you assurance that the system will control web traffic as expected. Finally, because Cisco's threat intelligence is continually updated with new URLs, as well as new categories and risks for existing URLs, you can ensure that the system uses up-to-date information to filter requested URLs. Malicious sites that represent security threats such as malware, spam, botnets, and phishing may appear and disappear faster than you can update and deploy new policies.

To modify the URL and URL Category conditions in an access control rule, you can edit the rule using the procedure in Configure the FDM Access Control Policy. Simple edits may be performed without entering edit mode. From the policy page, you can modify a URL condition in the rule by selecting the rule and clicking the + button within the URL condition column and selecting a new object, element, URL reputation, or URL category from the popup dialog box. You can also click the x on an object or element to remove it from the rule.

Click the blue plus icon and select URL objects, groups, or URL categories and click Save. You can click Create New Object if the URL object you require does not exist. See Create or Edit FDM URL Objects for more information about URL objects.

License Requirement for URL Filtering

To use URL filtering, you need to have the URL license enabled on your FDM-manageddevice.

Specifying a Reputation for a URL Category Used in a Rule

By default, all URLs in a URL category are treated by a rule the same way. For example, if you have a rule that blocks Social Network URLs, you will block all of them regardless of reputation. You can adjust that setting so that you block only high-risk Social Network sites. Likewise, you could allow all URLs from a URL category except the high-risk sites.

Use this procedure to use a reputation filter on a URL category in an access control rule:

Procedure

Step 1

From the FDM Policy page, select the rule you want to edit.

Step 2

Click Edit.

Step 3

Click the URLs tab.

Step 4

Click the blue plus button and select a URL Category.

Step 5

Click Apply Reputation to Selected Categories or the Any Reputation link on the URL Category you just picked.

Step 6

Uncheck the Any Reputation check box.

Step 7

Filter URLs by reputation:

  • If the rule has a blocking action, slide the reputation slider to the right to block only the sites with the reputations marked in red. For example, if you slide the slider to "Sites with Security Risks," a blocking rule would block "Sites with Security Risks," "Suspicious Sites," and "High-Risk sites" but it would allow traffic from "Well-known Sites" and "Benign Sites."

  • If the rule has an allow action, slide the reputation slider to the right to allow only the sites with the reputations marked in green. For example, if you slide the slider to "Benign Sites," the rule will allow traffic from "Well-Known Sites" and "Benign Sites" but not allow traffic from "Sites with Security Risks," "Suspicious Sites," and "High-Risk sites."

Step 8

Click Save.

Step 9

Click Select.

Step 10

Click Save.

Step 11

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Intrusion Policy Settings in an FDM-Managed Access Control Rule

Cisco delivers several intrusion policies with the Firepower system. These policies are designed by the Cisco Talos Security Intelligence and Research Group, who set the intrusion and preprocessor rule states and advanced settings.

License and Action Requirements for Intrusion Policies
  • Licenses-To add intrusion policies to a rule, you need to enable an license on the FDM-managed device

  • Rule action-you can configure intrusion and file policies on rules that allow traffic only. Inspection is not performed on rules set to trust or block traffic. In addition, if the default action for the access control policy is allow, you can configure an intrusion policy but not a file policy.

Available Intrusion Policies for an Access Control Rule

For access control rules that allow traffic, you can select one of the following intrusion policies to inspect traffic for intrusions and exploits. An intrusion policy examines decoded packets for attacks based on patterns, and can block or alter malicious traffic.

The policies are listed from least to most secure:

  • Connectivity over Security—This policy is built for organizations where connectivity (being able to get to all resources) takes precedence over network infrastructure security. The intrusion policy enables far fewer rules than those enabled in the Security over Connectivity policy. Only the most critical rules that block traffic are enabled. Select this policy if you want to apply some intrusion protection but you are fairly confident in the security of your network.

  • Balanced Security and Connectivity—This policy is designed to balance overall network performance with network infrastructure security. This policy is appropriate for most networks. Select this policy for most situations where you want to apply intrusion prevention.

  • Security over Connectivity—This policy is built for organizations where network infrastructure security takes precedence over user convenience. The intrusion policy enables numerous network anomaly intrusion rules that could alert on or drop legitimate traffic. Select this policy when security is paramount or for traffic that is high risk.

  • Maximum Detection—This policy is built for organizations where network infrastructure security is given even more emphasis than is given by the Security Over Connectivity policy, with the potential for even greater operational impact. For example, the intrusion policy enables rules in a large number of threat categories including malware, exploit kit, old and common vulnerabilities, and known in-the-wild exploits. If you select this policy, carefully evaluate whether too much legitimate traffic is being dropped.

File Policy Settings in an FDM-Managed Access Control Rule

Use file policies to detect malicious software, or malware, using Advanced Malware Protection for Firepower (AMP for Firepower). You can also use file policies to perform file control, which allows control over all files of a specific type regardless of whether the files contain malware.

AMP for Firepower uses the AMP cloud to retrieve dispositions for possible malware detected in network traffic, and to obtain local malware analysis and file pre-classification updates. The management interface must have a path to the Internet to reach the AMP cloud and perform malware lookups. When the device detects an eligible file, it uses the file's SHA-256 hash value to query the AMP cloud for the file's disposition. The possible dispositions are:

  • Malware—The AMP cloud categorized the file as malware. An archive file (e.g. a zip file) is marked as malware if any file within it is malware.

  • Clean—The AMP cloud categorized the file as clean, containing no malware. An archive file is marked as clean if all files within it are clean.

  • Unknown—The AMP cloud has not assigned a disposition to the file yet. An archive file is marked as unknown if any file within it is unknown.

  • Unavailable—The system could not query the AMP cloud to determine the file's disposition. You may see a small percentage of events with this disposition; this is expected behavior. If you see a number of "unavailable" events in succession, ensure that the Internet connection for the management address is functioning correctly.

License and Action Requirements for File Policies

Licenses-To add file policies to a rule, you need to enable two licenses on the Firepower Device Manager:

  • license

  • Malware license

Rule action-You can configure file policies on rules that allow traffic only. Inspection is not performed on rules set to trust or block traffic. In addition, if the default action for the access control policy is allow, you can configure an intrusion policy but not a file policy.

Available File Policies for an Access Control Rule
  • None—Do not evaluate transmitted files for malware and do no file-specific blocking. Select this option for rules where file transmissions are trusted or where they are unlikely (or impossible), or for rules where you are confident your application or URL filtering adequately protects your network.

  • Block Malware All—Query the AMP cloud to determine if files traversing your network contain malware, then block files that represent threats.

  • Cloud Lookup All—Query the AMP cloud to obtain and log the disposition of files traversing your network while still allowing their transmission.

  • Block Office Document and PDF Upload, Block Malware Others—Block users from uploading Microsoft Office documents and PDFs. Additionally, query the AMP cloud to determine if files traversing your network contain malware, then block files that represent threats.

  • Block Office Documents Upload, Block Malware Others—Block users from uploading Microsoft Office documents. Additionally, query the AMP cloud to determine if files traversing your network contain malware, then block files that represent threats.

Logging Settings in an FDM-Managed Access Control Rule

Logging Settings for Access Control Rule

The logging settings for an access rule determine whether connection events are issued for traffic that matches the rule.

You should log connections according to the security and compliance needs of your organization. If your goal is to limit the number of events you generate and improve performance, only enable logging for the connections critical to your analysis. However, if you want a broad view of your network traffic for profiling purposes, you can enable logging for additional connections.


Caution


Logging blocked TCP connections during a Denial of Service (DoS) attack can affect system performance and overwhelm the database with multiple similar events. Before you enable logging for a Block rule, consider whether the rule is for an Internet-facing interface or other interface vulnerable to DoS attack.


Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

Create or edit the access control rule and click the Logging tab.

Step 2

Specify the log action:

  • Log at Beginning and End of Connection—Issue events at the start and end of a connection. Because end-of-connection events contain everything that start-of-connection events contain, plus all of the information that could be gleaned during the connection, Cisco recommends that you do not select this option for traffic that you are allowing. Logging both events can impact system performance. However, this is the only option allowed for blocked traffic.

  • Log at End of Connection—Select this option if you want to enable connection logging at the end of the connection, which is recommended for allowed or trusted traffic.

  • Log None—Select this option to disable logging for the rule. This is the default.

Note

 

When an intrusion policy, invoked by an access control rule, detects an intrusion and generates an intrusion event, the system automatically logs the end of the connection where the intrusion occurred, regardless of the logging configuration of the rule. For connections where an intrusion was blocked, the action for the connection in the connection log is Block, with a reason of Intrusion Block, even though to perform intrusion inspection you must use an Allow rule.

Step 3

Specify where to send connection events:

If you want to send a copy of the events to an external syslog server, select the server object that defines the syslog server. If the required object does not already exist, you will need to create one. See Create and Edit Syslog Server Objects for more information.

Because event storage on the device is limited, sending events to an external syslog server can provide more long-term storage and enhance your event analysis.

For Cisco Security Analytics and Logging subscribers:

  • If you send events to the Cisco cloud through a Secure Event Connector (SEC), specify an SEC as your syslog server. You will then be able to see these events alongside file policy and malware policy connection events.

  • If you send events directly to the Cisco cloud without an SEC, specify when to log events (at the beginning or end of the connection) but do not specify the SEC as the syslog server.

Step 4

File Events

Check Log Files if you want to enable logging of prohibited files or malware events. You must select a file policy in the rule to configure this option. The option is enabled by default if you select a file policy for the rule. We recommend you leave this option enabled.

When the system detects a prohibited file, it automatically logs one of the following types of event to the FDM-manageds internal buffer.

  • File events, which represent detected or blocked files, including malware files.

  • Malware events, which represent detected or blocked malware files only.

  • Retrospective malware events, which are generated when the malware disposition for a previously detected file changes.

For connections where a file was blocked, the action for the connection in the connection log is Block even though to perform file and malware inspection you must use an Allow rule. The connection's Reason is either File Monitor (a file type or malware was detected), or Malware Block or File Block (a file was blocked)

Step 5

Click Save.

Step 6

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Security Group Tags

About Security Group Tags

If you use Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) to define and use security group tag (SGT) for classifying traffic in a Cisco TrustSec network, you can write access control rules that use SGT as matching criteria. Thus, you can block or allow access based on security group membership rather than IP addresses.

In ISE, you can create a SGT and assign host or network IP addresses to each tag. If you assign an SGT to a user's account, the SGT is assigned to the user's traffic. After you configure FDM-managed device to connect to an ISE server and create the SGT, you can create SGT groups in CDO and build access control rules around them. Note that you must configure ISE's SGT Exchange Protocol (SXP) mapping before you can associate an SGT to an FDM-managed device. See Security Group Tag Exchange Protocol in the Cisco Identity Services Engine Administrator Guide of the version you are currently running for more information.

When an FDM-managed device evaluates SGT as a traffic matching criteria for an access control rule, it uses the following priority:

  1. The source SGT defined in the packet, if any. No destination matching is done using this technique. For the SGT to be in the packet, the switches and routers in the network must be configured to add them. See the ISE documentation for information on how to implement this method.

  2. The SGT assigned to the user session, as downloaded from the ISE session directory. You need to enable the option to listen to session directory information for this kind of SGT matching, but this option is on by default when you first create the ISE identity source. The SGT can be matched to source or destination. Although not required, you would also normally set up a passive authentication identity rule, using the ISE identity source along with an AD realm, to collect user identity information.

  3. The SGT-to-IP address mapping downloaded using SXP. If the IP address is within the range for an SGT, then the traffic matches the access control rule that uses the SGT. The SGT can be matched to source or destination.


    Note


    You cannot use the information retrieved from ISE directly in an access control rule. Instead, you need to create SGT groups, which refer to the downloaded SGT information. Your SGT groups can refer to more than one SGT, so you can apply policy based on a relevant collections of tags if that is appropriate.


Version Support

CDO currently supports SGT and SGT groups on FDM-managed devices running Version 6.5 and later. an FDM-managed device allows you to configure and connect to an ISE server in Version 6.5 and later but not does not support SGT configuration in the UI until Version 6.7.

From the FDM-managed UI, this means that an FDM-managed device running Version 6.5 or later can download SXP mappings of SGTs but cannot be manually added to objects or access control rules. To make changes to the SGTs for devices running Version 6.5 or Version 6.6, you must use the ISE UI. If the device running Version 6.5 is onboarded to CDO, however, you can see the current SGTs associated with the device and create SGT groups.

SGT in CDO
Security Group Tags

SGTs are read-only in CDO. You cannot create or edit an SGT in CDO. To create an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Administrator Guide of the version your are currently running.

SGT Groups

Note


An FDM-managed device refers to groups of SGTs as SGT dynamic objects. In CDO, these lists of tags are currently called SGT groups. You can create an SGT group in CDO without referring to the FDM-managed device or ISE UI.


Use SGT groups to identify source or destination addresses based on an SGT assigned by ISE. You can then use the objects in access control rules for purposes of defining traffic matching criteria. You cannot use the information retrieved from ISE directly in an access control rule. Instead, you need to create SGT groups, which refer to the downloaded SGT information.

Your SGT groups can refer to more than one SGT, so you can apply policy based on relevant collections of tags if that is appropriate.

In order to create an SGT group in CDO, you must have at least one SGT already configured and SGT mappings from an ISE server configured for the FDM-managed console of the device you want to use. Note that if more than one FDM-managed device is associated with the same ISE server, an SGT or SGT group can be applied to more than one device. If a device is not associated with an ISE server, you cannot include SGT objects in your access control rule, or apply an SGT group to that device configuration.

SGT Groups in Rules

SGT groups can be added to access control rules; they appear as source or destination network objects. For more information about how networks work in rules, see Source and Destination Criteria in an FDM Access Control Rule.

You can create an SGT group from the Objects page. See Create an SGT Group for more information.

Create an SGT Group

To create an SGT group that can be used for an access control rule, use the following procedure:

Before you begin

You must have the following configurations or environments configured prior to creating a security group tag (SGT) group:

  • FDM-managed device must be running at least Version 6.5.

  • You must configure the ISE identity source to subscribe to SXP mappings and enable deploy changes. To manage SXP mappings, see Configure Security Groups and SXP Publishing in ISE of the Firepower Device Manager Configuration Guide for the version you're using, Version 6.7 and later.

  • All SGTs must be created in ISE. To create an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Configuration Guide of the version your are currently running.

Procedure

Step 1

On the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button to create an object.

Step 3

Click FTD > Network.

Step 4

Enter an Object Name.

Step 5

(Optional) Add a description.

Step 6

Click SGT and use the drop-down menu to check all the applicable SGTs you want included in the group. You can sort the list by SGT name.

Step 7

Click Save.

Note

 

You cannot create or edit SGTs in CDO, you can only add or remove them from an SGT group. To create or edit an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Configuration Guide of the version you are currently running.


Edit an SGT Group

To edit an SGT group, use the following procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Locate the SGT group you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 3

Select the SGT group and click the edit icon in the Actions pane.

Step 4

Modify the SGT group. Edit the name, description, or the SGTs associated with the group.

Step 5

Click Save.

Note

 

You cannot create or edit SGTs in CDO, you can only add or remove them from an SGT group. To create or edit an SGT, see the Cisco Identity Services Engine Configuration Guide of the version you are currently running.


Add an SGT Group to an Access Control Rule

To add an SGT group to an access control rule, use the following procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want to add the SGT group to.

Step 4

In theManagement pane, select Policy.

Step 5

Click the blue plus button for either the Source or Destination objects and select SGT Groups.

Step 6

Locate the SGT group(s) you want to edit by using object filters and search field.

Step 7

Click Save.

Step 8

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.

Note

 

If you need to create an additional SGT group, click Create New Object. Fill in the required information mentioned in Create an FTD SGT Group and Add the SGT group to the rule.


Application Criteria in an FDM-Managed Access Control Rule

The Application criteria of an access rule defines the application used in an IP connection, or a filter that defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. The default is any application.

Although you can specify individual applications in the rule, application filters simplify policy creation and administration. For example, you could create an access control rule that identifies and blocks all high risk, low business relevance applications. If a user attempts to use one of those applications, the session is blocked.

In addition, Cisco frequently updates and adds additional application detectors via system and vulnerability database (VDB) updates. Thus, a rule blocking high risk applications can automatically apply to new applications without you having to update the rule manually.

You can specify applications and filters directly in the rule, or create application filter objects that define those characteristics. The specifications are equivalent, although using objects can make it easier to stay within the 50-items-per-criteria system limit if you are creating a complex rule. See Create and Edit a Firepower Application Filter Object for more information about creating an application filter object.

To modify the application and application filters used in a rule, you can edit the rule using the procedure in Configure the FDM Access Control Policy. Simple edits may be performed without entering edit mode. From the policy page, you can modify an application condition in the rule by selecting the rule and clicking the + button within the application condition column and selecting a new object or element in the popup dialog box. You can also click the x on an object or element to remove it from the rule.

Intrusion, File, and Malware Inspection in FDM-Managed Access Control Policies

Intrusion and file policies work together as the last line of defense before traffic is allowed to its destination:

  • Intrusion policies govern the system's intrusion prevention capabilities.

  • File policies govern the system's file control and AMP for Firepower capabilities.

All other traffic handling occurs before network traffic is examined for intrusions, prohibited files, and malware. By associating an intrusion or file policy with an access control rule, you are telling the system that before it passes traffic that matches the access control rule's conditions, you first want to inspect the traffic with an intrusion policy, a file policy, or both.

You can configure intrusion and file policies on rules that allow traffic only. Inspection is not performed on rules set to trust or block traffic. In addition, if the default action for the access control policy is allow, you can configure an intrusion policy but not a file policy.

For any single connection handled by an access control rule, file inspection occurs before intrusion inspection. That is, the system does not inspect files blocked by a file policy for intrusions. Within file inspection, simple blocking by type takes precedence over malware inspection and blocking. Until a file is detected and blocked in a session, packets from the session may be subject to intrusion inspection.


Note


By default, the system disables intrusion and file inspection of encrypted payloads. This helps reduce false positives and improve performance when an encrypted connection matches an access control rule that has intrusion and file inspection configured. Inspection works with unencrypted traffic only.


Custom IPS Policy in an FDM-Managed Access Control Rule

You cannot have more than one instance of the same custom IPS policy associated to a single device.


Note


Associating an IPS policy with an access control rule means that passing traffic is submitted to deep packet inspection. The only supported rule action for an access control rule with an IPS policy is Allow.

Use the following procedure to associate a custom IPS policy to an FDM-managed device:


Procedure

Step 1

Create a custom IPS policy. See Create a Custom IPS Policy for more information.

Step 2

In the left pane, select Policies. Click FTD / Meraki / AWS Policies.

Step 3

Scroll or filter through the list of FDM-managed device policies and select the policy you want to associate with a custom IPS policy.

Step 4

Click the blue plus button .

Step 5

In the Order field, select the position for the rule within the policy. Network traffic is evaluated against the list of rules in numerical order, 1 to "last."

Step 6

Enter the rule name. You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and these special characters: + . _ -

Step 7

Select the Intrusion Policy tab. Expand the drop-down menu to see all the available intrusion policies and select the desired custom IPS policy.

Step 8

Define the traffic matching criteria by using any combination of attributes in the remaining tabs: Source/Destination, URLs, Applications, and File Policy.

Step 9

(Optional) Click the logging tab to enable logging and collect connection events reported by the access control rule.

Step 10

Click Save.

Step 11

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


TLS Server Identity Discovery in Firepower Threat Defense

You can now perform improved URL filtering and application control on traffic with threat defense's unique TLS Server Identity Discovery that allows control and precision when it comes to your environment. You do not have decrypt the traffic for this feature to work.


Note


Support for the Server Identity Discovery feature is limited to Version 6.7 and later.


Enable the TLS Server Identity Discovery

Use the following procedure to enable, or disable, the TLS Server Identity Discovery feature for your FDM-managed access control policies:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device.

Step 4

In the Management pane located to the right, select Policy.

Step 5

Click the Access Policy Settings gear icon in the upper right corner of the table .

Step 6

Slide the toggle to enable TLS Server Identity Discovery.

Step 7

Click Save.


Intrusion Prevention System

The Cisco Talos Intelligence Group (Talos) detects and correlates threats in real time and maintains a reputation disposition on billions of files. The Cisco IOS Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) is an inline, deep-packet inspection feature that mitigates attacks on your network by using the threat intelligence data from Talos to accurately identify, classify, and drop malicious traffic in real time.

CDO provides the ability to activate and tune the IPS feature on FDM-managed devices that run software versions 6.4.x.x through 6.6.0.x and 6.6.1.x.


Note


CDO currently does not support IPS rule tuning on version 6.7.


On the CDO menu bar, navigate Policies > Signature Overrides to perform these tasks:

  • Resolve inconsistencies in overrides across multiple devices.

  • View and hide threat events.

  • Override how a threat event is handled by changing the rule action.

Threat Events

A threat event report is a report of traffic that has been dropped, or that has generated an alert, after matching one of Cisco Talos' intrusion policies. In most cases, there's no need to tune IPS rules. If necessary, you have the option to override how an event is handled by changing the matching rule action in CDO.

Note the following behaviors of the Threats page:

  • Threat events that are displayed are not live. Devices are polled hourly for additional Threat events.

  • Threat events that are not included in the Live or Historical view are not part of Cisco Security Analytics and Logging.

  • To see Threat events that you've hidden from view, click the filter icon and check the view hidden option.

  • If you are a subscriber to Cisco Security Analytics and Logging , the events you see in Threat Events table do not contain events sent to the Secure Event Connector.

Procedure

Step 1

From the navigation pane, select Monitoring > Threats. You can filter what events are shown and search by source IP address.

Step 2

Click on a threat event to expand the details panel on the right.

  1. For more information on the rule, click the Rule Document URL in the Rule Details section.

  2. To hide this event, check the toggle switch for Hide Events. The event handling continues as is, but you won't see it here, unless you click View Hidden or un-hide this event.

  3. To edit rule overrides, click Tune Rule. When you change a rule action in CDO, the override applies to all the pre-defined policies. This is different than in the FDM-managed device where each rule can be different from policy to policy.

Note

 

CDO provides the ability to tune rules on FDM-managed devices that run software versions 6.4.x.x through 6.6.0.x and 6.6.1.x. CDO currently does not support rule tuning on FDM-managed Version 6.7.

  • In the Override All devices pull-down, select an action and click Save.

    • Drop-This choice creates an event when this rule matches traffic and then drops the connection. Use this action to tighten security of certain rules. For example, specifying Drop would make security stricter when the Talos rule is matched even if the "Connectivity over Security" policy is specified for the access control rule.

    • Alert-This choice creates an event when this rule matches traffic, but it does not drop the connection. A use case for "Alert" is when traffic is blocked, but the customer wants to allow, it and look at the alerts before disabling the rule.

    • Disabled-This choice prevents traffic from being matched to the rule. No events are generated. The use case for "Disabled" is to stop false positives in reports, or remove rules that do not apply to your environment, like disabling Apache httpd rules if you don't use httpd.

    • Default-This choice returns a rule to the default action it was assigned by Talos, for the intrusion policy it is listed in. For example, when you return an intrusion rule to "Default" that may mean its action returns to "Alert" in the "Connectivity over Security" policy and "Block" in the "Balanced Security and Connectivity" policy.

  • To edit rule overrides by device, check the Advanced Options slider. This section shows you the configured rule action for each device, which you can change by checking the affected device, selecting an override action, and clicking Save.

  • Affected Devices does not indicate the source devices. Instead, it shows the FDM-managed devices reporting the event.

Note

 
  • Click the refresh () button to refresh the table that shows threats based on the current search filters.

  • Click the export () button to download the current summary of the threats to a comma-separated value (.csv) file. You can open the .csv file in a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel to sort and filter the items on your list. CDO exports the basic threat details to the file except for additional information such as time, source, and device.

Step 3

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Firepower Intrusion Policy Signature Overrides

In most cases, there's no need to tune any IPS rules. If necessary, you have the option to override how an event is handled by changing the matching rule action in CDO. CDO gives you options to resolve issues with the overrides.

Manage Signature Overrides
Procedure

Step 1

From the main navigation bar, click Policies > Signature Overrides. You can filterwhat devices and policy override policies are shown. You can also search for intrusion policies by name or intrusion rule SID.

Step 2

Click on the name of policy override policy to expand the details panel on the right.

Step 3

In the Issues pane, a badge indicates the overrides are inconsistent across the devices. You can see the INCONSISTENT field with the number of devices affected:

  1. To ignore the issue, click Ignore. This doesn't change the issue but removes the indicator badge from the Issues column.

  2. To resolve the issue, click Resolve. In the left panel, select the policies to compare and show their consistent and inconsistent overrides.

    • To merge the policies together:

      1. Click Resolve by Merging to combine them into a single policy with the same overrides on all its devices.

      2. Click Confirm.

    • To rename a policy:

      1. In the policy's section, click Rename and give it a different name.

      2. Click Confirm.

    • To ignore a policy:

      1. In the policy's section, click Ignore.

      2. Click Confirm.

    • To ignore all the inconsistencies, click Ignore All.

Step 4

If there are individual Talos intrusion rules that were changed on the device using an FDM-managed device you will see them in the Overrides pane. You can change the override action for an intrusion rule by clicking Tune link and choosing an override action. This action will be applied to that rule in all of the Talos intrusion policies it's used in. Note that if you choose to restore the default action rule (Default), you cannot tune the intrusion rule again until it is triggered by the environment.

  • Connectivity over Security

  • Balanced Security and Connectivity

  • Security over Connectivity

  • Maximum Detection

For consistency across devices, the override action will be saved to every device associated with the intrusion override policy.

These are the effects of the override action:

  • Drop-This choice creates an event when this rule matches traffic and then drops the connection. Use this action to tighten security of certain rules. For example, specifying Drop would make security stricter when the Talos rule is matched even if the "Connectivity over Security" policy is specified for the access control rule.

  • Alert-This choice creates an event when this rule matches traffic, but it does not drop the connection. A use case for "Alert" is when traffic is blocked, but the customer wants to allow, it and look at the alerts before disabling the rule.

  • Disabled-This choice prevents traffic from being matched to the rule. No events are generated. The use case for "Disabled" is to stop false positives in reports, or remove rules that do not apply to your environment, like disabling Apache httpd rules if you don't use httpd.

  • Default-This choice is only applicable if the rule's default action is different in the Talos intrusion policy levels. For example, when you return an intrusion rule to "Default" that may mean its action returns to "Alert" in the "Connectivity over Security" policy and "Block" in the "Balanced Security and Connectivity" policy.

  • Edit rule overrides with the following options:

    • Override for all devices - This option sets the required action to all the devices managed by CDO. Select an option from the drop-down menu. If the rule has different override values for different intrusion override policies, the drop-down option is "Multiple" by default.

    • Edit rule overrides by device - check the Advanced Options slider and select the Overrides by Devices tab. This option shows you the configured rule action for each device, which you can change by checking the affected device, selecting an override action, and clicking Save.

    • Edit rule overrides by policy - check the Advanced Options slider and select the All Overrides tab. This section is only applicable if your tenant has more than one IPS policy configured. You can manage all IPs policies from this page, including policies that have more than one device associated to it.

Step 5

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Create A Signature Override

You can only create signature overrides for IPS rules that are already triggered on an FDM-managed device. When you create a signature override in CDO, the override is automatically applies the configured action (Drop, Alert, Disabled, Default) to all of the policy levels.

Procedure

Step 1

From the main navigation bar, click Monitoring> Threats.

Step 2

Select a threat from the table and expand it. In the Tune Actions pane, click Tune.

Step 3

Tune the rules as described in step 4 in the Firepower Intrusion Policy Signature Overrides procedure.

Step 4

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Remove A Signature Override
Procedure

Step 1

From the main navigation bar, click Policies > Signature Overrides.

Step 2

Click on the name of override to expand the details panel on the right.

Step 3

Expand the Overrides pane and select the override you want to remove, then click Tune.

Step 4

Set the default action to Default.

Step 5

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Custom Firepower Intrusion Prevention System Policy

About Custom IPS Policies

With the introduction of version 6.7, the improved Snort 3 processing engine allows you to create and customize Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) policies using rules provided by the Cisco Talos Intelligence Group (Talos). The best practice is to create your own policy based on the provided Talos policy templates and change that if you need to adjust rule actions.


Note


At this time, CDO does not support custom IPS rules. You can create and modify custom IPS policies with rules that are provided by Talos, but you cannot create your own IPS rules and apply them to custom IPS policies.


The base templates include the same list of intrusion rules (also known as signatures), but they differ in the actions taken for each rule. For example, a rule might be enabled in one policy, but disabled in another policy.For another example, you may find that a particular rule is giving you too many false positives, where the rule is blocking traffic that you do not want blocked; you can disable the rule without needing to switch to a less-secure intrusion policy. You could alternatively change it to alert on matches without dropping traffic.

IPS Policy Base Template

The base templates include the same list of intrusion rules (also known as signatures), but they differ in the actions taken for each rule. For example, a rule might be enabled in one policy, but disabled in another policy. For another example, you may find that a particular rule is giving you too many false positives, where the rule is blocking traffic that you do not want blocked; you can disable the rule without needing to switch to a less-secure intrusion policy. You could alternatively change it to alert on matches without dropping traffic.

The base templates provided are suggested configurations based on the type of protection your network might need. You can use any of the following templates as the base when you create a new policy:


Caution


Do not modify the default IPS policies provided with an FDM-managed device enabled with Snort 3. We strongly recommend creating new custom IPS policies based on the templates below, and to use a unique name for the new policy that is different from the names of the default IPS policies listed below. If you need to troubleshoot your policies, Cisco TAC can easily locate the custom policy and revert to a default policy; this keeps your network protected without losing your customized changes.


The base templates provided are suggested configurations based on the type of protection your network might need. You can use any of the following templates as the base when you create a new policy:

  • Maximum Detection - These policies are built for networks where network infrastructure security is given even more emphasis than is given by the Security Over Connectivity policies, with the potential for even greater operational impact.

  • Security Over Connectivity - These policies are built for networks where network infrastructure security takes precedence over user convenience. The intrusion policy enables numerous network anomaly intrusion rules that could alert on or drop legitimate traffic.

  • Balanced Security and Connectivity - These policies are built for both speed and detection. Used together, they serve as a good starting point for most networks and deployment types.

  • Connectivity Over Security - These policies are built for networks where connectivity, the ability to get to all resources, takes precedence over network infrastructure security. Only the most critical rules that block traffic are enabled.

  • No Rules Active - The rules included in the policy are disabled by default.


Tip


The Maximum Detection base template requires a considerable amount of memory and CPU to work effectively. CDO recommends deploying IPS policies using this template to models such as the 2100, 4100, or virtual device.

As new vulnerabilities become known, Talos releases intrusion rule updates. These rule updates can modify any Cisco-provided network analysis or intrusion policy, and may provide new and updated intrusion rules and preprocessor rules that are automatically applies to existing rules and policy settings. Rule updates might also delete rules from the existing template bases and provide new rule categories, as well as modify the default variable set.


IPS Policy Mode

By default, all intrusion policies operate in Prevention mode to implement an IPS. In the Prevention inspection mode, if a connection matches an intrusion rule whose action is to drop traffic, the connection is actively blocked.

If you instead want to test the effect of the intrusion policy on your network, you can change the mode to Detection, which implements an Intrusion Detection System (IDS). In this inspection mode, drop rules are treat like alert rules, where you are notified of matching connections, but the action result becomes Would Have Blocked, and connections are never in fact blocked.

IPS Rule Group Security Level

CDO allows you to modify the security level of the rule groups included in your policy. Note that this security level is applied to all the rules in the rule group and not to individual rules.


Note


Changes made a rule group's security level are automatically submitted and cannot be reverted. You do not have to click Save to submit security level modifications. You must manually change the security level back.


IPS Rule Action

Modify the actions of an individual rule or multiple rules within a rule group at any time. IPS rules can be set as the following options:

  • Disabled—Do not match traffic against this rule. No events are generated.

  • Alert—Create an event when this rule matches traffic, but do not drop the connection.

  • Drop—Create an event when this rule matches traffic, and also drop the connection.

FDM Templates and Custom IPS Policy

Templates derived from a device with Snort 3 enabled can only be applied to devices that also have Snort 3 enabled. Due to the variability in rules supported and processed by Snort 2 and Snort 3, a template configured with Snort 3 cannot fully support and protect a device configured with Snort 2. See Switching from Snort 2 to Snort 3 for more information.

If you happen to use the ASA Migration tool to create an FDM template from an ASA configuration, we strongly recommend not configuring, or un-configuring any IPS policies. ASA devices do not support the Snort engine and migrating IPS policies from an ASA configuration to an FDM-managed device configuration may cause issues. If you do use the ASA migration tool, we recommend creating custom IPS policies for the device after creating and deploying the template.

See FDM Templates for more information about templates.

Rulesets and Custom IPS Policy

Rulesets are not yet support on devices configured for Snort 3. The following limitations apply:

  • You cannot attach rulesets to Snort 3-enabled devices.

  • You cannot create a ruleset from an existing device that has Snort 3 installed.

  • You cannot associate a custom IPS policy to a ruleset.

Prerequisites

You can view the available IPS policies from the Intrusion policies page, but you cannot create or modify custom IPS policies without the following prerequisites:

Device Support
  • Firepower 1000 series

  • Firepower 2100 series

  • Firepower 4100 series

  • Threat Defense virtual with AWS

  • Threat Defense virtual with Azure

Software Support
s

Devices must be running at least version 6.7 and Snort 3.

If your device is running a version prior to 6.7, upgrade your device. See Upgrade an FDM-Managed Device for more information.

If your device is running version 6.7 with Snort 2, please note that some intrusion rules in Snort 2.0 might not exist in Snort 3.0. See Switching from Snort 2 to Snort 3 for more information.


Note


To find out what version of software version and Snort engine your device is running, simply locate and select the device on the Inventory page and look at the Device Details


Configure Firepower Custom IPS Policies

Before you create or modify a custom IPS policy for your FDM-managed device in CDO, be sure to read the IPS prerequisites.

At this time, CDO does not support custom IPS rules. You can create and modify custom IPS policies with rules that are provided by Talos, but you cannot create your own IPS rules and apply them to custom IPS policies.

If you experience issues creating or editing IPS policies in CDO, see Troubleshoot Intrusion Prevention System for more information.


Note


You cannot delete or reorder the rules within a custom IPS policy's rule group.


Create a Custom IPS Policy

Use the following procedure to create a new custom IPS policy with the IPS rules provided by Talos:

Procedure

Step 1

From the CDO navigation pane, click Policies.

Step 2

Select Intrusion Policies.

Step 3

Click the blue plus button .

Step 4

Expand the drop-down menu of the Base Template. If your device is running version 7.2 with Snort 3, you must expand the drop-down and then click Choose to select the template.If the device is running version 7.1.x and earlier, simply expand the drop-down menu and select one of the following templates:

  • Maximum Detection - These policies are built for networks where network infrastructure security is given even more emphasis than is given by the Security Over Connectivity policies, with the potential for even greater operational impact.

    Tip

     

    The Maximum Detection base template requires a considerable amount of memory and CPU to work effectively. CDO recommends deploying IPS policies using this template to models such as the 2100, 3100, 4100, or threat defense virtual.

  • Security Over Connectivity - These policies are built for networks where network infrastructure security takes precedence over user convenience. The intrusion policy enables numerous network anomaly intrusion rules that could alert on or drop legitimate traffic.

  • Balanced Security and Connectivity - These policies are built for both speed and detection. Used together, they serve as a good starting point for most networks and deployment types.

  • Connectivity Over Security - These policies are built for networks where connectivity, the ability to get to all resources, takes precedence over network infrastructure security. Only the most critical rules that block traffic are enabled.

  • No Rules Active - The rules included in the policy are disabled by default.

Step 5

Enter a Name for the policy.

We strongly recommend using a name that is unique and different from the default base templates. If you ever need to troubleshoot your IPS policy, Cisco TAC can easily locate the custom policy and revert to a default policy; this keeps your network protected without losing your customized changes.

Step 6

(Optional) Enter a Description for the policy.

Step 7

Select the IPS Mode:

  • Prevention - If a connection matches an intrusion rule whose action is to drop traffic, the connection is actively blocked.

  • Detection - If a connection matches an intrusion rule whose action is to drop traffic, the action result becomes Would Have Blocked and no action is taken.

Step 8

Click Save.

What's Next?

Add your IPS policy to an FDM-managed device access control rule. See Custom IPS Policy in an FDM Access Control Rule for more information.


Edit a Custom IPS Policy

You can edit an existing IPS policy if you have onboarded an FDM-managed device that already has an IPS policy, if you created an IPS policy in FDM and CDO reads the policy from the deployed configuration, or if you just created a new IPS policy.

Use the following procedure to modify an existing custom IPS policy:

Procedure

Step 1

From the CDO navigation pane, click Policies.

Step 2

Select Intrusion Policies.

Step 3

Identify the IPS policy you want to edit. Click Edit.

Step 4

At the top of the page, click the edit icon .

Step 5

Edit the following desired fields:

  • Base Template.

  • Name.

  • Description.

  • IPS Mode.

Step 6

Click Save.

Step 7

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Edit Rule Groups in a Custom IPS Policy

You can override the default action of a rule within a rule group. Use the following procedure to edit the rules contained within the rule group

Procedure

Step 1

From the CDO Navigation pane, click Policies.

Step 2

Select Intrusion Policies.

Step 3

Identify the IPS policy you want to edit. Click Edit.

Step 4

From the Rule Group tab located to the left, expand the desired rule group. From the expanded list, select the group.

Step 5

Edit the rule group:

  1. Edit the Security Level of the entire rule group by selecting the security level bar. Manually drag the security level to the type of security you want applied to the entire rule group. Click Submit

  2. Edit the Rule Action of an individual rule by expanding the rule's drop-down menu located to the right.

  3. Edit the Rule Action of multiple rules by selecting the checkboxes of the desired rules and expanding the drop-down menu located above the table of rules. This selection impacts all selected rules.

  4. Edit the Rule Action of all the rules by selecting the checkbox in the title row of the table and expanding the drop-down menu located above the table of rules. This selection impacts all the rules in the rule group.

Step 6

Click Save at the top of the policy page.

Step 7

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Delete a Custom IPS policy

Use the following procedure to delete a custom IPS policy from CDO:

Procedure

Step 1

From the CDO Navigation pane, click Policies.

Step 2

Select Intrusion Policies.

Step 3

Identify the IPS policy you want to edit. Click Delete.

Step 4

Click OK to delete the policy.

Step 5

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Security Intelligence Policy

About Security Intelligence

The Security Intelligence policy gives you an early opportunity to drop unwanted traffic based on source/destination IP address or destination URL. The system drops the traffic on the blocked list before evaluating it with the access control policy, thus reducing the amount of system resources used.

You can block traffic based on the following:

  • Cisco Talos feeds—Cisco Talos provides access to regularly updated security intelligence feeds. Sites representing security threats such as malware, spam, botnets, and phishing appear and disappear faster than you can update and deploy custom configurations. The system downloads feed updates regularly, and thus new threat intelligence is available without requiring you to redeploy the configuration.


    Note


    Cisco Talos feeds are updated by default every hour. You can change the update frequency, and even update the feeds on demand, by logging into Firepower Device Manager and navigating from the home page: Device > Updates > View Configuration.


  • Network and URL objects—If you know of specific IP addresses or URLs you want to block, you can create objects for them and add them to the Blocked list or the Allowed list.

You create separate blocked and allowed lists for IP addresses (networks) and URLs.

License Requirements for Security Intelligence

You must enable the license on the FDM-managed device to use Security Intelligence.

For more information, see the Security Intelligence Feed Categories section of the Security Policies chapter of the appropriate Cisco FTD Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager.

Configure the Firepower Security Intelligence Policy

The Security Intelligence policy gives you an early opportunity to drop unwanted traffic based on source/destination IP address or destination URL. Any allowed connections are still evaluated by access control policies and might eventually be dropped. You must enable the license to use Security Intelligence.

Configure Firepower Security Intelligence Policy
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the FDM-managed device for which you are going to create or edit a security intelligence policy.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, click Policy.

Step 5

In the FDM-managed device Policies page, click Security Intelligence in the policy bar.

Step 6

If the policy is not enabled, click the Security Intelligence slider to enable it or click Enable in the About Security Intelligence information box.

Note

 

You can disable Security Intelligence at any time by clicking the Security Intelligence toggle off. Your configuration is preserved, so that when you enable the policy again you do not need to reconfigure it.

Step 7

Select the row for Blocked List. Notice that, depending on your table view, there are plus signs in the networks, network objects, network feeds, URLs, URL objects, and URL feeds columns.

  • In the Add Networks to Blocked List dialog box and Add URL Object to Blocked List dialog box, you can search for an existing object or create one to suit your needs. Check the object you want to block and then click Select.

    Note

     

    Security Intelligence ignores IP address blocks using a /0 netmask. This includes the any-ipv4 and any-ipv6 network objects. Do not select these objects for network block-listing.

  • In the Add URL Objects to Blocked List and Add Network Feeds to Blocked List dialog, check a feed that you want to block and click Select. You can read the description of the feed by clicking the down arrow at the end of the feed row. They are also described in Security Intelligence Feed Categories.

Step 8

If you know there are networks, IP addresses, or URLs that are included in the any of the network groups, network feeds, URL objects, or URL feeds you specified in the previous step, that you want to make an exception for, click the row for the Allowed List.

Step 9

Select or create objects for the networks, IP addresses, and URLs that you want to make exceptions for. When you click Select or Add they are added to the Allowed List row.

Step 10

(Optional) To log events generated by the Security Intelligence policy:

  1. Click the Logging Settings icon to configure logging. If you enable logging, any matches to blocked list entries are logged. Matches to exception entries are not logged, although you get log messages if exempted connections match access control rules with logging enabled.

  2. Enable event logging by clicking the Connection Events Logging toggle.

  3. Choose where to send your events:

    • Clicking None saves events to your FDM-managed device. They are visible in the FDM Events viewer. Storage space on the FDM-managed device is very limited. It is best to store your connection events on a syslog server, by defining a syslog server object, instead of choosing None.

    • Clicking Create or Choose allows you to create or choose a syslog server, represented by a syslog server object, to send logging events to. Because event storage on the device is limited, sending events to an external syslog server can provide more long-term storage and enhance your event analysis.

    If you have a subscription to Cisco Security Analytics and Logging, send events to a Secure Event Connector by configuring a syslog object with the SEC's IP address and port. See Cisco Security Analytics and Logging for more information about this feature.

Step 11

(Optional) For any rule that you created, you can select it and add a comment about it in the Add Comments field. To learn more about rule comments see, Adding Comments to Rules in FTD Policies and Rulesets.

Step 12

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Making Exceptions to the Firepower Security Intelligence Policy Blocked Lists

For each blocked list you create in a Firepower security intelligence policy, you can create an associated allowed list. The only purpose of the allowed list is to make an exception for IP addresses or URLs that appear in the blocked list. That is, if you find an address or URL you need to use, and you know to be safe, is in a feed configured on the blocked list, you can exempt that address or URL by putting in the allowed list. This way, you don't need to remove an entire feed from the blocked list for the sake of one address or URL.

After passing through the security intelligence policy, allowed traffic is subsequently evaluated by the access control policy. The ultimate decision on whether the connections are allowed or dropped is based on the access control rule the connections match. The access rule also determines whether intrusion or malware inspection is applied to the connection.

Security Intelligence Feeds for Firepower Security Intelligence Policies

The following table describes the categories available in the Cisco Talos feeds. These categories can be entered in both the network and URL blocked list.

Category

Description

attackers

Active scanners and block-listed hosts known for outbound malicious activity.

bogon

Bogon networks and unallocated IP addresses.

bots

Sites that host binary malware droppers.

CnC

Sites that host command-and-control servers for botnets.

dga

Malware algorithms used to generate a large number of domain names acting as rendezvous points with their command-and-control servers.

exploitkit

Software kits designed to identify software vulnerabilities in clients.

malware

Sites that host malware binaries or exploit kits.

open_proxy

Open proxies that allow anonymous web browsing.

open_relay

Open mail relays that are known to be used for spam.

phishing

Sites that host phishing pages.

response

IP addresses and URLs that are actively participating in malicious or suspicious activity.

spam

Mail hosts that are known for sending spam.

suspicious

Files that appear to be suspicious and have characteristics that resemble known malware.

tor_exit_node

Tor exit nodes.

FDM-Managed Device Identity Policy

Identity Policy Overview

Use identity policies to collect user identity information from connections. You can then view usage based on user identity in the dashboards, and configure access control based on user or user group. By linking network behavior, traffic, and events directly to individual users and groups, the system can help you identify the source of policy breaches, attacks, or network vulnerabilities.

For example, you can identify who owns the host targeted by an intrusion event, and who initiated an internal attack or port scan. You can also identify high bandwidth users and users who are accessing undesirable web sites or applications.

You can then view usage based on user identity in the dashboards, and configure access control based on Active Directory (AD) realm object (which matches all users on that AD), special identities (such as failed authentication, guest, no authentication required, or unknown identity), or user groups.

You can obtain user identity using the following methods:

  • Passive authentication—For all types of connections, obtain user identity from other authentication services without prompting for username and password.

  • Active authentication—For HTTP connections only, prompt for username and password and authenticate against the specified identity source to obtain the user identity for the source IP address.

Establishing User Identity Through Passive Authentication

Passive authentication gathers user identity without prompting the user for username and password. The system obtains the mappings from the identity sources you specify.

You can passively obtain user-to-IP address mappings from the following sources:

  • Remote access VPN logins. The following user types are supported for passive identity:

    • User accounts defined in an external authentication server.

    • Local user accounts that are defined in FDM-managed device.

  • Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE); Cisco Identity Services Engine Passive Identity Connector (ISE PIC).

If a given user is identified through more than one source, the remote access VPN login identity takes precedence.

Establishing User Identity through Active Authentication

Authentication is the act of confirming the identity of a user.

With active authentication, when an HTTP traffic flow comes from an IP address for which the system has no user-identity mapping, you can decide whether to authenticate the user who initiated the traffic flow against the directory configured for the system. If the user successfully authenticates, the IP address is considered to have the identity of the authenticated user.

Failure to authenticate does not prevent network access for the user. Your access rules ultimately decide what access to provide these users.

Dealing with Unknown Users

When you use an FDM-managed device to configure the directory server for the identity policy, FDM-managed downloads user and group membership information from the directory server. The Active Directory information is refreshed every 24 hours at midnight or whenever you edit and save the directory configuration (even if you do not make any changes).

If a user succeeds in authenticating when prompted by an active authentication identity rule, but the user's name is not in the downloaded user identity information, the user is marked as Unknown. You will not see the user's ID in identity-related dashboards, nor will the user match group rules.

However, any access control rules for the Unknown user will apply. For example, if you block connections for Unknown users, these users are blocked even though they succeeded in authenticating (meaning that the directory server recognizes the user and the password is valid).

Thus, when you make changes to the directory server, such as adding or deleting users, or changing group membership, these changes are not reflected in policy enforcement until the system downloads the updates from the directory.

If you do not want to wait until the daily midnight update, you can force an update by editing the directory realm information (login to an FDM-managed device and navigate Objects > Identity Sources, then edit the realm ). Click OK, then deploy changes. The system will immediately download the updates.


Note


You can check whether new or deleted user information is on the FDM-managed system by logging in to an FDM-managed device and navigating Policies > Access Control, clicking the Add Rule (+) button, and looking at the list of users on the Users tab. If you cannot find a new user, or you can find a deleted user, then the system has old information


How to Implement an Identity Policy

If you want to manage identity policies for your FDM-managed device using CDO you need to create identity sources first. You can configure the remaining settings using CDO.

When configured correctly, you will be able to see usernames in the monitoring dashboards and events in FDM. You will also be able to use user identity in access control and SSL decryption rules as a traffic-matching criteria.


Note


At this time, CDO can not configure some of the components needed to implement identity policies such as remote access VPN and Cisco Identity Services Engine. These components must be configured in FDM, which is the local manager of the device. Some of the steps in the procedure below indicate that you must use FDM to configure some identity components to implement identity policies.


Procedure

The following procedure provides an overview of what you must configure to get identity policies to work:

Procedure

Step 1

Create the AD identity realm. Whether you collect user identity actively or passively, you need to configure the Active Directory (AD) server that has the user identity information. See Create and Edit a Firepower Threat Defense Active Directory Realm Object for more information.

Step 2

If you want to use passive authentication identity rules, configure the passive identity sources using FDM.

You can configure any of the following, based on the services you are implementing in the device and the services available to you in your network.

  • Remote access VPN—If you intend to support remote access VPN connections to the device, user logins can provide the identity based on the AD server or on local users (those defined within an FDM-managed device). For information on configuring remote access VPN, see the Configuring Remote Acces VPNs chapter of the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for the version running on your device.

  • Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) or Cisco Identity Services Engine Passive Identity Connector (ISE PIC)—If you use these products, you can configure the device as a pxGrid subscriber, and obtain user identity from ISE. See the Configure Identity Services Engine chapter of the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for instructions.

Step 3

Using CDO, enable the identity policy and configure passive or active authentication. See Configure Identity Policy Settings for more information.

Step 4

Using CDO, Configure Identity Policy Default Action. If your intention is to use passive authentication only, you can set the default action to passive authentication and there is no need to create specific rules.

Step 5

Using CDO, Configuring Identity Rules. Create rules that will collect passive or active user identities from the relevant networks.

Step 6

(Optional) For any rule that you created, you can select it and add a comment about it in the Add Comments field. To learn more about rule comments see, Adding Comments to Rules in FTD Policies and Rulesets.

Step 7

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure Identity Policies

You can use identity policies to collect user identity information from connections. You can then view usage based on user identity in the FDM dashboards, and configure access control based on user or user group.

The following is an overview of how to configure the elements required to obtain user identity through identity policies:

Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you are configuring an identity policy, and click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 4

Click Identity in the Policy bar.

Step 5

If you have not yet enabled an identity policy, read about passive and active authentication and click Enable. You are enabling an identity policy, not a passive authentication policy or an active authentication policy. The rules in the policy will specify active or passive authentication.

Step 6

Manage the identity policy:

After you configure identity settings, this page lists all rules in order. Rules are matched against traffic from top to bottom with the first match determining the action to apply. You can do the following from this page:

  • To enable or disable the identity policy, click the identity toggle. See Configure Identity Policy Settings for more information.

  • To read the passive authentication settings, click the button next to the Passive Auth label on the identity bar. See Configure Identity Policy Settings for more information.

  • To enable active authentication, click the button next to the Active Auth label on the identity bar. See Configure Identity Policy Settings for more information.

  • To change the default action, click the default action button and select the desired action. See Configure Identity Policy Default Action.

  • To move a rule in the table, select the rule and click the up or down arrow at the end of the rule's row in the rule table.

  • To move a rule in the table, select the rule and click the up or down arrow at the end of the rule's row in the rule table.

  • To configure rules:

    • To create a new rule, click the plus button.

    • To edit an existing rule, select the rule and click Edit in the Actions pane. You can also selectively edit a rule property by clicking on the property in the table.

    • To delete a rule you no longer need, select the rule and click Remove in the Actions pane.

For more information on creating and editing identity rules, see Configuring Identity Rules.

Step 7

(Optional) For any rule that you created, you can select it and add a comment about it in the Add Comments field. To learn more about rule comments see, Adding Comments to Rules in FTD Policies and Rulesets.

Step 8

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure Identity Policy Settings

For identity policies to work, you must configure the sources that provide user identity information. The settings you must configure differ based on the type of rules you configure: passive, active, or both.


Note


At this time, CDO can not configure some of the components needed to implement identity policies such as active directory identity realms, remote access VPN, and Cisco Identity Services Engine. These components must be configured in FDM, which is the local manager of the device. Some of the steps in the procedure below indicate that you must use FDM to configure some identity components to implement identity policies.


Procedure
Before you begin

Ensure that time settings are consistent among the directory servers, FDM-managed device, and clients. A time shift among these devices can prevent successful user authentication. "Consistent" means that you can use different time zones, but the time should be the same relative to those zones; for example, 10 AM PST = 1 PM EST.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you are configuring an identity policy, and click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 4

Enable Identity policies by clicking the Identity toggle. Or, you can click the button, review the descriptions of passive and active authentication and click Enable in the dialog.

Step 5

Read the Passive Authentication settings. Click the Passive Auth button on the identity bar.

The Passive Authentication button shows Enabled if you have configured remote access VPN or Cisco Identity Services engine using Firepower Device Manager.

You must have configured at least one passive identity source to create passive authentication rules.

Step 6

Configure Active Authentication. When an identity rule requires active authentication for a user, the user is redirected to the captive portal port on the interface through which they are connected and then they are prompted to authenticate.

  1. Click the Active Auth button on the Identity bar.

  2. If you have not already, enable SSL Description by clicking the Enable link. If you don't see the Enable link, skip to step "c".

    1. From the Select Decrypt Re-Sign Certificate menu, select the internal CA certificate to use for rules that implement decryption with re-signed certificates.

      You can use the pre-defined NGFW-Default-InternalCA certificate, or click the menu and select Create or Choose to create a new certificate or select one you have already uploaded to the FDM-managed device.

      If you have not already installed the certificate in client browsers, click the download button to obtain a copy. See the documentation for each browser for information on how to install the certificate. Also see Downloading the CA Certificate for Decrypt Re-Sign Rules.

      Note

       

      You are prompted for SSL Decryption settings only if you have not already configured the SSL decryption policy. To change these settings after enabling the identity policy, edit the SSL decryption policy settings.

    2. Click Save.

  3. Click the Server Certificate menu to select (choose) the internal certificate to present to users during active authentication. If you have not already created the required certificate, click Create. Users will have to accept the certificate if you do not upload a certificate that their browsers already trust.

  4. In the Port field, enter the port number for the captive portal. The default is 885 (TCP). If you configure a different port, it must be in the range 1025-65535.

    Note

     

    For the HTTP Basic, HTTP Response Page, and NTLM authentication methods, the user is redirected to the captive portal using the IP address of the interface. However, for HTTP Negotiate, the user is redirected using the fully-qualified DNS name firewall-hostname.AD-domain-name . If you want to use HTTP Negotiate, you must also update your DNS server to map this name to the IP addresses of all inside interfaces where you are requiring active authentication. Otherwise, the redirection cannot complete, and users cannot authenticate.

  5. Click Save.

Step 7

Continue with Configure the Identity Policy Default Action.


Configure the Identity Policy Default Action

The identity policy has a default action, which is implemented for any connections that do not match any individual identity rules.

In fact, having no rules is a valid configuration for your policy. If you intend to use passive authentication on all traffic sources, then simply configure Passive Authentication as your default action.

Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you are configuring an identity policy, and click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 4

Click Identity in the Policy bar.

Step 5

Configure Identity Policy Settings if you have not done so already.

Step 6

At the bottom of the screen, click the Default Action button and choose one of the following:

  • Passive Auth—User identity will be determined using all configured passive identity sources for connections that do not match any identity rules. If you do not configure any passive identity sources, using Passive Auth as the default is the same as using No Auth.

  • No Auth—User identity will not be determined for connections that do not match any identity rules.

Step 7

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure Identity Rules

Identity rules determine whether user identity information should be collected for matching traffic. You can configure No Authentication if you do not want to collect user identity information for matching traffic.

Keep in mind that regardless of your rule configuration, active authentication is performed on HTTP traffic only. Thus, you do not need to create rules to exclude non-HTTP traffic from active authentication. You can simply apply an active authentication rule to all sources and destinations if you want to get user identity information for all HTTP traffic.


Note


Also keep in mind that a failure to authentication has no impact on network access. Identity policies collect user identity information only. You must use access rules if you want to prevent users who failed to authenticate from accessing the network.


Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you are configuring an identity policy, and click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 4

Click Identity in the policy bar.

Step 5

Do any of the following:

  • To create a new rule, click the plus button. To understand identity source objects and how they could affect your rules, see About Identity Sources for more information.

  • To edit an existing rule, click the rule you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

  • To delete a rule you no longer need, click the rule you want to delete and click Remove in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 6

In Order, select where you want to insert the rule in the ordered list of rules.

Rules are applied on a first-match basis, so you must ensure that rules with highly specific traffic matching criteria appear above policies that have more general criteria that would otherwise apply to the matching traffic.

The default is to add the rule to the end of the list. If you want to change a rule's location later, edit this option.

Step 7

In Name, enter a name for the rule.

Step 8

Select the Action that the FDM-managed device should apply on a match and if necessary, an Active Directory (AD) Identity Source.

You must select the AD identity realm that includes the user accounts for passive and active authentication rules. choose one of the following:

  • Passive Auth—Use passive authentication to determine user identity. All configured identity sources are shown. The rule automatically uses all configured sources.

  • Active AuthUse active authentication to determine user identity. Active authentication is applied to HTTP traffic only. If any other t—ype of traffic matches an identity policy that requires or allows active authentication, then active authentication will not be attempted.

  • No Auth—Do not obtain user identity. Identity-based access rules will not be applied to this traffic. These users are marked as No Authentication Required.

Note

 

For both Passive Auth and Active Auth, you can opt to select an AD Realm identity source. If you do not have any identity source objects readily prepared, click Create new object to launch the identity source object wizard. See Create and Edit a Firepower Threat Defense Active Directory Realm Object for more information.

Step 9

(Active Authentication only.) Click the Active authentication tab and select the authentication method (Type) supported by your directory server:

  • HTTP Basic—Authenticate users using an unencrypted HTTP Basic Authentication connection. Users log in to the network using their browser's default authentication popup window. This is the default.

  • NTLM—Authenticate users using an NT LAN Manager (NTLM) connection. This selection is only available when you select an AD realm. Users log in to the network using their browser's default authentication popup window, although you can configure Internet Explorer and Firefox browsers to transparently authenticate using their Windows domain login. That task is done in FDM, see Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager > Security Policies > Identity Policies > Enabling Transparent User Authentication for instructions.

  • HTTP Negotiate—Allow the device to negotiate the method between the user agent (the application the user is using to initiate the traffic flow) and the Active Directory server. Negotiation results in the strongest commonly supported method being used, in order, NTLM, then basic. Users log in to the network using their browser's default authentication popup window.

  • HTTP Response PagePrompt users to authenticate using a system-provided web page. This is a form of HTTP Basic authentication.

Note

 

For the HTTP Basic, HTTP Response Page, and NTLM authentication methods, the user is redirected to the captive portal using the IP address of the interface. However, for HTTP Negotiate, the user is redirected using the fully-qualified DNS name firewall-hostname.AD-domain-name . If you want to use HTTP Negotiate, you must also update your DNS server to map this name to the IP addresses of all inside interfaces where you are requiring active authentication. Otherwise, the redirection cannot complete, and users cannot authenticate.

Step 10

(Active authentication only.) Select Fall Back as Guest > On/Off to determine whether users who fail active authentication are labeled as Guest users.

Users get 3 chances to successfully authenticate. If they fail, your selection for this option determines how the user is marked. You can deploy access rules based on these values.

  • Fall Back as Guest > On—Users are marked as Guest.

  • Fall Back as Guest > Off—Users are marked as Failed Authentication.

Step 11

Define the traffic matching criteria on the Source and Destination tabs for Passive authentication, Active authentication, or No Authentication rule actions.

Keep in mind that active authentication will be attempted with HTTP traffic only. Therefore, there is no need to configure No Auth rules for non-HTTP traffic, and there is no point in creating Active Authentication rules for any non-HTTP traffic. However, passive authentication is valid for any type of traffic.

The Source/Destination criteria of an identity rule define the security zones (interfaces) through which the traffic passes, the IP addresses or the country or continent (geographical location) for the IP address, or the protocols and ports used in the traffic. The default is any zone, address, geographical location, protocol, and port.

To modify a condition, you click the button within that condition, select the desired object or element, and click OK in the popup dialog box. If the criterion requires an object, you can click Create New Object if the object you require does not exist.

To remove an object from a condition, hover over the object and click the X.

You can configure the following traffic matching criteria.

Source Zones, Destination Zones

The security zone objects that define the interfaces through which the traffic passes. You can define one, both, or neither criteria: any criteria not specified applies to traffic on any interface.

  • To match traffic leaving the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Destination Zones.

  • To match traffic entering the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Source Zones.

  • If you add both source and destination zone conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from one of the specified source zones and egress through one of the destination zones.

Use this criteria when the rule should apply based on where the traffic enters or exits the device. For example, if you want to ensure that user identity is collected from all traffic originating from inside networks, select an inside zone as the Source Zones while leaving the destination zone empty.

Note

 

You cannot mix passive and routed security zones in a single rule. In addition, you can specify passive security zones as source zones only, you cannot specify them as destination zones.

Source Networks, Destination Networks

The network objects or geographical locations that define the network addresses or locations of the traffic.

  • To match traffic from an IP address or geographical location, configure the Source Networks.

  • To match traffic to an IP address or geographical location, configure the Destination Networks.

  • If you add both source and destination network conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from one of the specified IP addresses and be destined for one of the destination IP addresses.

When you add this criteria, you select from the following tabs:

  • Network—Select the network objects or groups that define the source or destination IP addresses for the traffic you want to control.

  • Country/Continent-Select the geographical location to control traffic based on its source or destination country or continent. Selecting a continent selects all countries within the continent. Besides selecting geographical location directly in the rule, you can also select a geolocation object that you created to define the location. Using geographical location, you could easily restrict access to a particular country without needing to know all of the potential IP addresses used there.

  • Custom Geolocation—Select (or create) a geolocation object that has exactly the countries and continents you specify.

Note

 

To ensure you are using up-to-date geographical location data to filter your traffic, Cisco strongly recommends that you regularly update the geolocation database (GeoDB). See Update Geolocation Database for more information.

Source Ports, Destination Ports/Protocols

The port objects that define the protocols used in the traffic. For TCP/UDP, this can include ports.

  • To match traffic from a protocol or port, configure the Source Ports. Source ports can be TCP/UDP only.

  • To match traffic to a protocol or port, configure the Destination Ports/Protocols.

  • To match traffic both originating from specific TCP/UDP ports and destined for specific TCP/UDP ports, configure both. If you add both source and destination ports to a condition, you can only add ports that share a single transport protocol, TCP or UDP. For example, you could target traffic from port TCP/80 to port TCP/8080.

Step 12

Click Save.

Step 13

Return to the Inventory page.

Step 14

Select the device to which you added these rules to the identity policy.

Step 15

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


SSL Decryption Policy

Some protocols, such as HTTPS, use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or its follow-on version, Transport Layer Security (TLS), to encrypt traffic for secure transmissions. Because the system cannot inspect encrypted connections, you must apply SSL decryption policy to decrypt them if you want to apply access rules that consider higher-layer traffic characteristics to make access decisions.


Caution


Keep in mind that decrypting and then re-encrypting traffic adds a processing load on the device, which will reduce overall system performance.


Continue with these topics:

How to Implement and Maintain the SSL Decryption Policy

You can use SSL decryption policies to turn encrypted traffic into plain text traffic, so that you can then apply URL filtering, intrusion and malware control, and other services that require deep packet inspection. If your policies allow the traffic, the traffic is re-encrypted before it leaves the device.

The SSL decryption policy applies to encrypted traffic only. No unencrypted connections are evaluated against SSL decryption rules.

Unlike some other security policies, you need to monitor and actively maintain the SSL decryption policy, because certificates can expire or even be changed on destination servers. Additionally, changes in client software might alter your ability to decrypt certain connections, because the decrypt re-sign action is indistinguishable from a man-in-the-middle attack.

The following procedure explains the end-to-end process of implementing and maintaining the SSL decryption policy.

Procedure
Procedure

Step 1

If you will implement Decrypt Re-sign rules, create the required internal CA certificate.

You must use an internal Certificate Authority (CA) certificate. You have the following options. Because users must trust the certificate, either upload a certificate client browsers are already configured to trust, or ensure that the certificate you upload is added to the browser trust stores.

Step 2

If you will implement Decrypt Known Key rules, collect the certificate and key from each of the internal servers.

You can use Decrypt Known Key only with servers that you control, because you must obtain the certificate and key from the server. Upload these certificates and keys as internal certificates (not internal CA certificates). See Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager > Reusable Objects > Certificates > Uploading Internal and Internal CA Certificates.

Step 3

Enable the SSL Decryption Policy.

When you enable the policy, you also configure some basic settings.

Step 4

Configure the Defaullt SSL Decryption Action.

If in doubt, select Do Not Decrypt as the default action. Your access control policy can still drop traffic that matches the default SSL decryption rule if appropriate.

Step 5

Configure SSL Decryption Rules.

Identify traffic to decrypt and the type of decryption to apply.

Step 6

If you configure known key decryption, edit the SSL decryption policy settings to include those certificates. See Configure Certificates for Known Key and Re-Sign Decryption.

Step 7

If necessary, download the CA certificate used for Decrypt Re-sign rules and upload it to the browser on client workstations.

For information on downloading the certificate and distributing it to clients, see Downloading the CA Certificate for Decrypt Re-Sign Rules.

Step 8

Periodically, update re-sign known key certificates.

  • Re-sign certificate—Update this certificate before it expires. If you generate the certificate through Firepower Device Manager, it is valid for 5 years. To determine when a certificate expires, click the view icon for the certificate from the Objects page.

  • Known-key certificate—For any known-key decryption rules, you need to ensure that you have uploaded the destination server's current certificate and key. Whenever the certificate and key changes on supported servers, you must also upload the new certificate and key (as an internal certificate) and update the SSL decryption settings to use the new certificate.

Step 9

Upload missing trusted CA certificates for external servers.

The system includes a wide range of trusted CA root and intermediate certificates issued by third parties. These are needed when negotiating the connection between FDM-managed devices and the destination servers for decrypt re-sign rules.

Upload all certificates within a root CA's chain of trust to the list of trusted CA certificates, including the root CA certificate and all intermediate CA certificates. Otherwise, it is more difficult to detect trusted certificates issued by intermediate CAs. Upload certificates on the Objects > Certificates page. See See Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager > Reusable Objects > Certificates > Uploading Trusted CA Certificates.


About SSL Decryption

Normally, the access control policy determines if network connections should be allowed or blocked. However, if you enable the SSL decryption policy, encrypted connections are first sent through the SSL decryption policy to determine if they should be decrypted or blocked. Any connections that were not blocked, whether or not decrypted, then go through the access control policy for a final allow/block decision.


Note


You must enable the SSL decryption policy in order to implement active authentication rules in the identity policy. If you enable SSL decryption to enable identity policies, but do not otherwise want to implement SSL decryption, select Do Not Decrypt for the default action in the SSL Decryption page and do not create additional SSL decryption rules. The identity policy automatically generates whatever rules it needs.


The following topics explain encrypted traffic flow management and decryption in more detail.

Why Implement SSL Decryption?

Encrypted traffic, such as HTTPS connections, cannot be inspected. Many connections are legitimately encrypted, such as connections to banks and other financial institutions. Many web sites use encryption to protect privacy or sensitive data. For example, your connection to Firepower Device Manager is encrypted. However, users can also hide undesirable traffic within encrypted connections.

By implementing SSL decryption, you can decrypt connections, inspect them to ensure they do not contain threats or other undesirable traffic, and then re-encrypt them before allowing the connection to proceed. (The decrypted traffic goes through your access control policy and matches rules based on inspected characteristics of the decrypted connection, not on the encrypted characteristics.) This balances your need to apply access control policies with the user's need to protect sensitive information.

You can also configure SSL decryption rules to block encrypted traffic of types you know you do not want on your network.


Caution


Keep in mind that decrypting and then re-encrypting traffic adds a processing load on the device, which will reduce overall system performance.


Actions You Can Apply to Encrypted Traffic

When configuring SSL decryption rules, you can apply the actions described in the following topics. These actions are also available for the default action, which applies to any traffic that does not match an explicit rule.


Note


Any traffic that passes through the SSL decryption policy must then pass through the access control policy. Except for traffic you drop in the SSL decryption policy, the ultimate allow or drop decision rests with the access control policy.


Decrypt Re-Sign

If you elect to decrypt and re-sign traffic, the system acts as a man-in-the-middle.

For example, the user types in https://www.cisco.com in a browser. The traffic reaches the FDM-managed device, the device then negotiates with the user using the CA certificate specified in the rule and builds an SSL tunnel between the user and the FDM-managed device. At the same time the device connects to https://www.cisco.com and creates an SSL tunnel between the server and the FDM-managed device.

Thus, the user sees the CA certificate configured for the SSL decryption rule instead of the certificate from www.cisco.com. The user must trust the certificate to complete the connection. The FDM-managed device then performs decryption/re-encryption in both directions for traffic between the user and destination server.


Note


If the client does not trust the CA used to re-sign the server certificate, it warns the user that the certificate should not be trusted. To prevent this, import the CA certificate into the client trusted CA store. Alternatively, if your organization has a private PKI, you can issue an intermediate CA certificate signed by the root CA which is automatically trusted by all clients in the organization, then upload that CA certificate to the device.


If you configure a rule with the Decrypt Re-Sign action, the rule matches traffic based on the referenced internal CA certificate's signature algorithm type, in addition to any configured rule conditions. Because you can select a single re-sign certificate for the SSL decryption policy, this can limit traffic matching for resign rules.

For example, outgoing traffic encrypted with an elliptic curve (EC) algorithm matches a Decrypt Re-Sign rule only if the re-sign certificate is an EC-based CA certificate. Similarly, traffic encrypted with an RSA algorithm matches Decrypt Re-Sign rules only if the global re-sign certificate is RSA; outgoing traffic encrypted with an EC algorithm does not match the rule, even if all other configured rule conditions match.

Decrypt Known Key

If you own the destination server, you can implement decryption with a known key. In this case, when the user opens a connection to https://www.cisco.com, the user sees the actual certificate for www.cisco.com, even though it is the FDM-managed device that is presenting the certificate.

Your organization must be the owner of the domain and certificate. For the example of cisco.com the only possible way to have the end user see Cisco's certificate would be if you actually own the domain cisco.com (i.e. you are Cisco Systems) and have ownership of the cisco.com certificate signed by a public CA. You can only decrypt with known keys for sites that your organization owns.

The main purpose of decrypting with a known key is to decrypt traffic heading to your HTTPS server to protect your servers from external attacks. For inspecting client side traffic to external HTTPS sites, you must use decrypt re-sign as you do not own the servers.


Note


To use known key decryption, you must upload the server's certificate and key as an internal identity certificate, and then add it to the list of known-key certificates in the SSL decryption policy settings. Then, you can deploy the rule for known-key decryption with the server's address as the destination address. For information on adding the certificate to the SSL decryption policy, see Configure Certificates for Known Key and Re-Sign Decryption.


Do Not Decrypt

If you elect to bypass decryption for certain types of traffic, no processing is done on the traffic. The encrypted traffic proceeds to the access control policy, where it is allowed or dropped based on the access control rule it matches.

Block

You can simply block encrypted traffic that matches an SSL decryption rule. Blocking in the SSL decryption policy prevents the connection from reaching the access control policy.

When you block an HTTPS connection, the user does not see the system default block response page. Instead, the user sees the browser's default page for a secure connection failure. The error message does not indicate the site was blocked due to policy. Instead, errors might indicate that there are no common encryption algorithms. It will not be obvious from this message that you blocked the connection on purpose.

Automatically Generated SSL Decryption Rules

Whether you enable the SSL decryption policy, FDM-managed device automatically generates Decrypt Re-sign rules for each identity policy rule that implements active authentication. This is required to enable active authentication for HTTPS connections.

When you enable the SSL decryption policy, you see these rules under the Identity Policy Active Authentication Rules heading. These rules are grouped at the top of the SSL decryption policy. The rules are read only. You can change them only by altering your identity policy

Handling Undecryptable Traffic

There are several characteristics that make a connection undecryptable. If a connection has any of the following characteristics, the default action is applied to the connection regardless of any rule the connection would otherwise match. If you select Block as your default action (rather than Do Not Decrypt), you might run into issues, including excessive drops of legitimate traffic.

  • Compressed session—Data compression was applied to the connection.

  • SSLv2 session—The minimum supported SSL version is SSLv3.

  • Unknown cipher suite—The system does not recognize the cipher suite for the connection.

  • Unsupported cipher suite—The system does not support decryption based on the detected cipher suite.

  • Session not cached—The SSL session has session reuse enabled, the client and server reestablished the session with the session identifier, and the system did not cache that session identifier.

  • Handshake errors—An error occurred during the SSL handshake negotiation.

  • Decryption errors—An error occurred during the decryption operation.

  • Passive interface traffic—All traffic on passive interfaces (passive security zones) is undecryptable.

License Requirements for SSL Decryption Policies

You do not need a special license to use the SSL decryption policy.

However, you do need the URL license to create rules that use URL categories and reputations as match criteria. For information on configuring licenses, see Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager> Licensing the System > Enabling or Disabling Optional Licenses.

Guidelines for SSL Decryption

Keep the following in mind when configuring and monitoring SSL decryption policies:

  • The SSL Decryption policy is bypassed for any connections that match access control rules set to trust or block if those rules:

    • Use security zone, network, geolocation, and port only as the traffic matching criteria.

    • Come before any other rules that require inspection, such as rules that match connections based on application or URL, or allow rules that apply intrusion or file inspection.

  • When using URL category matching, note that there are cases where the login page for a site is in a different category than the site itself. For example, Gmail is in the "Web based email" category, whereas the login page is in the "Internet Portals" category. To get connections to these sites decrypted, you must include both categories in the rule.

  • You cannot disable the SSL decryption policy if you have any active authentication rules. To disable the SSL decryption policy, you must either disable the identity policy, or delete any identity rules that use active authentication.

Configure SSL Decryption Policies

You can use SSL decryption policies to turn encrypted traffic into plain text traffic, so that you can then apply URL filtering, intrusion and malware control, and other services that require deep packet inspection. If your policies allow the traffic, the traffic is re-encrypted before it leaves the device.

The SSL decryption policy applies to encrypted traffic only. No unencrypted connections are evaluated against SSL decryption rules.


Caution


Keep in mind that decrypting and then re-encrypting traffic adds a processing load on the device, which will reduce overall system performance.



Note


VPN tunnels are decrypted before the SSL decryption policy is evaluated, so the policy never applies to the tunnel itself. However, any encrypted connections within the tunnel are subject to evaluation by the SSL decryption policy.


The following procedure explains how to configure the SSL decryption policy. For an explanation of the end-to-end process of creating and managing SSL decryption, see How to Implement and Maintain the SSL Decryption Policy.

Procedure
Before you begin

The SSL decryption rules table contains two sections:

  • Identity Policy Active Authentication Rules—If you enable the identity policy and create rules that use active authentication, the system automatically creates the SSL decryption rules needed to make those policies work. These rules are always evaluated before the SSL decryption rules you create yourself. You can alter these rules only indirectly, by making changes to the identity policy.

  • SSL Native Rules—These are rules that you have configured. You can add rules to this section only.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want to create the SSL policy.

Step 4

Click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 5

Click SSL Decryption in the policy bar.

Step 6

If you have not yet enabled the policy, click Enable SSL Decryption and configure policy settings, as described in Enable the SSL Decryption Policy.

Step 7

Configure the default action for the policy. The safest choice is Do Not Decrypt. For more information, see Configure the Default SSL Decryption Action section of the Security Policies chapter of the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for the version your device is running.

Step 8

Manage the SSL decryption policy.

After you configure SSL decryption settings, this page lists all rules in order. Rules are matched against traffic from top to bottom with the first match determining the action to apply. You can do the following from this page:

  • To disable the policy, click the SSL Decryption Policy toggle. You can re-enable it by clicking Enable SSL Decryption.

  • To edit policy settings, including the list of certificates used in the policy, click the configuration button on the SSL toolbar: . You can also download the certificate used with decrypt re-sign rules so that you can distribute it to clients. See the following sections of the Security Policies chapter in the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager of the version your device is running:

    • Configure Certificates for Known Key and Re-Sign Decryption

    • Downloading the CA Certificate for Decrypt Re-Sign Rules

  • To configure rules:

    • To create a new rule and log events it generates, click the blue plus button . See Configure SSL Decryption Rules.

    • To edit an existing rule, click the rule in the rule table and click Edit in the Actions pane. You can also selectively edit a rule property by clicking on the property in the table.

    • To delete a rule you no longer need, click the rule in the rule table and click Remove in the Actions pane.

    • To move a rule, hover over it in the rule table. At the end of the row use the up and down arrows to move its position with the rule table.

    • (Optional) For any rule that you created, you can select it and add a comment about it in the Add Comments field. To learn more about rule comments see, Adding Comments to Rules in FTD Policies and Rulesets.

Step 9

Continue to Enable the SSL Decryption Policy.


Enable the SSL Decryption Policy

Before you can configure SSL decryption rules, you must enable the policy and configure some basic settings. The following procedure explains how to enable the policy directly. You can also enable it when you enable identity policies. Identity policies require that you enable the SSL decryption policy.

Procedure
Before you begin

If you upgraded from a release that did not have SSL decryption policies, but you had configured the identity policy with active authentication rules, the SSL decryption policy is already enabled. Ensure that you select the Decrypt Re-Sign certificate you want to use, and optionally enable pre-defined rules.

Review Configuring SSL Decryption Policies if you have not already.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and the device for which you want to enable the SSL Decryption policy.

Step 4

Click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 5

Click SSL Decryption in the policy bar.

Step 6

Click the SSL Decryption toggle in the SSL bar to enable the SSL Decryption policy.

  • If this is the first time you enabled the policy, read the description of Decrypt Known-Key and Decrypt Re-Sign SSL decryption and click enable.

  • If you have already configured the policy once and then disabled it, the policy is simply enabled again with your previous settings and rules. You can click the SSL decryption configuration button Configure Certificates for Known Key and Re-Sign Decryption and configure settings as described in .

Step 7

For Select Decrypt Re-Sign Certificate, select the internal CA certificate to use for rules that implement decryption with re-signed certificates.

You can use the pre-defined NGFW-Default-InternalCA certificate, or one that you created or uploaded. If the certificate does not yet exist, click Create to add an FDM-managed device internal CA certificate.

If you have not already installed the certificate in client browsers, click the download button to obtain a copy. See the documentation for each browser for information on how to install the certificate. Also see Downloading the CA Certificate for Decrypt Re-Sign Rules.

Step 8

Click Save.

Step 9

Continue with Configure the Default SSL Decryption Action to set the default action for the policy.


Configure the Default SSL Decryption Action

If an encrypted connection does not match a specific SSL decryption rule, it is handled by the default action for the SSL decryption policy.

Procedure
Before you begin

If you have not already, review these procedures and follow the procedures in them:

  1. Configuring SSL Decryption Policies

  2. Enable the SSL Decryption Policy

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you want to configure the default SSL decryption action.

Step 4

Click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 5

Click SSL Decryption in the policy bar.

Step 6

Click the Default Action button.

Step 7

Select the action to apply to matching traffic:

  • Do Not Decrypt—Allow the encrypted connection. The access control policy then evaluates the encrypted connection and drops or allows it based on access control rules.

  • Block—Drop the connection immediately. The connection is not passed on to the access control policy.

Step 8

(Optional.) Configure logging for the default action. You must enable logging to capture events from SSL Decryption policies. Select from these options:

  • At End of Connection—Generate an event at the conclusion of the connection.

    • Send Connection Events To—If you want to send a copy of the events to an external syslog server, select the server object that defines the syslog server. If the required object does not already exist, click Create New Syslog Server and create it. (To disable logging to a syslog server, select Any from the server list.)

      Because event storage on the device is limited, sending events to an external syslog server can provide more long term storage and enhance your event analysis.

      If you have a subscription to Cisco Security Analytics and Logging, specify or create the syslog server using a Secure Event Connector's IP address and port. See Cisco Security Analytics and Logging for more information about this feature.

  • No Logging—Do not generate any events.

Step 9

Click Save.

Step 10

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure SSL Decryption Rules

Use SSL decryption rules to determine how to handle encrypted connections. Rules in the SSL decryption policy are evaluated from top to bottom. The rule applied to traffic is the first one where all the traffic criteria are matched.

You can create and edit rules in the SSL Native Rules section only.


Caution


Keep in mind that decrypting and then re-encrypting traffic adds a processing load on the device, which will reduce overall system performance.



Note


Traffic for your VPN connections (both site-to-site and remote access) is decrypted before the SSL decryption policy evaluates connections. Thus, SSL decryption rules are never applied to VPN connections, and you do not need to consider VPN connections when creating these rules. However, any use of encrypted connections within a VPN tunnel are evaluated. For example, an HTTPS connection to an internal server through an RA VPN connection is evaluated by SSL decryption rules, even though the RA VPN tunnel itself is not (because it is decrypted already)


Procedure
Before you begin

If you have not already, review Configuring SSL Decryption Policies, Enable the SSL Decryption Policy, and Configure the Default SSL Decryption Action to configure the SSL decryption policy your rules will be added to.

If you are creating a decrypt known-key rule, ensure that you upload the certificate and key for the destination server (as an internal certificate) and also edit the SSL decryption policy settings to use the certificate. Known-key rules typically specify the destination server in the destination network criteria of the rule. For more information, see Configure Certificates for Known Key and Re-Sign Decryption.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you want to enable the SSL Decryption policy.

Step 4

Click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 5

Click SSL Decryption in the policy bar.

Step 6

Do any of the following:

  • To create a new rule, click the blue plus button.

  • To edit an existing rule, click the edit icon for the rule.

  • To delete a rule you no longer need, click the remove icon for the rule.

Step 7

In Order, select where you want to insert the rule in the numbered list of rules.

You can insert rules into the SSL Native Rules section only. The Identity Policy Active Authentication Rules are automatically generated from your identity policy and are read-only.

Rules are applied on a first-match basis, so you must ensure that rules with highly specific traffic matching criteria appear above policies that have more general criteria that would otherwise apply to the matching traffic.

The default is to add the rule to the end of the list. If you want to change a rule's location later, edit this option.

Step 8

In Name, enter a name for the rule.

The name cannot contain spaces. You can use alphanumeric characters and these special characters: + . _ -

Step 9

Select the action to apply to matching traffic. For a detailed discussion of each option, see the following:

Step 10

Define the traffic matching criteria using any combination of the following tabs:

  • Source/Destination—The security zones (interfaces) through which the traffic passes, the IP addresses or the country or continent (geographical location) for the IP address, or the TCP ports used in the traffic. The default is any zone, address, geographical location, and TCP port. See Source/Destination Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules.

  • URL—The URL category of a web request. The default is that the URL category and reputation are not considered for matching purposes. See URL Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules.

  • Application—The application, or a filter that defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. The default is any encrypted application. See Application Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules .

  • Users—The user or user group. Your identity policies determine whether user and group information is available for traffic matching. You must configure identity policies to use this criteria. See User Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules.

  • Advanced—The characteristics derived from the certificates used in the connection, such as SSL/TLS version and certificate status. See Advanced Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules.

To modify a condition, you click the blue plus button within that condition, select the desired object or element, and click Select in the popup dialog box. If the criterion requires an object, you can click Create New Object if the object you require does not exist. Click the x for an object or element to remove it from the policy.

When adding conditions to SSL decryption rules, consider the following tips:

  • You can configure multiple conditions per rule. Traffic must match all the conditions in the rule for the rule to apply to traffic. For example, you can use a single rule to decrypt traffic based on URL category.

  • For each condition in a rule, you can add up to 50 criteria. Traffic that matches any of a condition's criteria satisfies the condition. For example, you can use a single rule to apply application control for up to 50 applications or application filters. Thus, there is an OR relationship among the items in a single condition, but an AND relationship between condition types (for example, between source/destination and application).

  • Matching URL category requires the URL license.

Step 11

(Optional.) Configure logging for the rule.

You must enable logging for traffic that matches the rule to be included in dashboard data or Event Viewer. Select from these options:

  • No logging—Do not generate any events.

  • Send Connection Events To—If you want to send a copy of the events to an external syslog server, select the server object that defines the syslog server. If the required object does not already exist, click Create and create it. (To disable logging to a syslog server, select Any from the server list.)

  • At End of Connection—Generate an event at the conclusion of the connection. Because event storage on the device is limited, sending events to an external syslog server can provide more long term storage and enhance your event analysis.

If you have a subscription to Cisco Security Analytics and Logging, specify or create a syslog server object using a Secure Event Connector's IP address and port. See Cisco Security Analytics and Logging for more information.

Step 12

Click Save.

Step 13

(Optional) For any rule that you created, you can select it and add a comment about it in the Add Comments field. To learn more about rule comments see, Adding Comments to Rules in FTD Policies and Rulesets.

Step 14

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Source/Destination Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules

The Source/Destination criteria of an SSL decryption rule define the security zones (interfaces) through which the traffic passes, the IP addresses or the country or continent (geographical location) for the IP address, or the TCP ports used in the traffic. The default is any zone, address, geographical location, and any TCP port. TCP is the only protocol matched to SSL decryption rules.

To modify a condition, you click the blue button within that condition, select the desired object or element, and click Select. If the criterion requires an object, you can click Create New Object if the object you require does not exist. Click the x for an object or element to remove it from the policy.

Source Zones, Destination Zones

The security zone objects that define the interfaces through which the traffic passes. You can define one, both, or neither criteria: any criteria not specified applies to traffic on any interface.

  • To match traffic leaving the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Destination Zones.

  • To match traffic entering the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Source Zones.

  • If you add both source and destination zone conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from one of the specified source zones and egress through one of the destination zones.

Use this criteria when the rule should apply based on where the traffic enters or exits the device. For example, if you want to ensure that all traffic going from outside hosts to inside hosts gets decrypted, you would select your outside zone as the Source Zones and your inside zone as the Destination Zones.

Source Networks, Destination Networks

The network objects or geographical locations that define the network addresses or locations of the traffic.

  • To match traffic from an IP address or geographical location, configure the Source Networks.

  • To match traffic to an IP address or geographical location, configure the Destination Networks.

If you add both source and destination network conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from one of the specified IP addresses and be destined for one of the destination IP addresses.

When you add this criteria, you select from the following menu options:

  • Network—Select the network objects or groups that define the source or destination IP addresses for the traffic you want to control.


    Note


    For Decrypt Known-Key rules, select an object with the IP address of the destination server that uses the certificate and key you uploaded.


  • Country/Continent—Select the geographical location to control traffic based on its source or destination country or continent. Selecting a continent selects all countries within the continent.

  • Custom Geolocation-You can also select a geolocation object that you created to define the location. Using geographical location, you could easily restrict access to a particular country without needing to know all of the potential IP addresses used there.

Source Ports, Destination Ports/Protocols

The port objects that define the protocols used in the traffic. You can specify TCP protocol and ports only for SSL decryption rules.

  • To match traffic from a TCP port, configure the Source Ports.

  • To match traffic to a TCP port, configure the Destination Ports/Protocols.

To match traffic both originating from specific TCP ports and destined for specific TCP ports, configure both. For example, you could target traffic from port TCP/80 to port TCP/8080.

Return to Step 9. "Define the traffic matching criteria"

Application Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules

The Application criteria of an SSL decryption rule defines the application used in an IP connection, or a filter that defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. The default is any application that has the SSL Protocol tag. You cannot match SSL decryption rules to any non-encrypted application.

Although you can specify individual applications in the rule, application filters simplify policy creation and administration. For example, you could create an SSL decryption rule that decrypts or blocks all high risk, low business relevance applications. If a user attempts to use one of those applications, the session is decrypted or blocked.

In addition, Cisco frequently updates and adds additional application detectors via system and vulnerability database (VDB) updates. Thus, a rule for high risk applications can automatically apply to new applications without you having to update the rule manually.

You can specify applications and filters directly in the rule, or create application filter objects that define those characteristics. The specifications are equivalent, although using objects can make it easier to stay within the 50-items-per-criteria system limit if you are creating a complex rule.

To modify the application and filters list, you click the button within the condition, select the desired applications or application filter objects, and click Select in the popup dialog box and then click Save. Click the x for an application, filter, or object to remove it from the policy. Click the Save As Filter link to save the combined criteria that is not already an object as a new application filter object.

For more information about the application criteria and how to configure advanced filters and select applications, see Configuring Application Filter Objects.

Consider the following tips when using application criteria in SSL decryption rules:

  • The system can identify unencrypted applications that become encrypted using StartTLS. This includes such applications as SMTPS, POPS, FTPS, TelnetS, and IMAPS. In addition, it can identify certain encrypted applications based on the Server Name Indication in the TLS ClientHello message, or the server certificate subject distinguished name value.

  • The system can identify the application only after the server certificate exchange. If traffic exchanged during the SSL handshake matches all other conditions in an SSL rule containing an application condition but the identification is not complete, the SSL policy allows the packet to pass. This behavior allows the handshake to complete so that applications can be identified. After the system completes its identification, the system applies the SSL rule action to the remaining session traffic that matches its application condition.

Return to Step 9. "Define the traffic matching criteria"

URL Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules

The URL criteria of an SSL decryption rule defines the category to which the URL in a web request belongs. You can also specify the relative reputation of sites to decrypt, block, or allow without decryption. The default is to not match connections based on URL categories.

For example, you could block all encrypted Gaming sites, or decrypt all high risk Social Networking sites. If a user attempts to browse to any URL with that category and reputation combination, the session is blocked or decrypted.

To add URL criteria to an SSL decryption rule:

Procedure

Step 1

Click the URL tab to add a URL category to an SSL Decryption rule.

Step 2

Search for and select the URL categories you want to block.

Step 3

By default, the traffic from URLs in the categories you pick will be decrypted by the SSL decryption rule no matter their security reputation. However, you can fine-tune the URL category or all the URL categories in your rule to exclude some sites from decryption based on reputation.

  • To fine-tune the reputation of a single category in the URL:

    1. Click the URL category after you selected it.

    2. Uncheck Any Reputation.

    3. Slide the green slider to the right to choose the URL reputation settings you want to exclude from the rule and click Save.

      The reputations that the slider covers are excluded from the effect of the rule. For example, if you slide the green slider to Benign Sites, Well Known Sites and Benign Sites are excluded from the effects of the SSL Decryption rule for the category you chose. URLs deemed to be Sights with Security Risks, Suspicious Sites, and High Risk Sites will still be affected by the rule for that URL category.

  • To fine-tune the reputation of all the URL categories you added to the rule:

    1. After you have selected all the categories you want to include in the SSL Decryption rule, click Apply Reputation to Selected Categories.

    2. Uncheck Any Reputation.

    3. Slide the green slider to the right to choose the URL reputation settings you want to exclude from the rule and click Save.

      The reputations that the slider covers are excluded from the effect of the rule. For example, if you slide the green slider to Benign Sites, Well Known Sites and Benign Sites are excluded from the effects of the SSL Decryption rule for all the categories you chose. URLs deemed to be Sights with Security Risks, Suspicious Sites, and High Risk Sites will still be affected by the rule for all the URL categories.

Step 4

Click Select.

Step 5

Click Save.

Return to Step 9. "Define the traffic matching criteria"


User Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules

The User criteria of an SSL decryption rule defines the user or user group for an IP connection. You must configure identity policies and the associated directory server to include user or user group criteria in a rule.

Your identity policies determine whether user identity is collected for a particular connection. If identity is established, the IP address of the host is associated with the identified user. Thus, traffic whose source IP address is mapped to a user is considered to be from that user. IP packets themselves do not include user identity information, so this IP-address-to-user mapping is the best approximation available.

Because you can add a maximum of 50 users or groups to a rule, selecting groups usually makes more sense than selecting individual users. For example, you could create a rule that decrypts traffic to the Engineering group that comes from the outside network, and create a separate rule that does not decrypt outgoing traffic from that group. Then, to make the rule apply to new engineers, you only need to add the engineer to the Engineering group in the directory server.

To modify the users list, you click the + button within the condition and select the desired user groups and click Select.

Return to Step 9. "Define the traffic matching criteria"

Advanced Criteria for SSL Decryption Rules

The Advanced traffic matching criteria relate to characteristics derived from the certificates used in the connection. You can configure any or all of the following options.

Certificate Properties

Traffic matches the certificate properties option of the rule if it matches any of the selected properties. You can configure the following:

  • Certificate Status: Whether the certificate is Valid or Invalid. Select Any (the default) if you do not care about certificate status. A certificate is considered valid if all of the following conditions are met, otherwise it is invalid:

    • The policy trusts the CA that issued the certificate.

    • The certificate's signature can be properly validated against the certificate's content.

    • The issuer CA certificate is stored in the policy's list of trusted CA certificates.

    • None of the policy's trusted CAs revoked the certificate.

    • The current date is between the certificate Valid From and Valid To dates.

  • Self-Signed: Whether the server certificate contains the same subject and issuer distinguished name. Select one of the following:

  • Self-Signing—The server certificate is self-signed.

    • CA-Signing—The server certificate is signed by a Certificate Authority. That is, the issuer and subject are not the same.

    • Any—Do not consider whether the certificate is self-signed as a match criteria.

Supported Version

The SSL/TLS version to match. The rule applies to traffic that uses the any of the selected versions only. The default is all versions. Select from: SSLv3.0, TLSv1.0, TLSv1.1, TLSv1.2.

For example, if you wanted to permit TLSv1.2 connections only, you could create a block rule for the non-TLSv1.2 versions. Traffic that uses any version not listed, such as SSL v2.0, is handled by the default action for the SSL decryption policy.

Return to Step 9. "Define the traffic matching criteria"

Configure Certificates for Known Key and Re-Sign Decryption

If you implement decryption, either by re-signing or using known keys, you need to identify the certificates that the SSL decryption rules can use. Ensure that all certificates are valid and unexpired.

Especially for known-key decryption, you need to ensure that the system has the current certificate and key for each destination server whose connections you are decrypting. With a decrypt known key rule, you use the actual certificate and key from the destination server for decryption. Thus, you must ensure that the FDM-managed device has the current certificate and key at all times, or decryption will be unsuccessful.

Upload a new internal certificate and key whenever you change the certificate or key on the destination server in a known key rule. Upload them as an internal certificate (not an internal CA certificate). You can upload the certificate during the following procedure, or upload the certificate to the Objects page by clicking the button and selecting FTD > Certificate.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device for which you want to create the SSL policy and click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

Step 4

Click SSL Decryption in the policy bar.

Step 5

Click the certificate button in the SSL decryption policy policy bar.

Step 6

In the SSL Decryption Configuration dialog, click the Select Decrypt Re-Sign Certificate menu and select or create the internal CA certificate to use for rules that implement decryption with re-signed certificates. You can use the pre-defined NGFW-Default-InternalCA certificate, or one that you created or uploaded.

If you have not already installed the certificate in client browsers, click the download button to obtain a copy. See the documentation for each browser for information on how to install the certificate. Also see the Downloading the CA Certificate for Decrypt Re-Sign Rules section of the Security Policies chapter of the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager for the version your device is running

Step 7

For each rule that decrypts using a known key, upload the internal certificate and key for the destination server.

Step 8

Click under Decrypt Known-Key Certificates.

Step 9

Select the internal identity certificate, or click Create New Internal Certificate to upload it now.

Step 10

Click Save.

Step 11

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Downloading the CA Certificate for Decrypt Re-Sign Rules

If you decide to decrypt traffic, users must have the internal CA certificate that is used in the encryption process defined as a Trusted Root Certificate Authority in their applications that use TLS/SSL. Typically if you generate a certificate, or sometimes even if you import one, the certificate is not already defined as trusted in these applications. By default in most web browsers, when users send HTTPS requests, they will see a warning message from the client application informing them that there is a problem with the web site's security certificate. Usually, the error message says that the web site's security certificate was not issued by a trusted certificate authority or the web site was certified by an unknown authority, but the warning might also suggest there is a possible man-in-the-middle attack in progress. Some other client applications do not show this warning message to users nor allow users to accept the unrecognized certificate.

You have the following options for providing users with the required certificate:

Inform users to accept the root certificate

You can inform the users in your organization what the new policies are at the company and tell them to accept the root certificate supplied by the organization as a trusted source. Users should accept the certificate and save it in the Trusted Root Certificate Authority storage area so that they are not prompted again the next time they access the site.


Note


The user needs to accept and trust the CA certificate that created the replacement certificate. If they instead simply trust the replacement server certificate, they will continue to see warnings for each different HTTPS site that they visit.


Add the root certificate to client devices

You can add the root certificate to all client devices on the network as a trusted root certificate authority. This way, the client applications automatically accept transactions with the root certificate.

You can either make the certificate available to users by E-mailing it or placing it on a shared site, or you could incorporate the certificate into your corporate workstation image and use your application update facilities to distribute it automatically to users.

The following procedure explains how to download the internal CA certificate and install it on Windows clients.

Procedure

The process differs depending on the operating system and type of browser. For example, you can use the following process for Internet Explorer and Chrome running on Windows. (For Firefox, install through the Tools > Options > Advanced page.)

Messages should indicate that the import was successful. You might see an intermediate dialog box warning you that Windows could not validate the certificate if you generated a self-signed certificate rather than obtaining one from a well-known third-party Certificate Authority.

You can now close out the Certificate and Internet Options dialog boxes.

Procedure

Step 1

Download the certificate from Firepower Device Manager.

  1. In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

  2. Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

  3. Click the FTD tab and select the device on which the certificate is stored.

  4. Click Policy in the Management pane at the right.

  5. Click SSL Decryption in the policy bar.

  6. Click the SSL decryption configuration button in the SSL decryption policy policy bar.

  7. Click the Download button

  8. Select a download location, optionally change the file name (but not the extension), and click Save.

  9. You can now cancel out of the SSL Decryption Settings dialog box.

Step 2

Install the certificate in the Trusted Root Certificate Authority storage area in web browsers on client systems, or make it available for clients to install themselves. This procedure will be different for different browsers and operating systems.


Warning
CA Certificates Configured Through FDM-Managed Devices

CDO can manage multiple devices but is limited the in additional information that is saved when the device configuration is saved, which may incur some issues when handling internal CA certificates. CDO does not save the cert or key information of CA certificates that are configured through the FDM-managed console; if you attempt to use a CA certificate that was configured in an FDM-managed device and apply it to an SSL policy that is deployed to a secondary device, CDO creates a local copy of the CA certificate but does not and cannot copy the key information. As a result, neither CDO or the secondary device have the key information and the CA certificate cannot be successfully deployed. This also means that the download link for the local copy of the CA certificate is unavailable.

We strongly recommend configuring a separate CA certificate for any additional devices through an FDM-managed device, or creating CA certificates through the CDO UI.

Rulesets

About Rulesets

A ruleset is a collection of access control rules that can be shared with multiple FDM-managed devices. Any changes made to the rules of a ruleset affect the other managed devices that use this ruleset. An FDM-managed device can have device-specific (local) and shared (rulesets) rules. You can also create rulesets from existing rules in an FDM-managed device.


Important


The "Rulesets" feature is currently available FDM-managed devices version 6.5 or later and later. Also note that rulesets do not support devices enabled for Snort 3.

The following limitations apply:

  • You cannot attach rulesets to Snort 3-enabled devices.

  • You cannot create a ruleset from an existing device that has Snort 3 installed.

  • You cannot associate a custom IPS policy with a ruleset.


Copy or Move Rules associated with Rulesets

It's possible to copy or move access control rules within a ruleset or across different rulesets. Also, you're allowed to copy or move rules between local and rulesets. See Copy FDM Access Control Rules and Move FDM Access Control Rules for more information.

Auto-Detect Existing Rulesets

When you onboard a device, CDO auto-detects existing rulesets on them and tries to match them with the rules on the device. On a successful match, CDO automatically attaches the rulesets to the newly onboarded device. However, if there are multiple ruleset matches for the same set of rules on the device, none of them are attached, and you have to assign them manually.

Configure Rulesets for a Device

Use the sections below to create and deploy a ruleset:

Procedure

Step 1

Create a ruleset.

  1. Create a new ruleset and assign rules to it.

  2. Assign objects to the rules.

  3. Set the priority of the ruleset.

  4. Change the order of the rules if required.

Step 2

Deploy a ruleset to multiple FDM-managed devices.

  1. Attach multiple devices to a ruleset.

  2. Review and deploy the ruleset to the devices.


Create or Edit a Ruleset

You can create a ruleset and add new access control rules to it.

Use the following procedure to create a ruleset for multiple FDM-managed devices:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > FTD Rulesets.

Step 2

Click the plus button to create a new ruleset.

Note

 

To edit an existing ruleset, select the ruleset and click the edit icon .

Step 3

Enter a name for the ruleset and then click Create.

Step 4

Create access control rules to add them to the ruleset. See Configure the FDM Access Control Policy for instructions.

Note

 

Access Control rules in the rulesets don't support criteria for Users criteria.

Step 5

In the upper right corner of the window, select the ruleset's priority . The priority can be set when the device is not attached to the ruleset. This selection affects all of the rules included in this ruleset and how it is handled on the devices:

  • Top- The ruleset is processed before all other rules on the device. Rules are ordered at the top of the rule list and are processed first. No other ruleset can precede the rules in this policy. You can only have one top ruleset per device.

  • Bottom- The ruleset is processed after all other rules on the device. Other than the policy's default action, no other ruleset can succeed rules in this policy. You can only have one bottom ruleset per device. By default, the priority is set to Bottom.

The Local Rules displays all the device-specific rules of the device.

Note

 

The priority cannot be changed when a ruleset is attached to a device. You have to detach the device and change the priority.

Step 6

Click Save. You can create as many rules as you want.

Step 7

(Optional) For any rule that you created, you can select it and add a comment about it in the Add Comments field. To learn more about rule comments see, Adding Comments to Rules in FTD Policies and Rulesets.

Note

 
  • You can change the order of rules in a ruleset even if you have devices attached to the ruleset. Use the following procedure to change the priority of the ruleset:

    1. In the navigation pane, click Policies > Rulesets and select the ruleset you want to modify.

    2. Select a rule that you want to move.

    3. Hover the cursor inside the rule row and use the Move Up or Move Down arrow to move the rule to the desired order.

  • CDO allows you to override objects associated with the rules of a ruleset. When you add a new object to a rule, you can override it only after you attach a device to the ruleset and save the changes.


Deploy a Ruleset to Multiple FDM-Managed Devices or Templates

You must attach a ruleset to a device or template for the rules to be enforced. After reviewing the changes, you can deploy the configuration on the device. When you apply a template to a new FDM-managed device, the ruleset included in the template is pushed to the device.

For more information, see Rulesets with FDM Templates.

Before you begin, consider the following information:

  • You can only attach a ruleset to FDM-managed devices that are already onboarded to CDO.

  • A device can have only one bottom or top ruleset.

  • After you attach or remove a device from a ruleset, the changes are staged in CDO but not deployed, and the device becomes Not Synced with CDO. Deploy the changes to the device by clicking the icon from the top right corner of the screen.

  • After you attach a device, the new rules associated with rulesets don't overwrite existing rules associated with the device.

You can associate rulesets with devices in two ways:

  • Add devices to a Ruleset from the Ruleset page.

  • Add Rulesets to a device from the Device Policy page.

Add Devices to a Ruleset from the Ruleset page
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > FTD Rulesets.

Step 2

Select the ruleset you want to assign to FDM-managed devices and in the Actions pane, click Edit.

Step 3

On the top right corner, click the Device button appearing beside Ruleset for.

Step 4

Select from the list of eligible FDM-managed devices.

Step 5

In the gear icon, select one of the following actions for the system to perform when it determines duplicate names between the rules in the ruleset and the device-specific rules:

  • Fail on conflicting rules (default option): CDO doesn't add the ruleset to the device. You need to manually rename the duplicate rules and then add the ruleset.

  • Rename conflicting rules: CDO renames the conflicting rules present on the device (Local Rules).

Step 6

Click Save. The Attached Ruleset to Devices wizard is closed.

Step 7

Click Save in the upper right corner to save the changes made to the ruleset. Saving the ruleset stages the changes to CDO.

Note

 

Each time you modify a ruleset, you must click Save. By doing this operation, all changes are staged to CDO. You have to deploy the changes manually.

Step 8

Click Confirm. Saving the ruleset stages the changes to CDO.

Step 9

Review and deploy the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once. If you discard the staged ruleset changes on a device, see Impact of Discarding Staged Ruleset Changes for information.


Add Rulesets to a Device from the Device Policy page
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device you want from the list.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 5

Click the button appearing in the upper right corner of the window.

Step 6

Select the rulesets that you want.

Step 7

In the gear icon, select one of the following actions for the system to perform when it determines duplicate names between the rules in the ruleset and the device-specific rules:

  • Fail on conflicting rules (default option): CDO doesn't add the ruleset to the device. You need to manually rename the duplicate rules and then add the ruleset.

  • Rename conflicting rules: CDO renames the conflicting rules present on the device (Local Rules).

Note

 

If there are no conflicting rules on the selected device, CDO attaches the ruleset to the device without any changes.

Step 8

Click Attach Ruleset. The ruleset gets added to the device based on the priority of the ruleset.

Step 9

Review and deploy the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once. If you discard the staged ruleset changes on a device, see Impact of Discarding Staged Ruleset Changes for information.


Rulesets with FDM-Managed Templates

CDO allows you to assign the rulesets to FDM-managed templates.

  • When you create a template from an FDM-managed device with rulesets, CDO adds the template automatically to the rulesets that were present on the source device. You can manage the template from rulesets.

  • When you apply a template with rulesets to a target FDM-managed device, CDO adds the target device automatically to the rulesets, thereby manage the target device from rulesets.

  • When a template with rulesets is applied to a target FDM-managed device which already has different rulesets, CDO removes the existing rulesets from the target device and adds new rulesets associated with the template.

See Deploy a Ruleset to Multiple FDM-Managed Devices or Templates for more information.

Create Rulesets from Existing Device Rules

You're allowed to create rulesets by selecting existing rules in the FDM-managed device.

Use the following procedure to create a ruleset from existing device rules:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device that you want from the list.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy. The existing rules of the device appear.

Step 5

Perform the following based on your requirement:

  1. To create Top rules, select consecutive rules starting from the first rule at the top.

  2. To create Bottom rules, select consecutive rules that include the last rule at the bottom.

Step 6

In the Actions pane on the right, click Create Ruleset.

Note

 

Your selection must include the first or last rule for the Create Ruleset link to be clickable.

Step 7

Specify a name in the Ruleset Name field and click Create. The corresponding ruleset is created in the device.

You can continue creating ruleset using the remaining rules in the device.


Impact of Out-of-Band Changes on Rulesets

When you add new rules or make changes to the existing rules using the FDM-managed device, and you have enabled conflict detection in CDO for your FDM-managed device, CDO detects the out-of-band change and the device's configuration status shows Conflict Detected. You can resolve this conflict by accepting or rejecting the changes.

If you accept the device changes, CDO overwrites the last know configuration with the new changes made on the device. The following changes take place:

  • Rulesets that are impacted by the changes lose their relationship with devices.

  • Rules associated with these rulesets are converted to local rules.

If you reject the device changes, CDO rejects the new changes and replaces configuration on the device with the last synced configuration in CDO.

Impact of Discarding Staged Ruleset Changes

When you add new rules to a ruleset or make changes to the existing rules associated with the ruleset using CDO, it saves the changes you make to its own copy of the configuration file. Those changes are considered "pending" on CDO until they are "deployed" to the device.

If you discard the pending ruleset changes on the device, CDO completely overwrites its local copy of a device's configuration with the configuration stored on the device.

The following changes occur on the rulesets and the associated devices:

  • Rulesets that are impacted by the changes lose their relationship with devices.

  • Rules associated with these rulesets are converted to local rules.

  • CDO discards the new staged changes and retains the configuration present on the device.

View Rules and Rulesets

View Rules from Device Policy Page

The FDM-managed device policy page shows individual (local) and shared rules (associated with rulesets).

Use the following procedure to view the FDM-managed device ruleset from the policy page:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device that you want.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy. You see the following rules based on the configuration you have made:

  • Top Rules: Shows the mandatory shared rules which will be processed before all other rules on the device.

  • Local Rules: Shows device-specific rules which will be processed after mandatory rules on the device.

  • Bottom: Shows the default shared rules which will be processed after all other rules on the device.

Note

 

You can edit the ruleset by going to the corresponding ruleset page.

  1. On the top right corner of the ruleset header, click Go to ruleset .

  2. Make the required changes to the rules and click Save. The new changes are updated on all devices associated with the ruleset.


View Rulesets

The Rulesets page shows all rulesets available in your tenant. It also provides information about devices associated with the rulesets.

Use the following procedure to view all rulesets from the Rulesets page:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > Rulesets. The rules available in your tenant are displayed.

Step 2

Click a ruleset to view its details. The Devices column shows the number of FDM-managed devices attached to each ruleset.

Step 3

In the Management pane, click Workflows. This page shows all the actions that you performed on the device. You can click Diagram to view a pictorial representation of the workflow.


Search Rulesets

You can use the Filter by Device filter to select the devices for viewing the rulesets assigned to them.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > Rulesets.

Step 2

Click the filter icon and click Filter by Device.

Step 3

Select one or more devices from the list and click OK.

You can see the rulesets based on the devices you have selected.


View Jobs Associated with Rulesets

The Jobs page records actions when you apply ruleset to FDM-managed devices or remove them from FDM-managed devices. It also determines if the action was successful or failed.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > Rulesets.

Step 2

Click a ruleset to view its details.

Step 3

In the Management pane, click Jobs. This page shows actions that you performed on the ruleset.


Change Log Entries after Creating Rulesets

When CDO detects a change on the ruleset, it creates a change log entry for every action performed on the ruleset.

Clicking the blue Diff link in the change log entry row displays a side-by-side comparison of the changes in the context of the running configuration file.

In the following example, the change log shows entries for a new ruleset with three rules added to the ruleset. It also shows information about setting the ruleset's priority and the FDM-managed device attached to the ruleset.

Number in Illustration

Explanation

1

The new ruleset "Ruleset_3" is created at 11:03:18 A.M on Feb 25, 2020.

2

The new access rules "new_rule_1", "new_rule_3", and "new_rule_3" are created in the ruleset.

3

The ruleset's priority is set to "Mandatory".

4

The ruleset is attached to the "BGL_FTD" device.

5

The ruleset changes are saved.

Detach FDM-Managed Devices from a Selected Ruleset

Use the following procedure to detach devices from a ruleset:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > Rulesets.

Step 2

Select the ruleset you want to edit and click the Edit link in the Actions pane.

Step 3

On the top right corner, click the Device button appearing beside Ruleset for.

Step 4

Uncheck the devices that are currently attached to the ruleset, or click Clear to remove all devices at once.

Step 5

Click Save.

Step 6

Click Save in the upper right window to save the ruleset. Saving the policy stages the changes to CDO.

Step 7

Review and deploy the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Delete Rules and Rulesets

Delete Rules from a Ruleset

You can delete a rule that you no longer need in the ruleset.

Use the following procedure to delete rules:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > Rulesets and select a ruleset.

Step 2

Click Edit in the Actions pane.

Step 3

Select a rule that you want to delete and then click Remove under Actions.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Step 5

Click Save in the upper right corner to save the changes made to the ruleset. Saving the ruleset stages the changes to CDO.

Step 6

Preview and deploy your changes now or wait and deploy multiple changes at one time.


Delete a Ruleset

You can delete a ruleset only after detaching all devices associated with it. See Detach FDM-Managed Devices from a Ruleset.

Use the following procedure to delete a ruleset:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Policies > Rulesets and select the ruleset you want to delete.

Step 2

Click Remove inside the ruleset row.

Step 3

Click Confirm to delete the ruleset permanently.

Step 4

Review and deploy your changes now or wait and deploy multiple changes at one time.


Remove a Ruleset From a Selected FDM-Managed Device

There are two ways of removing a ruleset from a selected FDM-managed device, but their behaviors are slightly different.

Delete a Ruleset From a Selected FDM-Managed Device

You can delete a ruleset and its associated shared rules from a selected FDM-managed device. The ruleset can also be detached from an FDM-managed device from the ruleset page.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device that you want from the list.

Step 4

Click the delete icon appearing on the top right corner of a ruleset.

Step 5

Click Confirm.

Step 6

Review and deploy the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Disassociate a Ruleset From a Selected FDM-Managed Device

If you want to add a new device-specific rule to a ruleset in an FDM-managed device, you need to dissociate that ruleset from the FDM-managed device, which converts its associated shared rules to local rules. Then, you can add the rules that you want to local rules.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device that you want from the list.

Step 4

In the Management pane on the right, click Policy.

Step 5

Click the icon appearing on the top right corner of a ruleset.

Step 6

Click Confirm.

Step 7

Review and deploy the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Adding Comments to Rules in Policies and Rulesets

You can add comments to rules in FDM-managed device policies and rules in rulesets to document some characteristic of a rule. Rule comments are are only visible on CDO; they are never written to the FDM-managed device nor are they visible in FDM.

Comments are added to rules after they are created and saved in CDO. As rule comments are only a feature of CDO, creating, changing, or deleting a rule comment does not change the configuration status of the device in CDO to "Not Synced". You will not need to write changes from CDO to the FDM-managed device to save a rule comment.

Comments associated with rules in an FDM-managed device policy can be viewed and edited on the device's policy page. Comments associated with rules in an FDM-managed device ruleset can be viewed and edited on the rulesets page. When a ruleset is used in a policy, any comments associated with any of the rules in the ruleset are displayed in the comments area of the policy. The comments are read-only.

When you search for a string in policies, rulesets, or the change log, CDO will search the comments associated with a rule for that string along with the other attributes and values of a rule.

When a comment for a rule is added or edited, that action is recorded in the Change log. Because rule comments are only recorded and maintained in CDO, they are labeled (CDO-only change) in the change log.


Caution


If there is an out of band change to an FDM-managed device's configuration and CDO reads that configuration into its database, the comments associated with any rules will be wiped out.


Adding a Comment to a Rule

Procedure

Step 1

Open the policy or ruleset that contains the rule you want to comment on.

Step 2

Select the rule.

Step 3

Click Add Comment in the Add Comment area for the rule.

Step 4

Add a comment in the text box.

Step 5

Click Save.


Editing Comments about Rules in Policies and Rulesets

Editing a comment on a rule in a policy

Use this procedure to edit a comment on a rule in an FDM-managed device policy.

Procedure

Step 1

From the CDO menu bar, select Policies > FTD/Meraki/AWS Policies.

Step 2

Select the FDM-managed device policy with the Local Rule you are going to add a comment to. You are not able to add a comment to a rule in a ruleset within a policy.

Step 3

In the Comment pane, click the edit icon .

Step 4

Edit the comment and click save. You will see the comment change reflected in the Comment area immediately.


Editing a comment on a rule in a ruleset

In order to see a change to a comment on a rule in a ruleset, reflected on the policy page, you have to make changes to the comment and the rule in a specific order.

Procedure

Step 1

From the CDO navigation panel, select Policies > FTD Rulesets.

Step 2

Select the ruleset with the rule you want to add a comment to.

Step 3

In the Actions pane, click Edit.

Step 4

Select the rule.

Step 5

In the Comment pane, click the edit icon .

Step 6

Edit the comment and click save. You will see the comment change reflected in the Comment area of the ruleset page immediately.

Step 7

Select the rule you are going to change and in the Actions pane, click Edit.

Step 8

Edit the rule and click the blue check button to save the change.

Step 9

At the top of the ruleset page, click Save to save the ruleset. The new comment for the rule in the ruleset will now be reflected on a policy page.

Step 10

To see the comment change in a policy page:

  1. From the CDO menu bar, select Policies > FTD/Meraki/AWS Policies.

  2. Select an FDM-managed device policy that contains the ruleset you just edited.

  3. Select the rule with the comment you just edited. You should see your new comment in the Comment pane.


Network Address Translation

Each computer and device within an IP network is assigned a unique IP address that identifies the host. Because of a shortage of public IPv4 addresses, most of these IP addresses are private and not routable anywhere outside of the private company network. RFC 1918 defines the private IP addresses you can use internally that should not be advertised:

  • 10.0.0.0 through 10.255.255.255

  • 172.16.0.0 through 172.31.255.255

  • 192.168.0.0 through 192.168.255.255

One of the main functions of Network Address Translation (NAT) is to enable private IP networks to connect to the Internet. NAT replaces a private IP address with a public IP address, translating the private addresses in the internal private network into legal, routable addresses that can be used on the public Internet. In this way, NAT conserves public addresses because it can be configured to advertise at a minimum only one public address for the entire network to the outside world.

Other functions of NAT include:

  • Security-Keeping internal IP addresses hidden discourages direct attacks.

  • IP routing solutions-Overlapping IP addresses are not a problem when you use NAT.

  • Flexibility-You can change internal IP addressing schemes without affecting the public addresses available externally; for example, for a server accessible to the Internet, you can maintain a fixed IP address for Internet use, but internally, you can change the server address.

  • Translating between IPv4 and IPv6 (Routed mode only)-If you want to connect an IPv6 network to an IPv4 network, NAT lets you translate between the two types of addresses.

You can use CDO to create NAT rules for many different use cases. Use the NAT rule wizard or these topics to create different NAT rules:

Order of Processing NAT Rules

Network Object NAT and twice NAT rules are stored in a single table that is divided into three sections. Section 1 rules are applied first, then section 2, and finally section 3, until a match is found. For example, if a match is found in section 1, sections 2 and 3 are not evaluated. The following table shows the order of rules within each section.

Table 6. NAT Rule Table

Table Section

Rule Type

Order of Rules within the Section

Section 1

Twice NAT (ASA)

Manual NAT (FTD)

Applied on a first match basis, in the order they appear in the configuration. Because the first match is applied, you must ensure that specific rules come before more general rules, or the specific rules might not be applied as desired. By default, twice NAT rules are added to section 1.

Section 2

Network Object NAT (ASA)

Auto NAT (FTD)

If a match in section 1 is not found, section 2 rules are applied in the following order:

  1. Static rules.

  2. Dynamic rules.

Within each rule type, the following ordering guidelines are used:

  1. Quantity of real IP addresses—From smallest to largest. For example, an object with one address will be assessed before an object with 10 addresses.

  2. For quantities that are the same, then the IP address number is used, from lowest to highest. For example, 10.1.1.0 is assessed before 11.1.1.0.

  3. If the same IP address is used, then the name of the network object is used, in alphabetical order. For example, object "Arlington" is assessed before object "Detroit."

Section 3

Twice NAT (ASA)

Manual NAT (FTD)

If a match is still not found, section 3 rules are applied on a first match basis, in the order they appear in the configuration. This section should contain your most general rules. You must also ensure that any specific rules in this section come before general rules that would otherwise apply.

For section 2 rules, for example, you have the following IP addresses defined within network objects:

  • 192.168.1.0/24 (static)

  • 192.168.1.0/24 (dynamic)

  • 10.1.1.0/24 (static)

  • 192.168.1.1/32 (static)

  • 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object Detroit)

  • 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object Arlington)

The resultant ordering would be:

  • 192.168.1.1/32 (static)

  • 10.1.1.0/24 (static)

  • 192.168.1.0/24 (static)

  • 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object Arlington)

  • 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object Detroit)

  • 192.168.1.0/24 (dynamic)

Network Address Translation Wizard

The Network Address Translation (NAT) wizard helps you create NAT rules on your devices for these types of access:

  • Enable Internet Access for Internal Users. You may use this NAT rule to allow users on an internal network to reach the internet.

  • Expose an Internal Server to the Internet. You may use this NAT rule to allow people outside your network to reach an internal web or email server.

Prerequisites to "Enable Internet Access for Internal Users"

Before you create your NAT rule, gather this information:

  • The interface that is closest to your users; this is usually called the "inside" interface.

  • The interface closest to your Internet connection; this is usually called the "outside" interface.

  • If you want to allow only specific users to reach the internet, you need the subnet addresses for those users.

Prerequisites to "Expose an Internal Server to the Internet"

Before you create your NAT rule, gather this information:

  • The interface that is closest to your users; this is usually called the "inside" interface.

  • The interface closest to your Internet connection; this is usually called the "outside" interface.

  • The IP address of the server inside your network that you would like to translate to an internet-facing IP address.

  • The public IP address you want the server to use.

What to do Next

See Create a NAT Rule by using the NAT Wizard.

Create a NAT Rule by using the NAT Wizard

Before you begin
See Network Address Translation Wizard for the prerequisites needed to create NAT rules using the NAT wizard.
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Use the filter and search fields to find the device for which you want to create the NAT rule.

Step 5

In the Management area of the details panel, click NAT .

Step 6

Click > NAT Wizard.

Step 7

Respond to the NAT Wizard questions and follow the on-screen instructions.

  • The NAT Wizard creates rules with Network Objects. Either select an existing object from the drop-down menu, or create a new object with the create button .

  • Before you can save the NAT rule, all IP addresses need to be defined as network objects.

Step 8

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Common Use Cases for NAT

Twice NAT and Manual NAT

Here are some common tasks that can be achieved using "Network Object NAT", also known as "Auto NAT":

Network Object NAT and Auto NAT

Here is a common task that can be achieved using "Twice NAT", also know as "Manual NAT":

Enable a Server on the Inside Network to Reach the Internet Using a Public IP address

Use Case

Use this NAT strategy when you have a server with a private IP address that needs to be accessed from the internet and you have enough public IP addresses to NAT one public IP address to the private IP address. If you have a limited number of public IP addresses, see Make a server on the inside network available to users on a specific port of a public IP address (that solution may be more suitable).

Strategy

Your server has a static, private IP address, and users outside your network have to be able to reach your server. Create a network object NAT rule that translates the static private IP address to a static public IP address. After that, create an access policy that allows traffic from that public IP address to reach the private IP address. Finally, deploy these changes to your device.

Before you begin

Before you begin, create two network objects. Name one object servername_inside and the other object servername_outside. The servername_inside network object should contain the private IP address of your server. The servername_outside network object should contain the public IP address of your server. See Create Network Objects for instructions.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you want to create the NAT rule for.

Step 5

Click NAT in the Management pane at the right.

Step 6

Click > Network Object NAT.

Step 7

In section 1, Type, select Static. Click Continue.

Step 8

In section 2, Interfaces, choose inside for the source interface and outside for the destination interface. Click Continue.

Step 9

In section 3, Packets, perform these actions:

  1. Expand the Original Address menu, click Choose, and select the servername_inside object.

  2. Expand the Translated Address menu, click Choose, and select the servername_outside object.

Step 10

Skip section 4, Advanced.

Step 11

For an FDM-managed device, in section 5, Name, give the NAT rule a name.

Step 12

Click Save.

Step 13

For ASA, deploy a Network Policy rule or for FDM-managed device, deploy an access control policy rule to allow the traffic to flow from servername_inside to servername_outside.

Step 14

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Enable Users on the Inside Network to Access the Internet Using the Outside Interface's Public IP Address

Use Case

Allow users and computers in your private network to connect to the internet by sharing the public address of your outside interface.

Strategy

Create a port address translation (PAT) rule that allows all the users on your private network to share the outside interface public IP address of your device.

After the private address is mapped to the public address and port number, the device records that mapping. When incoming traffic bound for that public IP address and port is received, the device sends it back to the private IP address that requested it.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you want to create the NAT rule for.

Step 5

Click NAT in the Management pane at the right.

Step 6

Click Network Object NAT.

Step 7

In section 1, Type, select Dynamic. Click Continue.

Step 8

In section 2, Interfaces, choose any for the source interface and outside for the destination interface. Click Continue.

Step 9

In section 3, Packets, perform these actions :

  1. Expand the Original Address menu, click Choose and select the any-ipv4 or any-ipv6 object depending on your network configuration.

  2. Expand the Translated Address menu, and select interface from the available list. Interface indicates to use the public address of the outside interface.

Step 10

For an FDM-managed device, in section 5, Name, enter a name for the NAT rule.

Step 11

Click Save.

Step 12

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Entries in the ASA's Saved Configuration File

Here are the entries that are created and appear in an ASA's saved configuration file as a result of this procedure.


Note


This does not apply to FDM-managed devices.


Objects created by this procedure:

object network any_network
subnet 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

NAT rules created by this procedure:

object network any_network
nat (any,outside) dynamic interface

Make a Server on the Inside Network Available on a Specific Port of a Public IP Address

Use Case

If you only have one public IP address, or a very limited number, you can create a network object NAT rule that translates inbound traffic, bound for a static IP address and port, to an internal address. We have provided procedures for specific cases, but you can use them as a model for other supported applications.

Prerequisites

Before you begin, create three separate network objects, one each for an FTP, HTTP, and SMTP server. For the sake of the following procedures, we call these objects ftp-server-object, http-server-object, and smtp-server-object. See Create Network Objects for instructions.

NAT Incoming FTP Traffic to an FTP Server
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you want to create the NAT rule for.

Step 5

Click NAT in the Management pane at the right.

Step 6

Click > Network Object NAT.

Step 7

In section 1, Type, select Static. Click Continue.

Step 8

In section 2, Interfaces, choose inside for the source interface and outside for the destination interface. Click Continue.

Step 9

In section 3, Packets, perform these actions:

  • Expand the Original Address menu, click Choose, and select the ftp-server-object.

  • Expand the Translated Address menu, click Choose, and select the Interface.

  • Check Use Port Translation.

  • Select tcp, ftp, ftp.

Step 10

Skip section 4, Advanced.

Step 11

For an FDM-managed device, in section 5, Name, give the NAT rule a name.

Step 12

Click Save. The new rule is created in section 2 of the NAT table.

Step 13

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


NAT Incoming HTTP Traffic to an HTTP Server

If you only have one public IP address, or a very limited number, you can create a network object NAT rule that translates inbound traffic, bound for a static IP address and port, to an internal address. We have provided procedures for specific cases, but you can use them as a model for other supported applications.

Before you begin

Before you begin, create a network object for the http server. For the sake of this procedure, we will call the object, http-object. See Create Network Objects for instructions.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you want to create the NAT rule for.

Step 5

Click NAT in the Management pane at the right.

Step 6

Click > Network Object NAT.

Step 7

In section 1, Type, select Static. Click Continue.

Step 8

In section 2, Interfaces, choose inside for the source interface and outside for the destination interface. Click Continue.

Step 9

In section 3, Packets, perform these actions:

  • Expand the Original Address menu, click Choose, and select the http-object.

  • Expand the Translated Address menu, click Choose, and select the Interface.

  • Check Use Port Translation.

  • Select tcp, http, http.

Step 10

Skip section 4, Advanced.

Step 11

For an FDM-managed device, in section 5, Name, give the NAT rule a name.

Step 12

Click Save. The new rule is created in section 2 of the NAT table.

Step 13

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


NAT Incoming SMTP Traffic to an SMTP Server

If you only have one public IP address, or a very limited number, you can create a network object NAT rule that translates inbound traffic, bound for a static IP address and port, to an internal address. We have provided procedures for specific cases, but you can use them as a model for other supported applications.

Before you begin

Before you begin, create a network object for the smtp server. For the sake of this procedure, we will call the object, smtp-object. See Create Network Objects for instructions.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you want to create the NAT rule for.

Step 5

Click NAT in the Management pane at the right.

Step 6

Click > Network Object NAT.

Step 7

In section 1, Type, select Static. Click Continue.

Step 8

In section 2, Interfaces, choose inside for the source interface and outside for the destination interface. Click Continue.

Step 9

In section 3, Packets, perform these actions:

  • Expand the Original Address menu, click Choose, and select the smtp-server-object.

  • Expand the Translated Address menu, click Choose, and select the Interface.

  • Check Use Port Translation.

  • Select tcp, smtp, smtp.

Step 10

Skip section 4, Advanced.

Step 11

For an FDM-managed device, in section 5, Name, give the NAT rule a name.

Step 12

Click Save. The new rule is created in section 2 of the NAT table.

Step 13

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Translate a Range of Private IP Addresses to a Range of Public IP Addresses

Use Case

Use this approach if you have a group of specific device types, or user types, that need to have their IP addresses translated to a specific range so that the receiving devices (the devices on the other end of the transaction) allow the traffic in.

Translate a Pool of Inside Addresses to a Pool of Outside Addresses
Before you begin

Create a network object for the pool of private IP addresses you want to translate and create a network object for the pool of public addresses you want to translate those private IP addresses into.


Note


For the ASA FTD, the network group that defines the pool of "translated address" cannot be a network object that defines a subnet.


When creating these address pools, use Create or Edit a Firepower Network Object or Network Group for instructions.

For the sake of the following procedure, we named the pool of private addresses, inside_pool and name the pool of public addresses, outside_pool.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you want to create the NAT rule for.

Step 5

Click NAT in the Management pane at the right.

Step 6

Click > Network Object NAT.

Step 7

In section 1, Type, select Dynamic and click Continue.

Step 8

In section 2, Interfaces, set the source interface to inside and the destination interface to outside. Click Continue.

Step 9

In section 3, Packets, perform these tasks:

  • For the Original Address, click Choose and then select the inside_pool network object (or network group) you made in the prerequisites section above.

  • For the Translated Address, click Choose and then select the outside_pool network object (or network group) you made in the prerequisites section above.

Step 10

Skip section 4, Advanced.

Step 11

For an FDM-managed device, in section 5, Name, give the NAT rule a name.

Step 12

Click Save.

Step 13

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Prevent a Range of IP Addresses from Being Translated When Traversing the Outside Interface

Use Case

Use this Twice NAT use case to enable site-to-site VPN.

Strategy

You are translating a pool of IP addresses to itself so that the IP addresses in one location on the network arrives unchanged in another.

Create a Twice NAT Rule
Before you begin

Create a network object or network group that defines the pool of IP addresses you are going to translate to itself. For the ASA, the range of addresses can be defined by a network object that uses an IP address range, a network object that defines a subnet, or a network group object that includes all the addresses in the range. For the FTD, the range of addresses can be defined by a network object that defines a subnet or a network group object that includes all the addresses in the range.

When creating the network objects or network groups, use Create or Edit a Firepower Network Object or Network Group for instructions.

For the sake of the following procedure, we are going call the network object or network group, Site-to-Site-PC-Pool.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you want to create the NAT rule for.

Step 5

Click NAT in the Management pane at the right.

Step 6

Click > Twice NAT..

Step 7

In section 1, Type, select Static. Click Continue.

Step 8

In section 2, Interfaces, choose inside for the source interface and outside for the destination interface. Click Continue.

Step 9

In section 3, Packets, make these changes:

  • Expand the Original Address menu, click Choose, and select the Site-to-Site-PC-Pool object you created in the prerequisites section.

  • Expand the Translated Address menu, click Choose, and select the Site-to-Site-PC-Pool object you created in the prerequisites section.

Step 10

Skip section 4, Advanced.

Step 11

For an FDM-managed device, in section 5, Name, give the NAT rule a name.

Step 12

Click Save.

Step 13

For an ASA, create a crypto map. See CLI Book 3: Cisco ASA Series VPN CLI Configuration Guide and review the chapter on LAN-to-LAN IPsec VPNs for more information on creating a crypto map.

Step 14

Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Manage Virtual Private Network Management in CDO

A virtual private network (VPN) connection establishes a secure tunnel between endpoints over a public network such as the Internet.

This section applies to Remote Access and Site-to-site VPNs on FDM-managed device. It describes the Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) standards to build site-to-site VPNs connection on FTD. It also describes the SSL standards that are used to build and remote access VPN connections on FTD.

CDO supports the following types of VPN connections:

For additional information about Virtual Private Networks, refer to the Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager.

Introduction to Site-to-Site Virtual Private Network

A site-to-site VPN tunnel connects networks in different geographic locations. You can create site-to-site IPsec connections between managed devices and between managed devices and other Cisco or third-party peers that comply with all relevant standards. These peers can have any mix of inside and outside IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Site-to-site tunnels are built using the Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) protocol suite and Internet Key Exchange version 2 (IKEv2). After the VPN connection is established, the hosts behind the local gateway can connect to the hosts behind the remote gateway through the secure VPN tunnel.

VPN Topology

To create a new site-to-site VPN topology you must provide a unique name, specify a topology type, choose the IKE version that is used for IPsec IKEv1 or IKEv2, or both and authentication method. Once configured, you deploy the topology to FTD.

IPsec and IKE Protocols

In CDO, site-to-site VPNs are configured based on IKE policies and IPsec proposals that are assigned to VPN topologies. Policies and proposals are sets of parameters that define the characteristics of a site-to-site VPN, such as the security protocols and algorithms that are used to secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel. Several policy types may be required to define a full configuration image that can be assigned to a VPN topology.

Authentication VPN Tunnels

For authentication of VPN connections, configure a pre-shared key in the topology on each device. Pre-shared keys allow a secret key, used during the IKE authentication phase, to be shared between two peers.

Virtual Tunnel Interface (VTI)

CDO does not currently support the management, monitoring, or use of Virtual Tunnel Interface (VTI) tunnels on FTD. Devices with configured VTI tunnels can be onboarded to CDO but it ignores the VTI interfaces. If a security zone or static route references a VTI, CDO reads the security zone and static route without the VTI reference.

About Extranet Devices

You can add non-Cisco or unmanaged Cisco devices to a VPN topology as "Extranet" devices with either static or dynamic IP addresses.

  • Non-Cisco Device: You cannot use CDO to create and deploy configurations to non-Cisco devices.

  • Unmanaged Cisco Device: Cisco device not managed by your organization, such as spokes in networks managed by other organizations within your company, or a connection to a service provider or partner's network.

Configure Site-to-Site VPN for an FDM-Managed Device

CDO supports these aspects of site-to-site VPN functionality on FDM-managed devices:

  • Both IPsec IKEv1 & IKEv2 protocols are supported.

  • Automatic or manual pre-shared keys for authentication.

  • IPv4 and IPv6. All combinations of inside and outside are supported.

  • IPsec IKEv2 site-to-site VPN topologies provide configuration settings to comply with Security Certifications.

  • Static and dynamic interfaces.

  • Support for the dynamic IP address for the extranet device as an endpoint.

Configure Site-to-Site VPN Connections with Dynamically Addressed Peers

CDO allows you to create a site-to-site VPN connection between peers when one of the peers' VPN interface IP address is not known or when the interface obtains its address from a DHCP server. Any dynamic peer whose preshared key, IKE settings, and IPsec configurations match with another peer can establish a site-to-site VPN connection.

Consider two peers, A and B. The static peer is a device whose IP address of its VPN interface is fixed and a dynamic peer is a device whose IP address of the VPN interface is not known or has a temporary IP address.

The following use cases describe different scenarios for establishing a secure site-to-site VPN connection with dynamically-addressed peers:

  • A is a static peer, and B is a dynamic peer or conversely.

  • A is a static peer, and B is a dynamic peer with a resolved IP address from the DHCP server or conversely. You can select Bind VPN to the assigned IP to establish the VPN connection between the IP address of the static peer and the DHCP assigned IP address of the dynamic peer.

  • A and B are dynamic with resolved IP addresses from the DHCP server. In such a case, you must select Bind VPN to the assigned IP for at least one peer to establish the VPN connection between the IP address of the static peer and the DHCP assigned IP address of the dynamic peer.

  • A is a dynamic peer, and B is an extranet device with a static or dynamic IP address.

  • A is a dynamic peer with a resolved IP address from the DHCP server, and B is an Extranet device with a static or dynamic IP address. You can select Bind VPN to the assigned IP to establish the VPN connection between the IP address of the static peer and the DHCP assigned IP address of the dynamic peer.


Important


If you select Bind VPN to the assigned IP, the VPN binds statically to the DHCP assigned IP address. However, this dynamic interface can receive many new IP addresses after the peer restarts. Although the VPN tunnel updates the new IP address, the other peer is not updated with the new configuration. You must deploy the site-to-site configuration again for out-of-band changes on the other peer.



Note


If the IP address of the interface is changed by using a local manager like firewall device manager, the Configuration Status of that peer in CDO shows "Conflict Detected". When you resolve this out-of-band change, the Configuration Status of the other peer changes to the "Not Synced" state. You must deploy the CDO configuration to the device which is in "Not Synced" state.


Typically, the dynamic peer must be the one that initiates the connection as the other peer would not know the IP address of the dynamic peer. When the remote peer attempts to establish the connection, the other peer validates the connection using the preshared key, IKE settings, and IPsec configurations.

Because the VPN connection is established only after the remote peer initiates the connection, any outbound traffic that matches access control rules that allow traffic in the VPN tunnel will be dropped until that connection is established. This ensures that data does not leave your network without the appropriate encryption and VPN protection.


Note


A site-to-site VPN connection cannot be configured in the following scenarios:


  • If both peers have DHCP assigned IP addresses.

    • Workaround: You can configure a site-to-site VPN, if one of the peers has a resolved IP address from the DHCP server. In such a case, you must select Bind VPN to the assigned IP to configure site-to-site VPN.

  • If a device has more than one dynamic peer connection.

    • Workaround: You can configure a site-to-site VPN by performing the following steps:

      • Consider three devices A, B, and C.

      • Configure site-to-site VPN connection between A (static peer) and B (dynamic peer).

      • Configure site-to-site VPN connection between A and C (dynamic peer) by creating an Extranet device. Assign the static VPN interface IP address of A to the Extranet device and establish a connection with C.

FDM-Managed Device Site-to-Site VPN Guidelines and Limitations
  • CDO does not support a crypto-acl to design the interesting traffic for S2S VPN. It only supports protected networks.

  • CDO does not currently support the management, monitoring, or use of Virtual Tunnel Interface (VTI) tunnels on ASA or FDM-managed devices. Devices with configured VTI tunnels can be onboarded to CDO but it ignores the VTI interfaces. If a security zone or static route references a VTI, CDO reads the security zone and static route without the VTI reference. CDO support for VTI tunnels is coming soon.

  • Whenever IKE ports 500/4500 are in use or when there are some PAT translations that are active, the site-to-site VPN cannot be configured on the same ports as it fails to start the service on those ports.

  • Transport mode is not supported only tunnel mode. IPsec tunnel mode encrypts the entire original IP datagram which becomes the payload in a new IP packet. Use tunnel mode when the firewall is protecting traffic to and from hosts positioned behind a firewall. Tunnel mode is the normal way regular IPsec is implemented between two firewalls (or other security gateways) that are connected over an untrusted network, such as the Internet.

  • For this release, only PTP topology is supported, containing one or more VPN tunnels. Point-to-point (PTP) deployments establish a VPN tunnel between two endpoints.

Encryption and Hash Algorithms Used in VPN

Because a VPN tunnel typically traverses a public network, most likely the Internet, you need to encrypt the connection to protect the traffic. You define the encryption and other security techniques to apply using IKE policies and IPsec proposals.

If your device license allows you to apply strong encryption, there is a wide range of encryption and hash algorithms, and Diffie-Hellman groups, from which to choose. However, as a general rule, the stronger the encryption that you apply to the tunnel, the worse the system performance. Find a balance between security and performance that provides sufficient protection without compromising efficiency.

We cannot provide specific guidance on which options to choose. If you operate within a larger corporation or other organization, there might already be defined standards that you need to meet. If not, take the time to research the options.

The following topics explain the available options:

Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use

When determining which encryption algorithms to use for the IKE policy or IPsec proposal, your choice is limited to algorithms supported by the devices in the VPN.

For IKEv2, you can configure multiple encryption algorithms. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer using that order. For IKEv1, you can select a single option only.

For IPsec proposals, the algorithm is used by the Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP), which provides authentication, encryption, and anti-replay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50. In IKEv1 IPsec proposals, the algorithm name is prefixed with ESP.

If your device license qualifies for strong encryption, you can choose from the following encryption algorithms. If you are not qualified for strong encryption, you can select DES only.

  • AES-GCM - (IKEv2 only.) Advanced Encryption Standard in Galois/Counter Mode is a block cipher mode of operation providing confidentiality and data-origin authentication and provides greater security than AES. AES-GCM offers three different key strengths: 128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys. A longer key provides higher security but a reduction in performance. GCM is a mode of AES that is required to support NSA Suite B. NSA Suite B is a set of cryptographic algorithms that devices must support to meet federal standards for cryptographic strength.

  • AES-GMAC - (IKEv2 IPsec proposals only.) Advanced Encryption Standard Galois Message Authentication Code is a block cipher mode of operation providing only data-origin authentication. It is a variant of AES-GCM that allows data authentication without encrypting the data. AES-GMAC offers three different key strengths: 128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys.

  • AES - Advanced Encryption Standard is a symmetric cipher algorithm that provides greater security than DES and is computationally more efficient than 3DES. AES offers three different key strengths: 128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys. A longer key provides higher security but a reduction in performance.

  • DES - Data Encryption Standard, which encrypts using 56-bit keys, is a symmetric secret-key block algorithm. If your license account does not meet the requirements for export controls, this is your only option. It is faster than 3DES and uses fewer system resources, but it is also less secure. If you do not need strong data confidentiality, and if system resources or speed is a concern, choose DES.

  • 3DES - Triple DES, which encrypts three times using 56-bit keys, is more secure than DES because it processes each block of data three times with a different key. However, it uses more system resources and is slower than DES.

  • NULL - A null encryption algorithm provides authentication without encryption. This is typically used for testing purposes only.

Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use

In IKE policies, the hash algorithm creates a message digest, which is used to ensure message integrity. In IKEv2, the hash algorithm is separated into two options, one for the integrity algorithm, and one for the pseudo-random function (PRF).

In IPsec proposals, the hash algorithm is used by the Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) for authentication. In IKEv2 IPsec Proposals, this is called the integrity hash. In IKEv1 IPsec proposals, the algorithm name is prefixed with ESP-, and there is also an -HMAC suffix (which stands for "hash method authentication code").

For IKEv2, you can configure multiple hash algorithms. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer using that order. For IKEv1, you can select a single option only.

You can choose from the following hash algorithms:

  • SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) - Standard SHA (SHA-1) produces a 160-bit digest. SHA is more resistant to brute-force attacks than MD5. However, it is also more resource-intensive than MD5. For implementations that require the highest level of security, use the SHA hash algorithm.

  • The following SHA-2 options, which are even more secure, are available for IKEv2 configurations. Choose one of these if you want to implement the NSA Suite B cryptography specification.

    • SHA-256 - Specifies the Secure Hash Algorithm SHA-2 with the 256-bit digest.

    • SHA-384 - Specifies the Secure Hash Algorithm SHA-2 with the 384-bit digest.

    • SHA-512 - Specifies the Secure Hash Algorithm SHA-2 with the 512-bit digest.

  • MD5 (Message Digest 5) - Produces a 128-bit digest. MD5 uses less processing time for overall faster performance than SHA, but it is considered to be weaker than SHA.

  • Null or None (NULL, ESP-NONE) - (IPsec Proposals only.) A null Hash Algorithm; this is typically used for testing purposes only. However, you should choose the null integrity algorithm if you select one of the AES-GCM/GMAC options as the encryption algorithm. Even if you choose a non-null option, the integrity hash is ignored for these encryption standards.

Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use

You can use the following Diffie-Hellman key derivation algorithms to generate IPsec security association (SA) keys. Each group has different size modules. A larger modulus provides higher security but requires more processing time. You must have a matching modulus group on both peers.

If you select AES encryption, to support the large key sizes required by AES, you should use Diffie-Hellman (DH) Group 5 or higher. IKEv1 policies do not support all of the groups listed below.

To implement the NSA Suite B cryptography specification, use IKEv2 and select one of the elliptic curves Diffie-Hellman (ECDH) options: 19, 20, or 21. Elliptic curve options and groups that use 2048-bit modulus are less exposed to attacks such as Logjam.

For IKEv2, you can configure multiple groups. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer using that order. For IKEv1, you can select a single option only.

  • 2 - Diffie-Hellman Group 2: 1024-bit modular exponential (MODP) group. This option is no longer considered good protection.

  • 5 - Diffie-Hellman Group 5: 1536-bit MODP group. Formerly considered good protection for 128-bit keys, this option is no longer considered good protection.

  • 14 - Diffie-Hellman Group 14: 2048-bit modular exponential (MODP) group. Considered good protection for 192-bit keys.

  • 19 - Diffie-Hellman Group 19: National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 256-bit elliptic curve modulo a prime (ECP) group.

  • 20 - Diffie-Hellman Group 20: NIST 384-bit ECP group.

  • 21 - Diffie-Hellman Group 21: NIST 521-bit ECP group.

  • 24 - Diffie-Hellman Group 24: 2048-bit MODP group with 256-bit prime order subgroup. This option is no longer recommended.

Deciding Which Authentication Method to Use

You can use the following methods to authenticate the peers in a site-to-site VPN connection.

Preshared Keys

Preshared keys are secret key strings configured on each peer in the connection. These keys are used by IKE during the authentication phase. For IKEv1, you must configure the same preshared key on each peer. For IKEv2, you can configure unique keys on each peer.

Preshared keys do not scale well compared to certificates. If you need to configure a large number of site-to-site VPN connections, use the certificate method instead of the preshared key method.

Create a Site-To-Site VPN

You can create a site-to-site VPN by following one of the two methods: simple configuration and advanced configuration. In a simple configuration, the default configuration is used for establishing the site-to-site VPN connection. You can modify the configuration in the Advanced mode.

Each site-to-site VPN topology can include extranet devices that you do not manage in CDO. An Extranet device can be any device (Cisco or third-party), which is not managed by CDO.

For this release, only PTP topology is supported, containing one tunnel per site-to-site connection. Point-to-point (PTP) deployments establish a VPN tunnel between two endpoints.

Create a Site-To-Site VPN using the Simple Configuration
Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation pane, choose VPN > Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button to create a VPN Tunnel.

Note

 

Alternatively, you can create the Site-to-Site VPN connection from the Inventory page.

  1. On the navigation bar, click Inventory.

  2. Select two FDM-managed devices that you want to configure. If you select an extranet device, specify the extranet device's IP address.

  3. In the right-page, under Device Actions, click Create Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 3

Enter a unique topology Configuration Name. We recommend naming your topology to indicate that it is an FDM-managed device VPN, and its topology type.

Step 4

Choose the endpoint devices for this VPN deployment from Devices.

Step 5

If you choose an extranet device in Peer 2, select Static, and specify an IP address or select Dynamic for extranet devices with DHCP assigned IP. The IP Address displays the IP address for static interface or DHCP Assigned for the dynamic interface.

Step 6

Choose the VPN Access Interface for the for the endpoint devices.

Note

 

If one or both endpoint devices have dynamic IP addresses, see Configure Site-to-Site VPN Connections with Dynamically-Addressed Peers for additional instructions.

Step 7

Click the blue plus button to add the Protected Networks for the participating devices.

Step 8

(Optional) Select NAT Exempt to exempt the VPN traffic from NAT policies on the local VPN access interface. It must be configured manually for individual peers. If you do not want NAT rules to apply to the local network, select the interface that hosts the local network. This option works only if the local network resides behind a single routed interface (not a bridge group member). If the local network is behind more than one routed interface or one or more bridge group members, you must manually create the NAT exempt rules. For information on manually creating the required rules, see Exempting Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT.

Step 9

Click Create VPN, and then click Finish.

Step 10

Perform the additional mandatory configuration. See Configure networking for protected traffic between the Site-To-Site Peers.

The Site-To-Site VPN is configured.


Create a Site-To-Site VPN using the Advanced Configuration
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN.

Step 2

Click the blue plus button to create a VPN Tunnel.

Step 3

In the Peer Devices section, specify the following device configurations:

  1. Enter a unique topology Configuration Name. We recommend naming your topology to indicate that it is an FDM-managed devicee VPN, and its topology type.

  2. Choose the endpoint devices for this VPN deployment from Devices.

  3. If you choose an extranet device, select Static and specify an IP address or select Dynamic for extranet devices with DHCP assigned IP. The IP Address displays the IP address for static interface or DHCP Assigned for the dynamic interface.

  4. Choose the VPN Access Interface for the endpoint devices.

Note

 

If one or both endpoint devices have dynamic IP addresses, see Configure Site-to-Site VPN Connections with Dynamically-Addressed Peers for additional instructions.

Step 4

Click the blue plus button to add the Protected Networks for the participating devices.

Step 5

Click Advanced.

Step 6

In the IKE Settings section, choose the IKE versions to use during Internet Key Exchange (IKE) negotiations and specify the privacy configurations: For more information on the IKE policies, see the About Global IKE Policies.

Note

 

IKE policies are global to a device and apply to all VPN tunnels associated with it. Therefore, adding or deleting policies affect all VPN tunnels in which this device is participating.

  1. Select either or both options as appropriate.

    Note

     

    By default, IKEV Version 2 is enabled and the IKEV2 POLICIES.

  2. Click the blue plus button and select the IKEv2 policies.

    Click Create New IKEv2 Policy to create new IKEv2 policies. Alternatively, in CDO click Objects > FDM Objects, then click > IKEv2 Policy. For more information about creating new IKEv2 policies, see the Configuring IKEv2 Policies. To delete an existing IKEv2 Policy, hover-over the selected policy and click the x icon.

  3. Click IKE Version 1 to enable it.

  4. Click the blue plus button and select the IKEv1 policies. Click Create New IKEv1 Policy to create new IKEv1 policies. Alternatively, you can go to the CDO navigation bar and click Objects > FDM Objects , then click > IKEv1 Policy. For more information about creating new IKEv1 policies, see the Configuring IKEv1 Policies. To delete an existing IKEv1 Policy, hover-over the selected policy and click the x icon.

  5. Enter the Pre-Shared Key for the participating devices. Preshared keys are secret key strings configured on each peer in the connection. These keys are used by IKE during the authentication phase.

    • (IKEv2) Peer 1 Pre-shared Key, Peer 2 Pre-shared Key: For IKEv2, you can configure unique keys on each peer. Enter the Pre-shared Key. You can click the Show Override button and enter the appropriate pre-shared for the peer. The key can be 1-127, alphanumeric characters. The following table describes the purpose of the pre-shared key for both peers.

      Local Pre-shared Key

      Remote Peer Pre-shared Key

      Peer 1 Peer 1 Pre-shared Key Peer 2 Pre-shared Key
      Peer 2 Peer 2 Pre-shared Key Peer 1 Pre-shared Key
    • (IKEv1) Pre-shared Key: For IKEv1, you must configure the same preshared key on each peer. The key can be 1-127, alphanumeric characters. In this scenario, Peer 1 and Peer 2 use the same pre-shared key to encrypt and decrypt data.

  6. Click Next.

Step 7

In the IPSec Settings section, specify the IPSec configurations. The corresponding IKEV proposals are available depending on the selection that is made in the IKE Settings step.

For more information on the IPSec settings, see the About IPsec Proposals.

  1. Click the blue plus button and select the IKEv2 proposals. To delete an existing IKEv2 Proposal, hover-over the selected proposal and click the x icon.

    Note

     

    Click Create New IKEv2 Proposal to create new IKEv2 proposals. Alternatively, you can go to the CDO navigation bar and click Objects > FDM Objects, then click > IKEv2 IPSec Proposal.

    For more information about creating new IKEv2 policies, see the Configuring IPSec Proposals for IKEv2.

  2. Choose the Diffie-Hellman Group for Perfect Forward Secrecy. For more information, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use.

  3. Click Create VPN.

  4. Read the configuration and then click Finish if you're satisfied.

  5. Perform the additional mandatory configuration. See Configure networking for protected traffic between the Site-To-Site Peers.


Configure Networking for Protected Traffic Between the Site-To-Site Peers

After completing the configuring of the Site-To-Site connection, make sure that you perform the following configuration for VPN to function on all targeted devices.

Procedure

Step 1

Configure AC policies:

Configure AC policies for permitting bidirectional traffic between the protected networks behind both peers. These policies help the packets to traverse to the intended destination without being dropped.

Note

 

You must create AC policies for incoming and outgoing traffic on both peers.

  1. In the CDO navigation bar at the left, click Policies and select the option that you want.

  2. Create policies for incoming and outgoing traffic on both peers. For more information on AC policy creation, see Configure the FDM Access Control Policy.

    The following example shows steps for creating AC policies on both peers.

    Consider two FDM-managed devices 'FTD_BGL_972' and 'FTD_BGL_973' with Site-To-Site VPN connection between two protected networks 'boulder-network' and 'sanjose-network' respectively.

    Creating the AC policy for permitting incoming traffic:

    The policy 'Permit_incoming_VPN_traffic_from_973' is created on the 'FTD_BGL_972' device for allowing incoming traffic from the peer ('FTD_BGL_973').

    • Source Zone: Set the zone of the peer device from which the network traffic originates. In this example, the traffic is originating from FTD_BGL_973 and reaching FTD_BGL_972.

    • Source Network: Set the protected network of the peer device from which the network traffic originates. In this example, traffic is originating from 'sanjose-network' which is the protected network behind the peer device (FTD_BGL_973).

    • Destination Network: Set the protected network of the device on which the network traffic arrives. In this example, traffic is arriving at 'boulder-network' which is the protected network behind the peer device (FTD_BGL_972). Note: The remaining fields can have the default value ("Any").

    • Set Action to Allow for allowing the traffic subject to the intrusion and other inspection settings in the policy.

    Creating the AC policy for permitting outgoing traffic:

    The policy 'Permit_outgoing_VPN_traffic_to_973' is created on the 'FTD_BGL_972' device for permitting outgoing traffic to the peer ('FTD_BGL_973').

    • Source Network: Set the protected network of the peer device from which the network traffic originates. In this example, traffic is originating from 'boulder-network' which is the protected network behind the peer device (FTD_BGL_972).

    • Destination Zone: Set the zone of the peer device on which the network traffic arrives. In this example, the traffic is arriving from FTD_BGL_972 and reaching FTD_BGL_973.

    • Destination Network: Set the protected network of the peer on which the network traffic arrives. In this example, traffic is arriving on 'sanjose-network' which is the protected network behind the peer device (FTD_BGL_972). Note: The remaining fields can have the default value ("Any").

    • Set Action to Allow for allowing the traffic subject to the intrusion and other inspection settings in the policy.

After creating AC policies on one device, you must create similar policies on its peer.

Step 2

If NAT is configured on either of the peer devices, you need to configure the NAT exempt rules manually. See Exempting Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT.

Step 3

Configure routing for receiving the return VPN traffic on each peer. For more information, see Configure Routing.

  1. Gateway-Select the network object that identifies the IP address for the gateway to the destination network. Traffic is sent to this address.

  2. Interface-Select the interface through which you want to send traffic. In this example, the traffic is sent through 'outside' interface.

  3. Destination Networks-Select one or network objects, that identify the destination network. In this example, the destination is 'sanjose-network' which is behind peer (FTD_BGL_973).

After configuring routing settings on one device, you must configure similar settings on its peer.


Edit an Existing CDO Site-To-Site VPN

The advanced configuration wizard is used by default to modify an existing site-to-site VPN configuration.

Procedure

Step 1

On the navigation bar, choose VPN > Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Select the desired site-to-site VPN tunnel that you want to edit.

Step 3

In the Actions pane, click Edit.

Note

 

Alternatively, you can perform the following to edit the configuration:

  1. Open the VPN page and click Global View button in the filter panel (for more information, see Global View).

    The illustration of all site-to-site VPN tunnels available across all devices appears.

    To edit the configuration, one of the peers must be FDM-managed device.

  2. Select a device by clicking the box.

  3. Click View details to view its peers.

  4. Click the peer device to view the tunnel details.

    You can view the tunnel details, NAT information, and key exchange information pertaining to the device.

  5. Click Edit in Tunnel Details.

Step 4

In the Peer Devices section, you can modify the following device configurations: Configuration Name, VPN Access Interface, and Protected Networks.

Note

 

You cannot change the participating devices.

Step 5

In the IKE Settings section, you can modify the following IKEv2 policies configurations:

  1. Click the blue plus button for the respective device and select new IKEv2 policies. To delete an existing IKEv2 Policy, hover-over the selected policy and click the x icon.

  2. Modify the Pre-Shared Key for the participating devices. If the pre-shared keys are different for endpoint devices, click the blue settings button and enter the appropriate pre-shared keys for the devices.

  3. Click Next.

Step 6

In the IPSec Settings section, you can modify the following IPSec configurations:

  1. Click the blue plus button to select new IKEv2 proposals. To delete an existing IKEv2 Proposal, hover-over the selected proposal and click the x icon.

  2. Choose the Diffie-Hellman Group for Perfect Forward Secrecy.

  3. Click Edit VPN, and then Finish.


The Point to point VPN is modified and updated with all the changes you have made.

Delete a CDO Site-To-Site VPN Tunnel
Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, choose VPN> Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Select the desired site-to-site VPN tunnel that you want to delete.

Step 3

In the Actions pane on the right, click Delete.


The selected site-to-site VPN tunnel is deleted.

Exempt Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT

When you have a site-to-site VPN connection defined on an interface, and you also have NAT rules for that interface, you can optionally exempt the traffic on the VPN from the NAT rules. You might want to do this if the remote end of the VPN connection can handle your internal addresses.

When you create the VPN connection, you can select the NAT Exempt option to create the rules automatically. However, this works only if your local protected network is connected through a single routed interface (not a bridge group member). If instead, the local networks in the connection reside behind two or more routed interfaces or one or more bridge group members, you need to configure the NAT exempt rules manually.

To exempt VPN traffic from NAT rules, you create an identity manual NAT rule for the local traffic when the destination is the remote network. Then, apply NAT to the traffic when the destination is anything else (for example, the Internet). If you have more than one interface for the local network, create rules for each interface. Also, consider the following suggestions:

  • If there is more than one local network in the connection, create a network object group to hold the objects that define the networks.

  • If you are including both IPv4 and IPv6 networks in the VPN, create separate identity NAT rules for each.

Consider the following example, which shows a site-to-site tunnel connecting the Boulder and San Jose offices. For traffic that you want to go to the Internet (for example from 10.1.1.6 in Boulder to www.example.com), you need a public IP address provided by NAT to access the Internet. The below example uses interface Port Address Translation (PAT) rules. However, for traffic that you want to go over the VPN tunnel (for example from 10.1.1.6 in Boulder to 10.2.2.78 in San Jose), you do not want to perform NAT; you need to exempt that traffic by creating an identity NAT rule. Identity NAT translates an address to the same address.

The following example explains the configuration for Firewall1 (Boulder). The example assumes that the inside interface is a bridge group, so you need to write the rules for each member interface. The process is the same if you have a single or multiple routed inside interfaces.


Note


This example assumes IPv4 only. If the VPN also includes IPv6 networks, create parallel rules for IPv6. Note that you cannot implement IPv6 interface PAT, so you need to create a host object with a unique IPv6 address to use for PAT.


Procedure

Step 1

Create objects to define the various networks.

  1. In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

  2. Click the blue plus button to create an object.

  3. Click FTD > Network.

  4. Identify the Boulder inside network.

  5. Enter an object name (for example, boulder-network).

  6. Select Create a network object.

  7. In the Value section:

    • Select eq and enter a single IP address or a subnet address expressed in CIDR notation.

    • Select range and enter an IP address range. For example, enter the network address as 10.1.1.0/24.

  8. Click Add.

  9. Click the blue plus button to create an object.

  10. Define the inside San Jose network.

  11. Enter the object name (for example, san-jose).

  12. Select Create a network object.

  13. In the Value section:

    • Select eq and enter a single IP address or a subnet address expressed in CIDR notation.

    • Select range and enter an IP address range. For example, enter the network address as 10.1.1.0/24.

  14. Click Add.

Step 2

Configure manual identity NAT for the Boulder network when going over the VPN to San Jose on Firewall1 (Boulder).

  1. In the left pane, click Inventory.

  2. Use the filter to find the device for which you want to create the NAT rule.

  3. In the Management area of the details panel, click NAT .

  4. Click > Twice NAT.

    • In section 1, select Static. Click Continue.

    • In section 2, select Source Interface = inside and Destination Interface = outside. Click Continue.

    • In section 3, select Source Original Address = 'boulder-network' and Source Translated Address = 'boulder-network'.

    • Select Use Destination.

    • Select Destination Original Address = 'sanjose-network' and Source Translated Address = 'sanjose-network'. Note: Because you do not want to translate the destination address, you need to configure identity NAT for it by specifying the same address for the original and translated destination addresses. Leave all of the port fields blank. This rule configures identity NAT for both source and destination.

    • Select Disable proxy ARP for incoming packets.

    • Click Save.

    • Repeat the process to create equivalent rules for each of the other inside interfaces.

Step 3

Configure manual dynamic interface PAT when going to the Internet for the inside Boulder network on Firewall1 (Boulder). Note: There might already be dynamic interface PAT rules for the inside interfaces, covering any IPv4 traffic, as these are created by default during initial configuration. However, the configuration is shown here for completeness. Before completing these steps, check whether a rule already exists that covers the inside interface and network, and skip this step if it does.

  1. Click > Twice NAT.

  2. In section 1, select Dynamic. Click Continue.

  3. In section 2, select Source Interface = inside and Destination Interface = outside. Click Continue.

  4. In section 3, select Source Original Address = 'boulder-network' and Source Translated Address = 'interface'.

  5. Click Save.

  6. Repeat the process to create equivalent rules for each of the other inside interfaces.

Step 4

Deploy configuration changes to CDO. For more information, see Deploy Configuration Changes from Cisco Defense Orchestrator to FTD.

Step 5

If you are also managing Firewall2 (San Jose), you can configure similar rules for that device.

  • The manual identity NAT rule would be for 'sanjose-network' when the destination is boulder-network. Create new interface objects for the Firewall2 inside and outside networks.

  • The manual dynamic interface PAT rule would be for 'sanjose-network' when the destination is "any."


About Global IKE Policies

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is a key management protocol that is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

The IKE negotiation comprises two phases. Phase 1 negotiates a security association between two IKE peers, which enables the peers to communicate securely in Phase 2. During Phase 2 negotiation, IKE establishes SAs for other applications, such as IPsec. Both phases use proposals when they negotiate a connection. An IKE proposal is a set of algorithms that two peers use to secure the negotiation between them. IKE negotiation begins by each peer agreeing on a common (shared) IKE policy. This policy states which security parameters are used to protect subsequent IKE negotiations.

IKE policy objects define the IKE proposals for these negotiations. The objects that you enable are the ones used when the peers negotiate a VPN connection: you cannot specify different IKE policies per connection. The relative priority of each object determines which of these policies are tried first, with the lower number being a higher priority. The connection is not established if the negotiation fails to find a policy that both peers can support.

To define the global IKE policy, you select which objects to enable for each IKE version. If the pre-defined objects do not satisfy your requirements, create new policies to enforce your security policy.

The following procedure explains how to configure the global policy through the Objects page. You can also enable, disable, and create policies when editing a VPN connection by clicking Edit for the IKE Policy settings.

The following topics explain how to configure IKE policies for each version:

Managing IKEv1 Policies
About IKEv1 Policy

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 1 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv1 policies when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

There are several pre-defined IKEv1 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

Create an IKEv1 Policy

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 1 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv1 policies when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

There are several pre-defined IKEv1 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create an IKEv1 policy while editing the IKE settings in a Site-to-Site VPN connection by clicking the Create New IKEv1 Policy link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FDM > IKEv1 Policy to create a new IKEv1 policy.

  • In the object page, select the IKEv1 policy you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name, up to 128 characters.

Step 4

Configure the IKEv1 properties.

  • Priority - The relative priority of the IKE policy, from 1 to 65,535. The priority determines the order of the IKE policy compared by the two negotiating peers when attempting to find a common security association (SA). If the remote IPsec peer does not support the parameters selected in your highest priority policy, it tries to use the parameters defined in the next lowest priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority.

  • Encryption - The encryption algorithm used to establish the Phase 1 security association (SA) for protecting Phase 2 negotiations. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

  • Diffie-Hellman Group - The Diffie-Hellman group to use for deriving a shared secret between the two IPsec peers without transmitting it to each other. A larger modulus provides higher security but requires more processing time. The two peers must have a matching modulus group. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use.

  • Lifetime - The lifetime of the security association (SA), in seconds, from 120 to 2147483647 or blank. When the lifetime is exceeded, the SA expires and must be renegotiated between the two peers. As a general rule, the shorter the lifetime (up to a point), the more secure your IKE negotiations will be. However, with longer lifetimes, future IPsec security associations can be set up more quickly than with shorter lifetimes. The default is 86400. To specify an unlimited lifetime, enter no value (leave the field blank).

  • Authentication - The method of authentication to use between the two peers. For more information, see Deciding Which Authentication Method to Use.

    • Preshared Key - Use the preshared key that is defined on each device. These keys allow for a secret key to be shared between two peers and to be used by IKE during the authentication phase. If the peer is not configured with the same preshared key, the IKE SA cannot be established.

    • Certificate - Use the device identity certificates for the peers to identify each other. You must obtain these certificates by enrolling each peer in a Certificate Authority. You must also upload the trusted CA root and intermediate CA certificates used to sign the identity certificates in each peer. The peers can be enrolled in the same or a different CA. You cannot use self-signed certificates for either peer.

  • Hash - The hash algorithm for creating a message digest, which is used to ensure message integrity. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use.

Step 5

Click Add.


Managing IKEv2 Policies
About IKEv2 Policy

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 2 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv2 policies when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

There are several pre-defined IKEv2 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

Create an IKEv2 Policy

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 2 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv2 policies when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).

There are several pre-defined IKEv2 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create an IKEv2 policy while editing the IKE settings in a Site-to-Site VPN connection by clicking the Create New IKEv2 Policy link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FDM > IKEv2 Policy to create a new IKEv2 policy.

  • In the object page, select the IKEv2 policy you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name, up to 128 characters.

Step 4

Configure the IKEv2 properties.

  • Priority - The relative priority of the IKE policy, from 1 to 65,535. The priority determines the order of the IKE policy compared by the two negotiating peers when attempting to find a common security association (SA). If the remote IPsec peer does not support the parameters selected in your highest priority policy, it tries to use the parameters defined in the next lowest priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority.

  • State - Whether the IKE policy is enabled or disabled. Click the toggle to change the state. Only enabled policies are used during IKE negotiations.

  • Encryption - The encryption algorithm used to establish the Phase 1 security association (SA) for protecting Phase 2 negotiations. Select all algorithms that you want to allow, although you cannot include both mixed-mode (AES-GCM) and normal mode options in the same policy. (Normal mode requires that you select an integrity hash, whereas mixed-mode prohibits a separate integrity hash selection.) The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

  • Diffie-Hellman Group - The Diffie-Hellman group to use for deriving a shared secret between the two IPsec peers without transmitting it to each other. A larger modulus provides higher security but requires more processing time. The two peers must have a matching modulus group. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest group until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use.

  • Integrity Hash - The integrity portion of the hash algorithm for creating a message digest, which is used to ensure message integrity. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. The integrity hash is not used with the AES-GCM encryption options. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use.

  • Pseudo-Random Function (PRF) Hash - The pseudo-random function (PRF) portion of the hash algorithm, which is used as the algorithm to derive keying material and hashing operations required for the IKEv2 tunnel encryption. In IKEv1, the Integrity and PRF algorithms are not separated, but in IKEv2, you can specify different algorithms for these elements. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use.

  • Lifetime - The lifetime of the security association (SA), in seconds, from 120 to 2147483647 or blank. When the lifetime is exceeded, the SA expires and must be renegotiated between the two peers. As a general rule, the shorter the lifetime (up to a point), the more secure your IKE negotiations will be. However, with longer lifetimes, future IPsec security associations can be set up more quickly than with shorter lifetimes. The default is 86400. To specify an unlimited lifetime, enter no value (leave the field blank).

Step 5

Click Add.


About IPsec Proposals

IPsec is one of the most secure methods for setting up a VPN. IPsec provides data encryption at the IP packet level, offering a robust security solution that is standards-based. With IPsec, data is transmitted over a public network through tunnels. A tunnel is a secure, logical communication path between two peers. Traffic that enters an IPsec tunnel is secured by a combination of security protocols and algorithms called a transform set. During the IPsec security association (SA) negotiation, peers search for a transform set that is the same at both peers.

There are separate IPsec proposal objects based on the IKE version, IKEv1, or IKEv2:

  • When you create an IKEv1 IPsec proposal, you select the mode in which IPsec operates, and define the required encryption and authentication types. You can select single options for the algorithms. If you want to support multiple combinations in a VPN, create and select multiple IKEv1 IPsec Proposal objects.

  • When you create an IKEv2 IPsec proposal, you can select all of the encryption and hash algorithms allowed in a VPN. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer until a match is found. This allows you to potentially send a single proposal to convey all the allowed combinations instead of the need to send each allowed combination individually as with IKEv1.

The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) is used for both IKEv1 and IKEv2 IPsec proposals. It provides authentication, encryption, and antireplay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50.


Note


We recommend using both encryption and authentication on IPsec tunnels.


The following topics explain how to configure IPsec proposals for each IKE version:

Managing an IKEv1 IPsec Proposal Object

IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel. There are separate objects for IKEv1 and IKEv2. Currently, CDO supports IKEv1 IPsec proposal objects.

The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) is used for both IKEv1 and IKEv2 IPsec proposals. It provides authentication, encryption, and anti-replay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50.


Note


We recommend using both encryption and authentication on IPsec tunnels.


Create an IKEv1 IPsec Proposal Object

IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel. There are separate objects for IKEv1 and IKEv2. Currently,CDO supports IKEv1 IPsec proposal objects.

The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) is used for both IKEv1 and IKEv2 IPsec proposals. It provides authentication, encryption, and anti-replay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50.


Note


We recommend using both encryption and authentication on IPsec tunnels.


There are several pre-defined IKEv1 IPsec proposals. You can also create new proposals to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create IKEv1 IPsec Proposals objects while editing the IKEv1 IPsec settings in a Site-to-Site VPN connection by clicking the Create New IKEv1 Proposal link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FDM > IKEv1 IPsec Proposal to create the new object.

  • In the object page, select the IPsec proposal you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name for the new object.

Step 4

Select the Mode in which the IKEv1 IPsec Proposal object operates.

  • Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet. The IPSec header is added between the original IP header and a new IP header. This is the default. Use tunnel mode when the firewall is protecting traffic to and from hosts positioned behind the firewall. Tunnel mode is the normal way regular IPSec is implemented between two firewalls (or other security gateways) that are connected over an untrusted network, such as the Internet.

  • Transport mode encapsulates only the upper-layer protocols of an IP packet. The IPSec header is inserted between the IP header and the upper-layer protocol header (such as TCP). Transport mode requires that both the source and destination hosts support IPSec, and can only be used when the destination peer of the tunnel is the final destination of the IP packet. Transport mode is generally used only when protecting a Layer 2 or Layer 3 tunneling protocol such as GRE, L2TP, and DLSW.

Step 5

Select the ESP Encryption (Encapsulating Security Protocol encryption) algorithm for this proposal. For more information, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

Step 6

Select the ESP Hash or integrity algorithm to use for authentication. For more information, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use.

Step 7

Click Add.


Managing an IKEv2 IPsec Proposal Object

IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel.

When you create an IKEv2 IPsec proposal, you can select all of the encryption and hash algorithms allowed in a VPN. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer until a match is found. This allows you to potentially send a single proposal to convey all the allowed combinations instead of the need to send each allowed combination individually as with IKEv1.

Create or Edit an IKEv2 IPsec Proposal Object

There are several pre-defined IKEv2 IPsec proposals. You can also create new proposals to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.

The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You can also create IKEv2 IPsec Proposals objects while editing the IKEv2 IPsec settings in a VPN connection by clicking the Create New IPsec Proposal link shown in the object list.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Objects > FDM Objects.

Step 2

Do one of these things:

  • Click the blue plus button and select FDM > IKEv2 IPsec Proposal to create the new object.

  • In the object page, select the IPsec proposal you want to edit and click Edit in the Actions pane at the right.

Step 3

Enter an object name for the new object.

Step 4

Configure the IKE2 IPsec proposal objects:

  • Encryption - The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) encryption algorithm for this proposal. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use.

  • Integrity Hash - The hash or integrity algorithm to use for authentication. Select all the algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use.

Step 5

Click Add.


Monitor FDM-Managed Device Site-to-Site Virtual Private Networks

CDO allows you to monitor, modify, and delete existing or newly created site-to-site VPN configurations on onboarded FDM-managed devices.

Check Site-to-Site VPN Tunnel Connectivity

Use the Check Connectivity button to trigger a real-time connectivity check against the tunnel to identify whether the tunnel is currently active or idle. Unless you click the on-demand connectivity check button, a check across all tunnels, available across all onboarded devices, occurs once an hour.


Note


  • CDO runs this connectivity check command on the FTD to determine if a tunnel is active or idle:
    show vpn-sessiondb l2l sort ipaddress
  • Model ASA device(s) tunnels will always show as Idle.


To check tunnel connectivity from the VPN page:

Procedure

Step 1

From the main navigation bar, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Search and filter the list of tunnels for your site-to-site VPN tunnel and select it.

Step 3

In the Actions pane at the right, click Check Connectivity.


Site-To-Site VPN Dashboard

CDO provides a consolidated information about site-to-site VPN connections created in the tenant.

In the left pane, click Dashboard. The Site-to-Site VPN provides the information in the following widgets:

  • Sessions & Insights: Displays a bar graph representing Active VPN Tunnels and Idle VPN Tunnels, each in appropriate colors.

  • Issues: Shows the total number of tunnels detected with issues.

  • Pending Deploy: Shows the total number of tunnels with pending deployment.

By clicking on a value in the pie chart or any link in the widget, the site-to-site VPN listing page is displayed with a filter based on the selected value. For instance, in the VPN Tunnel Status widget, on clicking the Active VPN Tunnels, you will be directed to the site-to-site VPN listing page with the Active status filter applied, showing only the active tunnels.

Identify VPN Issues

CDO can identify VPN issues on FTD. (This feature is not yet available for AWS VPC site-to-site VPN tunnels.) This article describes:

Find VPN Tunnels with Missing Peers

The "Missing IP Peer" condition is more likely to occur on ASA devices than FDM-managed devices.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN to open the VPN page.

Step 2

Select Table View.

Step 3

Open the Filter panel by clicking the filter icon .

Step 4

Check Detected Issues.

Step 5

Select each device reporting an issue and look in the Peers pane at the right. One peer name will be listed. CDO reports the other peer name as, "[Missing peer IP.]"


Find VPN Peers with Encryption Key Issues

Use this approach to locate VPN Peers with encryption key issues such as:

  • IKEv1 or IKEv2 keys are invalid, missing, or mismatched

  • Obsolete or low encryption tunnels

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN to open the VPN page.

Step 2

Select Table View.

Step 3

Open the Filter panel by clicking the filter icon .

Step 4

Select each device reporting an issue and look in the Peers pane at the right. The peer information will show you both peers.

Step 5

Click on View Peers for one of the devices.

Step 6

Double-click the device reporting the issue in the Diagram View.

Step 7

Click Key Exchange in the Tunnel Details panel at the bottom. You will be able to view both devices and diagnose the key issue from that point.


Find Incomplete or Misconfigured Access Lists Defined for a Tunnel

The "incomplete or misconfigured access-list" condition could only occur on ASA devices.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN to open the VPN page.

Step 2

Select Table View.

Step 3

Open the Filter panel by clicking the filter icon .

Step 4

Select each device reporting an issue and look in the Peers pane at the right. The peer information shows you both peers.

Step 5

Click on View Peers for one of the devices.

Step 6

Double-click the device reporting the issue in the Diagram View.

Step 7

Click Tunnel Details in the Tunnel Details panel at the bottom. You will see the message, "Network Policy: Incomplete"


Find Issues in Tunnel Configuration

The tunnel configuration error can occur in the following scenarios:

  • When the IP address of a site-to-site VPN interface changes, the "Peer IP Address Value has changed".

  • When the IKE value of a VPN tunnel doesn't match the other VPN tunnel, the "IKE value Mismatch" message appears.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN to open the VPN page.

Step 2

Select Table View.

Step 3

Open the Filter panel by clicking the filter icon .

Step 4

In the Tunnel Issues, click Detected Issues to view the VPN configuration reporting errors. You can view the configuration reporting issues .

Step 5

Select the VPN configuration reporting issues.

Step 6

In the Peers pane on the right, the icon appears for the peer having the issue. Hover over the icon to see the issue and resolution.

Next Step: Resolve Tunnel Configuration Issues.


Resolve Tunnel Configuration Issues

This procedure attempts to resolve these tunnel configuration issues:

  • When the IP address of a site-to-site VPN interface changes, the "Peer IP Address Value has changed".

  • When the IKE value of a VPN tunnel doesn’t match the other VPN tunnel, the "IKE value Mismatch" message appears.

See Find Issues in Tunnel Configuration for more information.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab and select the device associated with the VPN configuration reporting an issue.

Step 4

Accept the device changes.

Step 5

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN to open the VPN page.

Step 6

Select the VPN configuration reporting this issue.

Step 7

In the Actions pane, click the Edit icon.

Step 8

Click Next in each step until you click the Finish button in step 4.

Step 9

Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices.


Search and Filter Site-to-Site VPN Tunnels

Use the filter sidebar in combination with the search field to focus your search of VPN tunnels presented in the VPN tunnel diagram.

Procedure

Step 1

From the main navigation bar, navigate VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Click the filter icon to open the filter pane.

Step 3

Use these filters to refine your search:

  • Filter by Device-Click Filter by Device, select the device type tab, and check the devices you want to find by filtering.

  • Tunnel Issues-Whether or not we have detected either side of the tunnel has issues. Some examples of a device having issues may be but not limited to is: missing associated interface or peer IP address or access list, IKEv1 proposal mismatches, etc. (Detecting tunnel issues is not yet available for AWS VPC VPN tunnels.)

  • Devices/Services-Filter by type of device.

  • Status–Tunnel status can be active or idle.

    • Active-There is an open session where network packets are traversing the VPN tunnel or a successful session was established and hasn’t been timed-out yet. Active can assist to indicate that tunnel is active and relevant.

    • Idle - CDO is unable to discover an open session for this tunnel. The tunnel may either be not in use or there is an issue with this tunnel.

  • Onboarded - Devices could be managed by CDO or not managed (unmanaged) by CDO.

    • Managed – Filter by devices that CDO manages.

    • Unmanaged – Filter by devices that CDO does not manage.

  • Device Types - Whether or not either side of the tunnel is a live (connected device) or model device.

Step 4

You can also search the filtered results by device name or IP address by entering that information in the search bar. The search is case-insensitive.


Onboard an Unmanaged Site-to-Site VPN Peer

CDO will discover a site-to-site VPN tunnel when one of the peers is onboarded. If the second peer is not managed by CDO, you can filter the list of VPN tunnels to find the unmanaged device and onboard it:

Procedure

Step 1

In the main navigation bar, select VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN to open the VPN page.

Step 2

Select Table View.

Step 3

Open the filter panel by clicking .

Step 4

Check Unmanaged.

Step 5

Select a tunnel from the table from the results.

Step 6

In the Peers pane on the right, click Onboard Device and follow the instructions on the screen.


View IKE Object Details of Site-To-Site VPN Tunnels

You can view the details of the IKE objects configured on the peers/devices of the selected tunnel. These details appear in a tree structure in a hierarchy based on the priority of the IKE policy object.


Note


Extranet devices don't show the IKE Objects details.


Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

In the VPN Tunnels page, click the name of the VPN tunnel that connects the peers.

Step 3

Under Relationships on the right, expand the object that you want to see its details.


View Site-to-Site VPN Tunnel Information

The site-to-site VPN table view is a complete listing of all site-to-site VPN tunnels available across all devices onboarded to CDO. A tunnel only exists once in this list. Clicking on a tunnel listed in the table provides an option in the right side bar to navigate directly to a tunnel's peers for further investigation.

In cases where CDO does not manage both sides of a tunnel, you can click Onboard Device to open the main onboarding page an onboard the unmanaged peer. In cases where CDO manages both side of a tunnel, the Peer 2 column contains the name of the managed device. However, in the case of an AWS VPC, the Peer 2 column contains the IP address of the VPN gateway.

To view site-to-site VPN connections in the table view:

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Click the Table view button.

Step 3

Use Search and Filter Site-to-Site VPN Tunnels to find a specific tunnel, or zoom into the Global View graphic to find the VPN gateway and its peers that you are looking for.


Site-to-Site VPN Global View

This is an example fo the global view. In the illustration, 'FTD_BGL_972' has a site-to-site connection with FTD_BGL_973 and FTD_BGL_974 devices.

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, click VPN > ASA/FDM Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Click the Global view button.

Step 3

Use Search and Filter Site-to-Site VPN Tunnels to find a specific tunnel, or zoom into the Global View graphic to find the VPN gateway and its peers that you are looking for.

Step 4

Select one of the peers represented in the Global View.

Step 5

Click View Details.

Step 6

Click the other end of the VPN tunnel and CDO displays Tunnel Details, NAT Information, and Key Exchange information for that connection:

  • Tunnel Details-Displays the name and connectivity information about the tunnel. Clicking the Refresh icon updates the connectivity information for the tunnels.

  • Tunnel Details specific to AWS connections-Tunnel details for AWS site-to-site connections are slightly different than for other connections. For each connection from the AWS VPC to your VPN gateway, AWS creates two VPN tunnels. This is for high availability.

    • The name of the tunnel represents the name of the VPC your VPN gateway is connected to. The IP address named in the tunnel is the IP address that your VPN gateway knows as the VPC.

    • If the CDO Connectivity status shows active, the AWS tunnel state is Up. If the CDO Connectivity state is inactive, the AWS tunnel state is Down.

  • NAT Information-Displays the type of NAT rule being used, original and translated packet information, and provides links to the NAT table to view the NAT rule for that tunnel. (Not yet available for AWS VPC site-to-site VPN.)

  • Key Exchange-Displays the cryptographic keys in use by the tunnel and key-exchange issues. (Not yet available for AWS VPC site-to-site VPN.)


Site-to-Site VPN Tunnels Pane

The Tunnels pane displays a list of all the tunnels associated with a particular VPN gateway. For site-to-site VPN connections between your VPN gateway and an AWS VPC, the tunnels pane shows all the tunnels from your VPN gateway to the VPC. Since each site-to-site VPN connection between your VPN gateway and an AWS VPC has two tunnels, you will see double the number of tunnels you normally would for other devices.

VPN Gateway Details

Displays the number of peers connected to the VPN gateway and the IP address of the VPN gateway. This is only visible in the VPN Tunnels page.

View Peer

After you select a site-to-site VPN peer pair, the peers pane lists the two devices in the pair and allows you to click View Peer for one of the devices. By clicking View Peer, you see any other site-to-site peer that device is associated with. This is visible in the Table view and in the Global view.

Delete a CDO Site-To-Site VPN Tunnel

Procedure

Step 1

In the left pane, choose VPN> Site-to-Site VPN.

Step 2

Select the desired site-to-site VPN tunnel that you want to delete.

Step 3

In the Actions pane on the right, click Delete.


The selected site-to-site VPN tunnel is deleted.

Templates

Templates provide the means to develop a preferred and general use version of device configuration files:

  • Templates are created from an existing base configuration file.

  • They support value parameters for easy customization of expected values, including IP addresses and port numbers.

  • They are exportable, with parameter substitution, for use across multiple devices.

FDM-Managed Device Templates

About FDM-Managed Device Templates

CDO allows you to create a FDM-managed device template of an onboarded FDM-managed device's configuration. When you are creating the template, select the parts (objects, policies, settings, interfaces, and NAT) that you want to include in your FDM-managed device template. You can then modify that template and use it to configure other FDM-managed devices you manage. FDM-managed device templates are a way to promote policy consistency between your FDM-managed devices.

When creating the FDM-managed device template, you can opt to either create a complete or custom template:

  • A complete template includes all parts of the FDM-managed device configuration and applies everything on other FDM-managed devices.

  • A custom template includes only one or more parts of the FDM-managed device configuration that you select and applies only that part and its associated entities on other FDM-managed devices.


Important


The FDM-managed device template will not include certificate, Radius, AD, and RA VPN Objects.


How You Could Use FDM-Managed Device Templates

Here are some ways that you could use FDM-managed device templates:

  • Configure one FDM-managed device by applying another FDM-managed device's configuration template to it. The template you apply may represent a "best practice" configuration that you want to use on all your FDM-managed devices.

  • Use the template as a method to make the device configuration changes and simulate them in a lab environment to test its functionality before applying those changes to a live FDM-managed device.

  • Parameterize the attributes of the interfaces and sub-interfaces when creating a template. You can change the parameterized values of interfaces and subinterfaces at the time of applying the template.

What You Will See in the Change Log

When you apply a template to a device, you overwrite the entire configuration of that device. The CDO change log records every change that gets made as a result. So, change log entries will be very long after applying a template to a device.

Configure an FDM Template

Prerequisites

Before you create a FDM-managed device template, onboard to CDO the FDM-managed device from which you will create the template. You can only create an FDM-managed device template from an onboarded FDM-managed device.

We strongly recommend using templates to configure brand new FDM-managed devices being added to your environment.


Note


When you create a template from an FDM-managed device, the RA VPN objects are not included in the template.


Create an FDM Template

When creating a template, if you select all parts, the template will include every aspect of that device's configuration; it's management IP address, interface configurations, policy information, and so on.

If you select some of the parts, the custom template includes the following entities.

Template Parts

Parts included in Custom Template

Access Rules

Includes access control rules and any related entities for those rules. For example, objects and interfaces (with sub-interfaces).

NAT Rules

Includes NAT rules and any related entities required for those NAT rules. For example, objects and interfaces (with sub-interfaces).

Settings

Includes system settings and any related entities required for those settings. For example, objects and interfaces (with sub-interfaces).

Interfaces

Includes interfaces and sub-interfaces.

Objects

Includes objects and any related entities required for those objects. For example, interfaces and sub-interfaces.

Use this procedure to create an FDM-managed device template:

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the device that you want from the list.

Step 4

Use the filter or search field to find the FDM-managed device from which you want to create the template.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane on the right, click Create Template. The Name Template provides the count of each part on the device. It also shows the count of sub-interfaces, if any.

Step 6

Select the parts that you want to include in the template.

Step 7

Enter a name for your template.

Step 8

Click Create Template.

Step 9

In the Parameterize Template area, you can perform the following:

  • To parameterize an interface, hover (until you see curly braces) and click a cell corresponding to that interface.

  • To parameterize a sub-interface, expand the interface that has a sub-interface, and hover (until you see curly braces) and click a cell corresponding to that sub-interface.

You can parameterize the following attributes to enable per-device customization.

  • Logical Name

  • State

  • IP Address/Netmask

Note

 

These attributes only support one value per parameter.

Step 10

Click Continue.

Step 11

Review the template and any parameterizations. Click Done to create the template.

The Inventory page now displays the FDM-managed device template you just created.

Note

 

After creating a template, in the Inventory pane, CDO displays the corresponding template part icons to show the parts included in that template. This information also appears in the Device Details pane when you click the device or when you hover over the mouse pointer on the icon.

The following picture shows an example of a part icon to show that the template includes "access rules", "NAT rules", and "objects".


Edit an FDM-Managed Device Template

Edit the template parameters with the following procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Templates tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Use the Model/Template filter to find the template you want to modify.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane on the right, click Edit Parameters.

Step 6

(Optional) make any changes to the parameters by directly editing the text box.

Step 7

Click Save.

You can edit the rest of the FDM-managed device template just as you would the configuration of a live FDM-managed device. You can edit your FDM-managed device template with the following configurations:


Delete an FDM Template

You delete an FDM-managed device template just as you would remove an FDM-managed device from CDO:

Procedure

Step 1

In the CDO navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Templates tab.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Use the filter and search fields to find the FDM-managed device template you want to delete.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane, click Remove .

Step 6

Read the warning message and click OK to delete the template.


Apply an FDM Template

Before applying a template, you can identify its contents by navigating to the Inventory page and filter for Model/Template. CDO displays the corresponding template part icons to show the parts included in that template. This information also appears in the Device Details pane when you click the device or when you hover over the mouse pointer on the icon.

You can parameterize the following attributes to enable per-device customization, which means you can apply device-specific values at the time of applying the template:

When applying the FDM-managed device template, you can change the parameterized values of interfaces and subinterfaces configured when creating the template.

Apply a Complete Template

Applying a complete FDM-managed device template to create a new FDM-managed device overwrites entirely any existing configuration on the FDM-managed device, including any staged changes that have not yet been deployed from CDO to the device. Anything on the device that was not included in the template will be lost.

Apply a Custom Template

Applying a custom FDM-managed device template to other FDM-managed devices will retain or remove the existing configuration based on the template part. The following table provides the changes that occur after applying the custom template on other FDM-managed devices.

Template Parts

After Applying Custom Template

Access Rules

  • New access control rules present in the custom template overwrites any existing access control rules on the device.

  • New objects and interfaces (with sub-interfaces), if any, in the custom template are applied to the device without deleting any existing objects and interfaces.

NAT Rules

  • New NAT rules present in the custom template overwrites any existing NAT rules on the device.

  • New objects and interfaces (with sub-interfaces), if any, in the custom template are applied to the device without deleting any existing objects and interfaces.

Settings

  • New system settings from the custom template are applied to the device without deleting any existing system settings.

  • New objects and interfaces (with sub-interfaces), if any, in the custom template are applied to the device without deleting any existing objects and interfaces.

Interfaces

  • New interfaces and sub-interfaces from the custom template are applied to the device without deleting any existing interfaces and sub-interfaces.

  • CDO does not allow applying a template to a device where more interfaces are defined in the template than there are interfaces on the device.

Objects

  • New objects from the custom template are applied to the device without deleting any existing objects.

  • New interfaces and sub-interfaces, if any, in the custom template are applied to the device without deleting any existing interfaces and sub-interfaces.

Prerequisites

The following conditions must be met prior to applying a template:

  • When using a template, be sure that any changes you have made to the template have been committed and that the template is in the "Synced" state on the Inventory page.

  • When using an FDM-managed device as a template, be sure that any changes on CDO you intended to deploy to the device have been deployed and that there are no changes from the firewall device manager console that have not been deployed. The device must show a Synced state on the Inventory page.

Applying the template to a device is a three-step process.

  1. Apply the template to the device

  2. Review device and network settings

  3. Deploy the changes to the device

Apply Template to an FDM-Managed Device


Important


Before you deploy the changes to the device, continue to the next procedure:


Review Device and Networking Settings.

You can use change request tracking to apply a tracking label to your changes before you apply the template. Use the following procedure to apply an FDM-managed device template:

Procedure

Step 1

(Optional) Before you begin, make a template of your FDM-managed device before you apply another template to it. This gives you a configuration backup you can reference when you need to reapply device and networking settings.

Step 2

In the CDO navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 3

Click the Templates tab.

Step 4

Click the FTD tab.

Step 5

Use the filter and search field to find the FDM-managed device or template to which you are going to apply the template.

Note

 

If you change the name of the template at this point, you are applying a full device configuration or template to DeviceName. Deploying this change to DeviceName will overwrite the entire configuration running on that device.

Step 6

In the device Actions pane on the right, click Apply Template.

Step 7

Click Select Template and select the desired template and click Continue.

Step 8

You can configure the following and click Continue appearing on each screen.

  1. Map Interfaces: Confirm or change the mapping of interfaces between the template and the device. Note that you cannot have more than one template interface mapped to a single device interface; if the interface configuration is not supported, you cannot continue and apply the template.

    Note

     

    CDO does not allow applying a template to a device where more interfaces are defined in the template than there are interfaces on the device.

  2. Fill Parameters: Customize the interface or sub-interface parameter values for the device that you are applying the template to.

  3. Review: Review the template configuration and click Apply Template when you are ready to overwrite the existing device configuration with the configuration in the template.

Step 9

Click Review and deploy now the changes you made, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Review Device and Networking Settings

When creating an FDM-managed device template, CDO copies the entire device configuration into the template. So, things like the management IP address of the original device are contained in the template. Review these device and network settings before you apply the template to a device:

Procedure

Step 1

Review these FDM-managed device settings to ensure that they reflect the correct information for the new FDM-managed device:

Step 2

Review the Firepower access control policy to ensure that rules reference the new FDM-managed device's IP addresses where appropriate.

Step 3

Review inside_zone and outside_zone security objects to ensure they reference the correct IP address for the new FDM-managed device.

Step 4

Review NAT policies to ensure they reference the correct IP addresses for the new FDM-managed device.

Step 5

Review Interface configurations to ensure that they reflect the correct configuration for the new FDM-managed device.


Migrating an ASA Configuration to an FDM-Managed Device Template


Attention


Secure Firewall device manager (FDM) support and functionality is only available upon request. If you do not already have Firewall device manager support enabled on your tenant you cannot manage or deploy to FDM-managed devices. Send a request to the support team to enable this platform.


CDO helps you migrate your ASA to an FDM-managed device. CDO provides a wizard to help you migrate these elements of the ASA's running configuration to an FDM-managed device template:

  • Access Control Rules (ACLs)

  • Interfaces

  • Network Address Translation (NAT) rules

  • Network objects and network group objects

  • Routes

  • Service objects and service group objects

  • Site-to-site VPN

Once these elements of the ASA running configuration have been migrated to an FDM-managed device template, you can then apply the FDM template to a new FDM-managed device that is managed by CDO. The FDM-managed device adopts the configurations defined in the template, and so, the FDM-managed device is now configured with some aspects of the ASA's running configuration.

Other elements of the ASA running configuration are not migrated using this process. Those other elements are represented in the FDM-managed device template by empty values. When the template is applied to an FDM-managed device, we apply values we migrated to the new FDM-managed device and ignore the empty values. Whatever other default values the new FDM-managed device has, it retains. Those other elements of the ASA running configuration that we did not migrate, will need to be recreated on the FDM-managed device outside the migration process.

See Migrating an ASA to an FDM-Managed Device Using Cisco Defense Orchestrator for a full explanation of the process of migrating an ASA to an FDM-managed device using CDO.

FDM-Managed High Availability

About High Availability

A high availability (HA), or failover configuration, joins two devices into a primary/secondary setup so that if the primary device fails, the secondary automatically takes over. Configuring high availability, also called failover, requires two identical FDM-managed devices connected to each other through a dedicated failover link and, optionally, a state link. The health of the active unit (hardware, interfaces, software, and environmental status) is monitored to determine if specific failover conditions are met. If those conditions are met, failover occurs. This helps keep your network operation in case of a device failure or during a maintenance period when the devices are upgrading. See the related articles below for more information.

The units form an active/standby pair, where the primary unit is the active unit and passes traffic. The secondary (standby) unit does not actively pass traffic, but synchronizes configuration and other state information from the active unit. The two units communicate over the failover link to determine the operating status of each unit.


Note


When you opt to accept changes from or deploy to an FDM-managed HA pair, you are communicating with the active device of the HA pair. This means that configurations and backups are pulled from the active device only.


Certificate and High Availability Pairs

When you apply a certificate to an FDM-managed HA pair, CDO only applies the certificate to the active device; only upon deploying the active device is the configuration, and the certificate, synchronized with the standby device. If you apply a new certificate to the active device through FDM-managed, the active device and standby device may have two different certificates. This may cause issues in failover or failover history, among other possible issues. The two devices must have the same certificate to function successfully. If you must change the certificate through FDM-managed, then you must deploy changes and synchronize the certificate within the HA pair.

FDM-Managed High Availability Pair Requirements

High Availability Requirements

There are several requirements you must establish before you create a high availability (HA) pair.

Physical and Virtual Device Requirements for HA

The following hardware requirements must be met:

  • The devices must be the same hardware model.

  • The devices must have the same modules installed. For example, if one has an optional network module, then you must install the same network module in the other device.

  • The devices must have the same type and number of interfaces.

  • To create an HA pair in CDO, both devices must have management interfaces configured. If the devices have data interfaces configured, you must create the HA pair through the FDM-managed UI, and then onboard the pair to CDO.


    Note


    You cannot use an FDM-managed template in an HA pair.


Software Requirements for HA

The following software requirements must be met for both physical and virtual FDM-managed devices:

  • You have two standalone FDM-managed devices onboarded in the CDO.

  • The devices must run the exact same software version, which means the same major (first), minor (second), and maintenance (third) numbers. You can find the version inside the Device Details window on the Inventory page, or you can use the show version command in the CLI.


    Note


    Devices with different versions are allowed to join, but the configuration is not imported into the standby unit and failover is not functional until you upgrade the units to the same software version.


  • Both devices must be in local manager mode, that is, configured using FDM. If you can log into FDM on both devices, they are in local manager mode. You can also use the show managers command in the CLI to verify.

  • You must complete the initial setup wizard for each device before onboarding to CDO.

  • Each device must have its own management IP address. The configuration for the management interface is not synchronized between the devices.

  • The devices must have the same NTP configuration.

  • You cannot configure any interface to obtain its address using DHCP. That is, all interfaces must have static IP addresses.

    Note: If you change any interface configurations, you must deploy the changes to the device before establishing HA.
  • Both devices must be synced. If you have pending changes or conflicts detected, see Resolve Configuration Conflicts and Resolve Configuration Conflicts for more information.


    Note


    When you opt to accept changes from or deploy to an FDM-managed HA pair, you are communicating with the active device of the HA pair. This means that configurations and backups are pulled from the active device only.


Smart License Requirements for HA

The following license requirements must be met for both physical and virtual FDM-managed devices:

  • Both devices in an HA pair must have either a registered license, or an evaluation license. If the devices are registered, they can be registered to different Cisco Smart Software Manager accounts, but the accounts must have the same state for the export-controlled functionality setting, either both enabled or both disabled. However, it does not matter if you have enabled different optional licenses on the devices.

  • Both devices within the HA pair must have the same licenses during operation. It is possible to be in compliance on one device, but out of compliance on the other if there are insufficient licenses. If your Smart Licenses account does not include enough purchased entitlements, your account becomes Out-of-Compliance (even though one of the devices may be compliant) until you purchase the correct number of licenses.

Note that if the device is in evaluation mode, you must ensure that the registration status for CDO is the same on the devices. You must also ensure that your selection for participation in the Cisco Success Network is the same. For registered devices, the settings can be different on the units, but whatever is configured on the primary (active) device will either register or unregister the secondary. An agreement to participate in the Cisco Success Network on the primary implies an agreement for the secondary.

If you register the devices to accounts that have different settings for export controlled features, or try to create an HA pair with one unit registered and the other in evaluation mode, the HA join might fail. If you configure an IPsec encryption key with inconsistent settings for export controlled features, both devices will become active after you activate HA. This will impact routing on the supported network segments, and you will have to manually break HA on the secondary unit to recover.

Cloud Services Configuration for HA

Both of the devices within an HA pair must have Send Events to the Cisco Cloud enabled. This feature is available in the FDM UI. Navigate to System Settings and click Cloud Services to enable this feature. Without this option enabled, the HA pair cannot form in CDO and an event description error occurs. See the Configuring Cloud Services chapter of the Firepower Device Manager Configuration Guide of the version you are running for more information.

Create an FDM-Managed High Availability Pair

Before you create an FDM-managed HA pair in CDO, you must first onboard two standalone FDM-managed devices that meet the requirements described in FDM-Managed High Availability Pair Requirements.


Note


To create an HA pair in CDO, both devices must have management interfaces configured. If the devices have data interfaces configure, you must create the HA pair through the FDM console, and then onboard the pair to CDO.


Once you create an FDM-managed HA pair, the primary device is active and the secondary device is standby by default. All configuration changes or deployments are made through the primary device and the secondary device remains in standby mode until the primary unit becomes unavailable.

Note that when you opt to accept configuration changes from or deploy to an FDM-managed HA pair, you are communicating with the active device of the HA pair. Any changes made to the primary device are transferred over the link between the primary and the secondary device. CDO deploys to and accepts changes only from the primary device; thusly, the Inventory page displays a single entry for the pair. Once the deploy occurs, the primary device synchronized any configuration changes to the secondary device.

Simi liar to how CDO communicates with only the active device, when you schedule or opt to back up an FDM-managed HA pair, only the active device is eligible to back up.


Note


If the HA devices experience an issue during the creation process or the HA pair does not result with a healthy status, you must manually break the HA configuration before you attempt to create the pair again.


Procedure

Create an HA pair from two standalone FDM-managed devices with the following procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTDtab and select the device you want to establish as the primary device.

Note

 

CDO does not support creating an HA pair with devices configured with DHCP.

Step 4

In the Management pane, click High Availability.

Step 5

Locate the area for the secondary device and click Select Device, then choose a device from the list of eligible devices.

Step 6

Configure the Failover link.

  1. Click Physical Interfaceand select an interface from the drop-down menu.

  2. Select the appropriate IP Type.

  3. Enter the Primary IP address.

  4. Enter the Secondary IP address.

  5. Enter the Netmask. By default, this value is 24.

  6. If applicable, enter a valid IPSec Encryption Key.

Step 7

Configure the Stateful link. If you want to use the same configuration as the failover link, check the The same as Failover Link checkbox. If you want to use a different configuration, use the following procedure:

  1. Click Physical Interface and select an interface from the drop-down menu. Note that both the primary and secondary device must have the same number of physical interfaces.

  2. Select the appropriate IP Type.

  3. Enter the Primary IP address.

  4. Enter the Secondary IP address.

  5. Enter the Netmask. By default, this value is 24.

Step 8

Click Create in the upper right corner of the screen to finish the wizard. CDO immediately redirects you to the High Availability Status page. From this page you can monitor the status of the HA creation. Note that once the HA pair is created, the Inventory page displays the pair as a single row.

Step 9

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


FDM-Managed Devices in High Availability Page

The FDM-managed in High Availability (HA) management page is a multi-purpose page for FDM-managed devices. This page is only available for devices that are already configured as an HA pair. You can onboard an FDM-managed HA pair or you can create an FDM-managed HA pair from two standalone FDM-managed devices.

If you select a standalone FDM-managed device from the Inventory page, this page acts as a wizard for creating an HA pair. At this time, you must have two FDM-managed devices onboarded to CDO to create a pair. To create an FDM-managed HA pair in CDO, see Create an FDM-Managed High Availability Pair.

If you select an FDM-managed HA pair from the Inventory page, this page acts as an overview page. From here you can view the HA configuration and the failover history, as well as actionable items such as force a failover, edit the failover criteria, and remove the HA link.

High Availability Management Page

To see the High Availability page, use the following procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select a standlalone FDM-managed device or the active FDM-managed device of the FDM-managed HA pair.

Step 4

In the Management pane, click High Availability.


Edit High Availability Failover Criteria

You can edit the failover criteria after the FDM-managed HA pair is created.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the active device of the FDM-managed HA pair.

Step 4

In the Management pane, click High Availability.

Step 5

In the Failover Criteria window click Edit.

Step 6

Make any necessary changes and click Save.

Step 7

Review and deploy the changes now you made to the active device, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Break an FDM-Managed High Availability Pairing

When you break HA, the configured interfaces on the standby device are automatically disabled. The devices may experience a disruption in traffic during this process. After the HA pair is successfully removed you will be redirected from the status page to the High Availability page where you will have the option to create another HA pair with the same primary device.


Note


You cannot deploy to either of the devices until the HA pair is successfully removed.


Break HA with Management Interfaces

When you break HA for a pair that is configure with management interfaces, the break may take 10 minutes or longer to complete and both devices go offline during this process. When the HA configuration is successfully removed, CDO displays both units as standalone devices in the Services & Devices page.

Break HA with Data Interfaces

When you break HA for a pair that is configured with data interfaces, the break may take 20 minutes or more to complete and both of the devices go offline. you must manually reconnect the active device after the HA configuration is removed.

The standby device retains the HA configuration, though, and will become unreachable since it has the same configuration as the active device. You must manually reconfigure the IP interfaces outside of CDO, and then re-onboard the device as a standalone.

Break High Availability

Use the following procedure to remove the HA pairing of two FDM-managed devices:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory and select the active device of the FDM-managed HA pair.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

In the Management pane, click High Availability.

Step 5

Click Break High Availability.

Step 6

CDO removes the HA configuration and both devices are displayed as standalone devices in the Inventory page.

Step 7

Deploy Configuration Changes from Cisco Defense Orchestrator to FDM-Managed Device to deploy the new configuration to both devices.

Step 8

Review and deploy the changes you made to the active device now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Break Out-of-Band High Availability

If you break an FDM-managed HA pair using the FDM interface, the configuration status of the HA pair in CDO changes to Conflict Detected. After you break HA, you must deploy the changes to the primary device through FDM-managed and then resolve the Conflict Detected state in CDO.

After the device is back in the Synced state, you can deploy configuration changes made in CDO to the device.

We do not recommend reverting changes from CDO after breaking HA using the FDM-managed interface.

Force a Failover on an FDM-Managed High Availability Pair

Switch the active and standby devices within an FDM-managed HA pair by forcing a failover. Note that if you recently applied a new certificate to the active device and have not deployed changes, the standby device retains the original certificate and failover will fail. The active and standby devices must have the same certificate applied. Use the following procedure to manually force a failover:

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Select the active device of the FDM-managed HA pair.

Step 5

In the Management pane, click High Availability.

Step 6

Click the options icon .

Step 7

Click Switch Mode. The active device is now on standby, and the standby device is now active.


FDM-Managed High Availability Failover History

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Select the active device of the FDM-managed HA pair.

Step 5

In the Management pane, click High Availability.

Step 6

Click Failover History. CDO generates a window that details the failover history for both the primary and secondary device since the HA pair was formed.

Note

 

Failover history is also displayed in the pair's change log, available from the Inventory page.


Refresh the FDM-Managed High Availability Status

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the FDM-managed device or the FDM-managed HA pair.

Step 4

In the Management pane, click High Availability.

Step 5

Click the options icon .

Step 6

Click Get Latest Status. CDO requests a health status from the primary device.


FDM-Managed Device Settings

Configure an FDM-Managed Device's System Settings

Use this procedure to configure settings on a single FDM-managed device:

Procedure


Step 1

Open the Inventory page.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab and select the FDM-managed device you want to configure the settings. To narrow down your search results and easily find the FDM-managed devices, you can make use of the filter button.

Step 4

In the Management pane at the right, click Settings.

Step 5

Click the System Settings tab.

Step 6

Edit any of these device settings:


Configure Management Access

By default, you can reach the device's management address from any IP address. System access is protected by username and password only. However, you can configure an access list to allow connections from specific IP addresses or subnets only to provide another level of protection.

You can also open data interfaces to allow an FDM-managed device or SSH connections to the CLI. You can then manage the device without using the management address. For example, you could allow management access to the outside interface, so that you can configure the device remotely. The username and password protects against unwanted connections. By default, HTTPS management access to data interfaces is enabled on the inside interface, but it's disabled on the outside interface. For device models that have a default "inside" bridge group, this means that you can make FDM-managed device connections through any data interface within the bridge group to the bridge group IP address (default is 192.168.1.1). You can open a management connection only on the interface through which you enter the device.


Caution


If you constrain access to specific addresses, you can easily lock yourself out of the system. If you delete access for the IP address that you are currently using, and there's no entry for "any" address, you'll lose access to the system when you deploy the policy. Be mindful of this when configuring the access list.


Create Rules for Management Interfaces

Use the following procedure to create rules for managment interfaces:

Procedure

Step 1

Click New Access in the Management Interface section.

  • Protocol. Select whether the rule is for HTTPS (port 443) or SSH (port 22).

  • Allowed Networks. Select the network object that defines the IPv4 or IPv6 network or host that should be able to access the system. To specify "any" address, select any-ipv4 (0.0.0.0/0) and any-ipv6(::/0).

Step 2

Click Save.


Create Rules for Data Interfaces

Use the following procedure to create rules for data interfaces:

Procedure

Step 1

Click New Access in the Data Interface section.

  • Interface. Select the interface on which you want to allow management access.

  • Protocol. Select whether the rule is for HTTPS (port 443), SSH (port 22), or both. You cannot configure HTTPS rules for the outside interface if it's used in a remote access VPN connection profile.

  • Allowed Networks. Select the network object that defines the IPv4 or IPv6 network or host that should be able to access the system. To specify "any" address, select any-ipv4 (0.0.0.0/0) and any-ipv6 (::/0).

Step 2

Click Save.

Step 3

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure Logging Settings

This procedure describes how to enable logging of diagnostic (data) messages, file and malware events, intrusion events, and console events. Connection events are not logged as a result of these settings; they are logged if connection logging is configured on access rules, security intelligence policies, or SSL decryption rules.

Procedure


Step 1

Open an FDM-managed device's settings.

Step 2

On the System Settings page click Logging in the settings menu.

Step 3

Data logging. Slide the Data Logging slider to On to capture diagnostic logging syslog messages. Click the plus button to specify the syslog server object that represents the syslog server that you want to send the events to. (You can also create a syslog server object at this point.) Additionally, select the minimum level of event severity you want to log.

This will send data logging events for any type of syslog message, with your minimum chosen severity level, to the syslog server.

Note

 

CDO doesn't currently support creating a Custom Logging Filter for Data Logging. For finer control of which messages you send to the syslog server, we recommend you define this setting in an FDM-managed device. To do so, log on to an FDM-managed device, and navigate System Settings > Logging Settings.

Tip

 

Do not enable data logging if you are a Cisco Security Analytics and Logging customer unless you forward the data logging events to a syslog server other than the Secure Event Connector. Data events (diagnostic events) are not traffic events. Sending the data events to a different syslog server removes the burden on the SEC from analyzing and filtering them out.

Step 4

File/Malware Log Settings. Slide the slider to On to capture file and malware events. Specify the syslog server object that represents the syslog server that you want to send the events to. You can also create a syslog server object at this point if you have not already.

File and malware events are generated at the same severity level. The minimum level of event severity you select will be assigned to all file and malware events.

File and malware events are reported when a file or malware policy in any access control rule has been triggered. This is not the same as a connection event. Note that the syslog settings for file and malware events are relevant only if you apply file or malware policies, which require the and Malware licenses.

For Cisco Security Analytics and Logging subscribers:

  • If you send events to the Cisco cloud through a Secure Event Connector (SEC), specify an SEC as your syslog server. You will then be able to see these events alongside file policy and malware policy connection events.

  • If you send events directly to the Cisco cloud without an SEC, you do not need to enable this setting. File and malware events are sent if the access control rule is configured to send connection events.

Step 5

Intrusion Logging. Send intrusion events to a syslog server by specifying the syslog server object that represents the syslog server you want to send events to. You can also create a syslog server object at this point if you have not already.

Intrusion events are reported when an intrusion policy in any access control rule has been triggered. This is not the same as a connection event. Note that the syslog settings for intrusion events are relevant only if you apply intrusion policies, which require the license.

For Cisco Security Analytics and Logging subscribers:

  • If you send events to the Cisco cloud through a Secure Event Connector (SEC), specify an SEC as your syslog server. You will then be able to see these events alongside file policy and malware policy connection events.

  • If you send events directly to the Cisco cloud without an SEC, you do not need to enable this setting. Intrusion events are sent to the Cisco cloud if the access control rule is configured to send connection events.

Step 6

Console Filter. Slide the slider to On to send data logging (diagnostic logging) events to a console rather than to a syslog server. Additionally, select the minimum level of event severity you want to log. This will send a data logging event for any type of syslog message, with your chosen severity level.

You will see these messages when you log into the CLI on the console port of your FDM-managed device. You can also see these logs in an SSH session to other FDM-managed device interfaces (including the management interface) by using the show console-output command. In addition, you can see these messages in real time in the diagnostic CLI by entering system support diagnostic-cli from the main CLI.

Step 7

Click Save.

Step 8

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Message Severity Levels

The following table lists the syslog message severity levels.

Level Number

Severity Level

Description

0

emergencies

System is unusable.

1

alert

Immediate action is needed.

2

critical

Critical conditions.

3

error

Error conditions.

4

warning

Warning conditions.

5

notification

Normal but significant conditions.

6

informational

Informational messages only.

7

debugging

Debugging messages only.

Note

 

FDM-managed device does not generate syslog messages with a severity level of zero (emergencies).

Configure DHCP Servers

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server provides network configuration parameters, such as IP addresses, to DHCP clients. You can configure a DHCP server on an interface to provide configuration parameters to DHCP clients on the attached network.

An IPv4 DHCP client uses a broadcast rather than a multicast address to reach the server. The DHCP client listens for messages on UDP port 68. The DHCP server listens for messages on UDP port 67. The DHCP server does not support BOOTP requests.

DHCP clients must be on the same network as the interface on which the server is enabled. There cannot be an intervening router between the server and client, although there can be a switch.


Caution


Do not configure a DHCP server on a network that already has a DHCP server operating on it. The two servers will conflict with each other, and the results will be unpredictable.


Procedure


Step 1

The section has two areas. Initially, the Configuration section shows the global parameters. The DHCP Servers area shows the interfaces on which you have configured a server, whether the server is enabled, and the address pool for the server.

Step 2

In the Configuration section, configure auto configuration and global settings.

DHCP auto configuration enables the DHCP server to provide DHCP clients with DNS server, domain name, and WINS server information obtained from a DHCP client that's running on the specified interface. Typically, you would use auto configuration if you're obtaining an address using DHCP on the outside interface, but you could choose any interface that obtains its address through DHCP. If you cannot use auto configuration, you can manually define the required options.
  1. Click the Enable Auto Configuration slider to On if you want to use auto configuration, and in the From Interface pull-down, select the interface that's obtaining its address through DHCP.

  2. If you do not enable auto configuration, or if you want to override any of the automatically configured settings, configure the following global options. These settings are sent to DHCP clients on all interfaces that host DHCP server.

    1. Primary WINS IP Address, Secondary WINS IP Address. The addresses of the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) servers that clients should use for NetBIOS name resolution.

    2. Primary DNS IP Address, Secondary DNS IP Address. The addresses of the Domain Name System (DNS) servers that clients should use for domain name resolution. Click Apply Umbrella Settings if you want to populate the DNS IP address fields with Cisco Umbrella DNS servers. Clicking the button loads the appropriate IP addresses into the fields.

  3. Click Save.

Step 3

In the DHCP Servers section, either edit an existing server, or click New DHCP Server to add and configure a new server.

  1. Configure the server properties:

    1. Enable DHCP Server. Whether to enable the server. You can configure a server but keep it disabled until you are ready to use it.

    2. Interface. Select the interface on which you will provide DHCP addresses to clients. The interface must have a static IP address; you cannot be using DHCP to obtain the interface address if you want to run a DHCP server on the interface. For bridge groups, you configure the DHCP server on the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI), not the member interfaces, and the server operates on all member interfaces. You cannot configure DHCP server on the Diagnostic interface, configure it on the Management interface instead, on the Device > System Settings > Management Interface page.

    3. Address Pool. Add the single IP address or an IP address range of a DHCP server. The range of IP addresses from lowest to highest that the server is allowed to provide to clients that request an address. The range of IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the selected interface and cannot include: the IP address of the interface itself, the broadcast address, or the subnet network address. Specify the start and end address for the pool, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10.100.10.12-10.100.10.250.

  2. Click OK.

Step 4

Click Save.

Step 5

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure DNS Server

A Domain Name System (DNS) server is used to resolve hostnames to IP addresses. DNS servers are used by the management interface.

Procedure


Step 1

In Primary, Secondary, Tertiary DNS IP Address, enter the IP addresses of up to three DNS servers in order of preference. The primary DNS server is used unless it cannot be contacted, in which case the secondary is tried, and finally the tertiary. Click Apply Umbrella Settings if you want to populate the DNS IP address fields with Cisco Umbrella DNS servers. Clicking the button loads the appropriate IP addresses into the fields.

Step 2

In Domain Search Name, enter the domain name for your network; for example, example.com. This domain gets appended to hostnames that are not fully qualified; for example, serverA becomes serverA.example.com.

Step 3

Click Save.

Step 4

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Management Interface

The management interface is a virtual interface attached to the physical management port. The physical port is named the Diagnostic interface, which you can configure on the Interfaces page with the other physical ports. On virtual FDM-managed devices, this duality is maintained even though both interfaces are virtual.

The management interface has two uses:

  • You can open web and SSH connections to the IP address and configure the device through the interface.

  • The system obtains smart licensing and database updates through this IP address.

If you use the CLI setup wizard, you configure the management address and gateway for the device during initial system configuration. If you use the FDM-managed setup wizard, the management address and gateway remain the defaults.

If necessary, you can change these addresses through an FDM-managed device. You can also change the management address and gateway in the CLI using the configure network ipv4 manual and configure network ipv6 manual commands.

You can define static addresses, or obtain an address through DHCP if another device on the management network is acting as a DHCP server. By default, the management address is static, and a DHCP server runs on the port (except for Virtual FDM-Managed Device, which does not have a DHCP server). Thus, you can plug a device directly into the management port and get a DHCP address for your workstation. This makes it easy to connect to and configure the device.


Caution


If you change the address to which you are currently connected, you will lose access to the FDM-managed device (or the CLI) when you save the changes, as they are applied immediately. You will need to reconnect to the device. Ensure that the new address is valid and available on the management network.


Procedure


Step 1

Configure the management IP address, network mask or IPv6 prefix, and gateway (if necessary) for IPv4, IPv6, or both. You must configure at least one set of properties. Leave one set blank to disable that addressing method.

Step 2

Select Type > DHCP to obtain the address and gateway through DHCP or IPv6 auto configuration. However, you cannot use DHCP if you are using the data interfaces as the gateway. In this case, you must use a static address.

Step 3

Click Save.

Step 4

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Hostname

You can change the device hostname.

Procedure


Step 1

In the Firewall Hostname field, enter a new hostname for the device.

Step 2

Click Save.

Step 3

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure NTP Server

Configure Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to set the time on the system.

Procedure


Step 1

Select whether you want to use your own (manual) or Cisco's time servers.

  • New NTP Server. Enter the fully qualified domain name or IP address of the NTP server you want to use. For example, ntp1.example.com or 10.100.10.10.

  • Use Default.

Step 2

Click Save.

Step 3

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Configure URL Filtering

The system obtains the URL category and reputation database from Cisco Collective Security Intelligence (CSI). These preferences control database updates and how the system handles URLs with unknown category or reputation. You must enable the URL Filtering license to set these preferences.


Caution


You can configure URL Filtering Preferences if you do not have a URL Smart License, but you need the smart license to deploy. You will be blocked from deploying until you add a URL Smart License.


Procedure


Step 1

Enable the applicable options:

  • Click the Enable Automatic Updates slider On to automatically check for and download updated URL data, which includes category and reputation information. After you deploy, the FDM-managed device checks for updates every 30 minutes.

  • Click the Query Cisco CSI for Unknown URLs slider to ON to check the Cisco CSI for updated information on URLs that do not have category and reputation data in the local URL filtering database.

  • URL Time to Live is only in effect if you enable the Query Cisco CSI for Unknown URLs option. This determines how long to cache the category and reputation lookup values for a given URL. When the time to live expires, the next attempted access of the URL results in a fresh category/reputation lookup. A shorter time results in more accurate URL filtering, a longer time results in better performance for unknown URLs. The default selection is Never.

Step 2

Click Save.

Step 3

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Cloud Services

Use the Cloud Services page to manage cloud-based services.


Note


Connecting to the Cisco Success Network and configuring which events are sent to the Cisco cloud are features that can be configured on FDM-managed devices running software versions 6.6 and higher.


Connecting to the Cisco Success Network

By enabling Cisco Success Network, you are providing usage information and statistics to Cisco that are essential for Cisco to provide you with technical support. This information also allows Cisco to improve the product and to make you aware of unused available features so that you can maximize the value of the product in your network.

When you enable the connection, your device establishes a secure connection to the Cisco Cloud so that your device can participate in additional service offerings from Cisco such as technical support services, cloud management and monitoring services. Your device will establish and maintain this secure connection at all times.

Before you begin

To enable Cisco Success Network the device must be enrolled with the cloud using an FDM-managed device. To enroll the device either register the device with Cisco Smart Software Manager (on the Smart Licensing page) or enroll with CDO by entering a registration key.


Attention


If you enable Cisco Success Network on the active unit in a high availability group, you are also enabling the connection on the standby unit.


Procedure

Step 1

Click the Cloud Services tab.

Step 2

Click the Enabled slider for the Cisco Success Network feature to change the setting as appropriate.

Step 3

Click Save.

Step 4

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Sending Events to the Cisco Cloud

You can send events to the Cisco cloud server. From there, various Cisco cloud services can access the events. You can then use these cloud applications, such as Cisco Threat Response, to analyze the events and to evaluate threats that the device might have encountered.

Before you begin

You must register the device with the Cisco Smart Software Manager before you can enable this service.

You can connect to the Cisco Threat Response at https://visibility.amp.cisco.com/ in the US region, https://visibility.amp.cisco.com/ in the EU region. You can watch videos about the use and benefits of the application on YouTube at http://cs.co/CTRvideos. For more information about using Cisco Threat Response with FTD, see Firepower and CTR Integration Guide, which you can find at https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/security/defense-center/products-installation-and-configuration-guides-list.html.

Procedure

Step 1

Click the Cloud Services tab.

Step 2

Click the Enabled slider for the Send Events to the Cisco Cloud option to change the setting as appropriate.

Step 3

When you are enabling the service, you are prompted to select the events to send to the cloud.

  • File/Malware - For any file policies, you have applied in any access control rule.

  • Intrusion Events - For any intrusion policies, you have applied in any access control rule.

  • Connection Events - For access control rules where you have enabled logging. When you select this option, you can also elect to send All Connection Events, or only send the High Priority connection events. High-priority connection events are those related to connections that trigger intrusion, file, or malware events, or that match Security Intelligence blocking policies.

Step 4

Click Save.

Step 5

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


Enabling or Disabling Web Analytics

Enabling web analytics provides anonymous product usage information to Cisco based on page hits. The information includes pages viewed, the time spent on a page, browser versions, product version, device hostname, and so forth. This information can help Cisco determine feature usage patterns and help Cisco improve the product. All usage data is anonymous and no sensitive data is transmitted. You can use CDO to configure this feature on all versions of FDM-managed device.

Web analytics is enabled by default.

Procedure


Step 1

Click the Web Analytics tab.

Step 2

Click the Enable slider for the Web Analytics feature to change the setting as appropriate.

Step 3

Click Save.

Step 4

Review and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.


CDO Command Line Interface

CDO provides users with a command line interface (CLI) for managing , FDM-managed threat defense devices. Users can send commands to a single device or to multiple devices simultaneously.

Using the Command Line Interface

Procedure


Step 1

Open the Inventory page.

Step 2

Click the Devices button abobve the Inventory table.

Step 3

Use the device tabs and filter button to find the device you want to manage using the command line interface (CLI).

Step 4

Select the device.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane, click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

Click the Command Line Interface tab.

Step 7

Enter your command, or commands, in the command pane and click Send. The device's response to the command(s) are displayed below in the "response pane."

Note

 

If there are limitations on the commands you can run, those limitations are listed above the command pane.


Entering Commands in the Command Line Interface

A single command can be entered on a single line or several commands can be entered sequentially on several lines and CDO will execute them in order. The following ASA example sends a batch of commands which creates three network objects and a network object group that contains those network objects.

Entering FDM-managed device Commands: The CLI console uses the base Threat Defense CLI. You cannot enter the diagnostic CLI, expert mode, or FXOS CLI (on models that use FXOS) using the CLI console. Use SSH if you need to enter those other CLI modes.

Work with Command History

After you send a CLI command, CDO records that command in the history pane on the Command Line Interface page. You can rerun the commands saved in the history pane or use the commands as a template:

Procedure


Step 1

On the Inventory page, select the device you want to configure.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 5

Click the clock icon to expand the history pane if it is not already expanded.

Step 6

Select the command in the history pane that you want to modify or resend.

Step 7

Reuse the command as it is or edit it in the command pane and click Send. CDO displays the results of the command in the response pane.

Note

 

CDO displays the Done! message in the response pane in two circumstances:

  • After a command has executed successfully.

  • When the command has no results to return. For example, you may issue a show command with a regular expression searching for a configuration entry. If there is no configuration entry that meets the criteria of the regular expression, CDO returns Done!.


Bulk Command Line Interface

CDO offers users the ability to manage Secure Firewall ASA, FDM-managed Threat Defense, SSH, and Cisco IOS devices using a command-line interface (CLI). Users can send commands to a single device or to multiple devices of the same kind simultaneously. This section describes sending CLI commands to multiple devices at once.

Bulk CLI Interface


Note


CDO displays the Done! message in two circumstances:

  • After a command has executed successfully without errors.

  • When the command has no results to return. For example, you may issue a show command with a regular expression searching for a certain configuration entry. If there is no configuration entry that meets the criteria of the regular expression, CDO returns Done!.


Number

Description

1

Click the clock to expand or collapse the command history pane.

2

Command history. After you send a command, CDO records the command in this history pane so you can return to it, select it, and run it again.

3

Command pane. Enter your commands at the prompt in this pane.

4

Response pane. CDO displays the device's response to your command as well as CDO messages. If the response was the same for more than one device, the response pane displays the message "Showing Responses for X devices." Click X devices and CDO displays all the devices that returned the same response to the command.

Note

 

CDO displays the Done! message in two circumstances:

  • After a command has executed successfully without errors.

  • When the command has no results to return. For example, you may issue a show command with a regular expression searching for a certain configuration entry. If there is no configuration entry that meets the criteria of the regular expression, CDO returns Done!.

5

My List tab displays the devices you chose from the Inventory table and allows you to include or exclude devices you want to send a command to.

6

The Execution tab, highlighted in the figure above, displays the devices in the command that is selected in the history pane. In this example, the show run | grep user command is selected in the history pane and the Execution tab shows that it was sent to 10.82.109.160, 10.82.109.181, and 10.82.10.9.187.

7

Clicking the By Response tab shows you the list of responses generated by the command. Identical responses are grouped together in one row. When you select a row in the By Response tab, CDO displays the response to that command in the response pane.

8

Clicking the By Device tab displays individual responses from each device. Clicking one of the devices in the list allows you to see the response to the command from a specific device.

Send Commands in Bulk

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate the devices.

Step 3

Select the appropriate device tab and use the filter button to find the devices you want to configure using the command line interface.

Step 4

Select the devices.

Step 5

in the Device Actions pane, click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

You can check or uncheck devices you want to send the commands to in the My List field.

Step 7

Enter your commands in the command pane and click Send. The command output is displayed in the response pane, the command is logged in the Change Log, and the command CDO records your command in the History pane in the Bulk CLI window.


Work with Bulk Command History

After you send a bulk CLI command, CDO records that command in the Bulk CLI page history page. You can rerun the commands saved in the history pane or use the commands as a template. The commands in the history pane are associated with the original devices on which they were run.

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate devices.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab and click the filter icon to find the devies you want to configure.

Step 4

Select the devices.

Step 5

Click Command Line Interface.

Step 6

Select the command in the History pane that you want to modify or resend. Note that the command you pick is associated with specific devices and not necessarily the ones you chose in the first step.

Step 7

Look at the My List tab to make sure the command you intend to send will be sent to the devices you expect.

Step 8

Edit the command in the command pane and click Send. CDO displays the results of the command in the response pane.


Work with Bulk Command Filters

After you run a bulk CLI command you can use the By Response filter and the By Device filter to continue to configure the devices.

By Response Filter

After running a bulk command, CDO populates the By Response tab with a list of responses returned by the devices that were sent the command. Devices with identical responses are consolidated in a single row. Clicking a row in the By Response tab displays the response from the device(s) in the response pane. If the response pane shows a response for more than one device, it displays the message "Showing Responses for X devices." Click X devices and CDO displays all the devices that returned the same response to the command.

To send a command to the list of devices associated with a command response, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

Click the command symbol in a row in the By Response tab.

Step 2

Review the command in the command pane and click Send to resend the command or click Clear to clear the command pane and enter a new command to send to the devices and then click Send.

Step 3

Review the responses you receive from your command.

Step 4

If you are confident that the running configuration file on the devices you chose reflects your change, type write memory in the command pane and click Send. This saves your running configuration to the startup configuration.


By Device Filter

After running a bulk command, CDO populates the the Execution tab and the By Device tab with the list of devices that were sent the command. Clicking a row in the By Device tab displays the response for each device.

To run a command on that same list of devices, follow this procedure:

Procedure

Step 1

Click the By Device tab.

Step 2

Click >_Execute a command on these devices.

Step 3

Click Clear to clear the command pane and enter a new command.

Step 4

In the My List pane, specify the list of devices you want to send the command to by checking or unchecking individual devices in the list.

Step 5

Click Send. The response to the command is displayed in the response pane. If the response pane shows a response for more than one device, it displays the message "Showing Responses for X devices." Click X devices and CDO displays all the devices that returned the same response to the command.

Step 6

If you are confident that the running configuration file on the devices you chose reflects your change, type write memory in the command pane and click Send.


Command Line Interface Macros

A CLI macro is a fully-formed CLI command ready to use, or a template of a CLI command you can modify before you run it. All macros can be run on one or more FTD devices simultaneously.

Use CLI macros that resemble templates to run the same commands on multiple devices at the same time. CLI macros promote consistency in your device configurations and management. Use fully-formed CLI macros to get information about your devices. There are different CLI macros that are immediately available for you to use on your FTD devices.

You can create CLI macros for monitoring tasks that you perform frequently. See Create a CLI Macro for more information.

CLI macros are system-defined or user-defined. System-defined macros are provided by CDO and can not be edited or deleted. User-defined macros are created by you and can be edited or deleted.


Note


You can only create macros for a device once it has been onboarded to CDO.


Using the ASA as an example, if you want to find a particular user on one of your ASAs, you could run this command:

show running-config | grep username

When you run the command, you would replace username with the username of the user you are searching for. To make a macro out of this command, use the same command and put curly braces around username.

You can name your parameters anything you want. You can also create the same macro with this parameter name:

The parameter name can be descriptive and must use alphanumeric characters and underlines. The command syntax, in this case the
show running-config | grep
part of the command, must use proper CLI syntax for the device you are sending the command to.

Create a CLI Macro from a New Command

Procedure


Step 1

Before you create a CLI macro, test the command in CDO's Command Line Interface to make sure the command syntax is correct and it returns reliable results.

Note

 
  • For FDM-managed devices, CDO supports only the commands that can be run in FDM's CLI console: show, ping, traceroute, packet-tracer, failover, reboot, and shutdown. See Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Command Reference for a full description of the syntax of those commands.

Step 2

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 3

Click the Devices tab to locate the device.

Step 4

Click the appropriate device type tab and select an online and synced device.

Step 5

Click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

Click the CLI macro favorites star to see what macros already exist.

Step 7

Click the the plus button .

Step 8

Give the macro a unique name. Provide a description and notes for the CLI macro if you wish.

Step 9

Enter the full command in the Command field.

Step 10

Replace the parts of the command that you would want to modify, when you run the command, with a parameter name surrounded by curly braces.

Step 11

Click Create. The macro you create is available for use on all the devices of that type, not just the one you initially specified.

To run the command see, Running CLI Macros on your Device.


Create a CLI Macro from CLI History or from an Existing CLI Macro

In this procedure, you are going to create a user-defined macro from a command you have already run, another user-defined macro, or from a system-defined macro.

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Note

 

If you want to create a user-defined macro from CLI history, select the device on which you ran the command. CLI macros are shared across devices on the same account but not CLI history.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab and select an online and synced device.

Step 4

Click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 5

Find the command you want to make a CLI macro from and select it. Use one of these methods:

  • Click the clock to view the commands you have run on that device. Select the one you want to turn into a macro and the command appears in the command pane.

  • Click the CLI macro favorites star to see what macros already exist. Select the user-defined or system-defined CLI macro you want to change. The command appears in the command pane.

Step 6

With the command in the command pane, click the CLI macro gold star . The command is now the basis for a new CLI macro.

Step 7

Give the macro a unique name. Provide a description and notes for the CLI macro if you wish.

Step 8

Review the command in the Command field and make the changes you want.

Step 9

Replace the parts of the command that you would want to modify, when you run the command, with a parameter name surrounded by curly braces.

Step 10

Click Create. The macro you create is available for use on all the devices of that type, not just the one you initially specified.

To run the command see, Running CLI Macros.


Run a CLI Macro

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab and select one or more devices.

Step 4

Click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 5

In the command panel, click the star .

Step 6

Select a CLI macro from the command panel.

Step 7

Run the macro one of two ways:

  • If the macro has no parameters to define, click Send. The response to the command appears in the response pane. You're done.

  • If the macro contains parameters, such as the Configure DNS macro below, click >_ View Parameters.

Step 8

In the Parameters pane, fill in the values for the parameters in the Parameters fields.

Step 9

Click Send. After CDO has successfully, sent the command and updated the device's configuration, you receive the message, Done!

  • For an FTD, the device's active configuration is updated.

Step 10

After you send the command you may see the message, "Some commands may have made changes to the running config" along with two links.

  • Clicking Write to Disk saves the changes made by this command, and any other change that in the running config, to the device's startup config.

  • Clicking Dismiss, dismisses the message.


Edit a CLI Macro

You can edit user-defined CLI macros but not system-defined macros. Editing a CLI macro changes it for all your FTD devices. Macros are not specific to a particular device.

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select your device.

Step 5

Click Command Line Interface.

Step 6

Select the user-defined macro you want to edit.

Step 7

Click the edit icon in the macro label.

Step 8

Edit the CLI macro in the Edit Macro dialog box.

Step 9

Click Save.

See Run CLI Macros for instructions on how to run the CLI macro.


Delete a CLI Macro

You can delete user-defined CLI macros but not system-defined macros. Deleting a CLI macro deletes it for all your devices. Macros are not specific to a particular device.

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select your device.

Step 5

Click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

Select the user-defined CLI macro you want to delete.

Step 7

Click the trash can icon in the CLI macro label.

Step 8

Confirm you want to remove the CLI macro.


Command Line Interface Documentation

CDO partially supports the command line interface of the FDM-managed device. We provide a terminal-like interface within CDO for users to send commands to single devices and multiple devices simultaneously in command-and-response form. For commands that are not supported in CDO, access the device with a device GUI terminal, such as PuTTy or an SSH Client, and see the CLI documentation for more commands.

Export CDO CLI Command Results

You can export the results of CLI commands issued to a standalone device, or several devices, to a comma separated value (.csv) file so you can filter and sort the information in it however you like. You can export the CLI results of a single device, or many devices at once. The exported information contains the following:

  • Device

  • Date

  • User

  • Command

  • Output

Export CLI Command Results

You can export the results of commands you have just executed in the command window to a .csv file:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, clickInventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device or devices so they are highlighted.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane for the device, click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

In the command line interface pane, enter a command and click Send to issue it to the device.

Step 7

To the right of the window of entered commands, click the export icon .

Step 8

Give the .csv file a descriptive name and save the file to your local file system. When reading the command output on the .csv file, expand all the cells to see all the results of the command.


Export the Results of CLI Macros

You can export the results of macros that have been executed in the command window. Use the following procedure to export to a .csv file, the results of CLI macros executed on one or multiple devices:

Procedure


Step 1

Open the Inventory page.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device or devices so they are highlighted.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane for the device, click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

In the left pane of the CLI window, select the CLI macro favorites star .

Step 7

Click on the macro command you want to export. Fill in any appropriate parameters and click Send.

Step 8

To the right of the window of entered commands, click the export icon .

Step 9

Give the .csv file a descriptive name and save the file to your local file system. When reading the command output on the .csv file, expand all the cells to see all the results of the command.


Export the CLI Command History

Use the following procedure to export the CLI history of one or multiple devices to a .csv file:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device or devices so they are highlighted.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane for the device, click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

Click the Clock icon to expand the history pane if it is not already expanded.

Step 7

To the right of the window of entered commands, click the export icon .

Step 8

Give the .csv file a descriptive name and save the file to your local file system. When reading the command output on the .csv file, expand all the cells to see all the results of the command.


Export the CLI Macro List

You can only export macros that have been executed ed in the command window. Use the following procedure to export the CLI macros of one or multiple devices to a .csv file:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device or devices so they are highlighted.

Step 5

In the Device Actions pane for the device, click >_Command Line Interface.

Step 6

In the left pane of the CLI window, select the CLI macro favorites star .

Step 7

Click on the macro command you want to export. Fill in any appropriate parameters and click Send.

Step 8

To the right of the window of entered commands, click the export icon .

Step 9

Give the .csv file a descriptive name and save the file to your local file system.


CDO Public API

CDO has published its public API and provided you with documentation, examples, and a playground to try things out. The goal of our public API is to provide you with a simple and effective way to perform a lot of what you would normally be able to do in the CDO UI, but in code.

To use this API, you will need to know GraphQL. Their official guide (https://graphql.org/learn/) provides a thorough, light read.

To find the full schema documentation, go to the GraphQL Playground, and click the docs tab on the right side of the page.

You can launch the CDO Public API by selecting it from the user menu.

Create a REST API Macro

Using the API Tool

CDO provides the API Tool interface to execute the FDM-managed device REpresentational State Transfer (REST) Application Programming (API) requests for performing advanced actions on an FDM-managed device. The REST API uses JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) format to represent objects.

The interface provides system-defined or user-defined API macros. System-defined macros are provided by CDO and can not be edited or deleted. User-defined macros are created by you and can be edited or deleted. You can use all the resource groups supported in the Secure Firewall device manager API Explorer.


Note


CDO supports only API endpoints that return JSON.


Assumption

It is assumed that you have a general knowledge of programming and a specific understanding of REST APIs and JSON. If you are new to these technologies, please first read a general guide on REST APIs.

Supported Documents

Supported HTTP Methods

You can use the following HTTP methods only.


Important


A user with the Read-Only role can perform only the GET operation.


Attribute

Description

GET

To read data from the device.

POST

To create new objects for a type of resource. For example, use POST to create a new network object.

PUT

To change the attributes of an existing resource. When using PUT, you must include the entire JSON object. You cannot selectively update individual attributes within an object. For example, use PUT to modify the address contained within an existing network object.

DELETE

To remove a resource that you, or another user, created. For example, use DELETE to remove a network object that you no longer use.

How to Enter a Secure Firewall Threat Defense REST API Request

You can select an FDM-managed device and specify a single command or execute commands that need additional parameters.

If you want to determine the syntax of a REST API request, log on to the device's API Explorer page, such as https://ftd.example.com/#/api-explorer, and click the required resource groups to see the syntax of the command to be executed. For example, https://10.10.5.84/#/api-explorer.

The following figure shows an example of a single REST API request in CDO:

The following figure shows an example of a REST API request that needs additional parameters. You need manually specify the data in the Request Body. If you want to determine the syntax of a command, log on to the device's API Explorer page.


Note


The device must be in the synced state to execute the POST request.


Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Select an FDM-managed device you want to manage using the REST API, and in Device Actions on the right, click API Tool.

Step 5

Select the request method from the drop-down and type/api/fdm/latest/and then the command that you want to execute. If you are executing a POST or PUT command, enter the request body.

Step 6

Click Send. The Response Body shows the response of the executed command.

Important

 

The POST request usually makes changes to the staged configuration on the device. Click Commit Changes in FDM to send the changes to the FDM-managed device.


About FTD REST API Macros

A REST API macro is a fully-formed REST API command ready to use, or a template of a REST API command you can modify before you run it. All REST API macros can be run on one or more FDM-managed devices simultaneously.

Use REST API macros that resemble templates to run the same commands on multiple devices at the same time. REST API macros promote consistency in your device configurations and management. Use fully-formed REST API macros to get information about your devices. There are different REST API macros that are immediately available for you to use on your FDM-managed devices.

You can create REST API macros for tasks that you perform frequently. See Create a REST API Macro for more information.

REST API macros are system-defined or user-defined. System-defined macros are provided by CDO and can not be edited or deleted. User-defined macros are created by you and can be edited or deleted.


Note


You can only create macros for a device once it has been onboarded to CDO.


Create a REST API Macro

Create a REST API Macro from a New Command
Procedure

Step 1

Before you create a REST API macro, test the command in CDO's REST API Interface to make sure the command syntax is correct and it returns reliable results.

Note

 

You can only create macros for a device once it has been onboarded to CDO.

Step 2

Select an FDM-managed device you want to manage using the REST API, and in Device Actions on the right, click API Tool.

Step 3

Click the REST API macro favorites star to see what macros already exist.

Step 4

Click the plus button .

Step 5

Give the macro a unique name. Provide a description and notes for the REST API macro if you wish.

Step 6

Select a Request Method and enter the endpoint URL in the Request Endpoint field. See Cisco Firepower Threat Defense REST API Guide for detailed information.

Step 7

Replace the parts of the command that you would want to modify, when you run the command, with a parameter name surrounded by curly braces.

Step 8

Click OK. The macro you create is available for use on all the devices of that type, not just the one you initially specified.

To run the command see, Run a REST API Macro.


Create a REST API Macro from History or from an Existing REST API Macro

In this procedure, you are going to create a user-defined REST API macro from a command you have already executed, another user-defined macro, or from a system-defined macro.

Procedure

Step 1

Select an FDM-managed device you want to manage using the REST API, and in Device Actions on the right, click API Tool.

Note

 

If you want to create a user-defined macro from REST API history, select the device on which you ran the command. REST API macros are shared across devices on the same account but not REST API history.

Step 2

Find the command you want to make an API macro from and select it. Use one of these methods:

  • Click the clock to view the commands you have run on that device. Double-click to select the one you want to turn into a macro and the command appears in the command pane.

  • Click the API macro favorites star to see what macros already exist. Select the user-defined or system-defined API macro you want to change. The command appears in the command pane.

Step 3

With the command in the command pane, click the API macro gold star . The command is now the basis for a new API macro.

Step 4

Give the macro a unique name. Provide a description and notes for the API macro if you wish.

Step 5

Review the command in the Command field and make the changes you want.

Step 6

Replace the parts of the command that you would want to modify, when you run the command, with a parameter name surrounded by curly braces.

Step 7

Click Create. The macro you create is available for use on all the devices of that type, not just the one you initially specified.

To run the command see, Run a REST API Macro.


Run a REST API Macro

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Click API Tool in the Device Actions pane on the right.

Step 5

In the command panel, click the star to view the REST API macros.

Step 6

Select a REST API macro from the command panel.

Step 7

Run the macro one of two ways:

  • If the macro has no parameters to define, click Send. The response to the command appears in the response pane. You're done.

  • If the macro contains parameters, such as the Create Network Object macro below, click View Parameters.

Step 8

In the Parameters pane, fill in the values for the parameters in the Parameters fields.

Step 9

Click Send.

Note

 

The FDM-managed device's active configuration is updated.


Edit a REST API Macro

You can edit user-defined REST API macros but not system-defined macros. Editing a REST API macro changes it for all your FDM-managed devices. Macros are not specific to a particular device.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Select an FDM-managed device you want to manage using the REST API, and in Device Actions on the right, click API Tool.

Step 5

Select the user-defined macro you want to edit.

Step 6

Click the edit icon in the macro label.

Step 7

Edit the REST API macro in the Edit Macro dialog box.

Step 8

Click Save.

See Run a REST API Macro for instructions on how to run the REST API macro.


Delete a REST API Macro

You can delete user-defined REST API macros but not system-defined macros. Deleting a REST API macro deletes it for all your devices. Macros are not specific to a particular device.

Procedure

Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Select a device and in Device Actions on the right, click API Tool.

Step 5

Select the user-defined REST API macro you want to delete.

Step 6

Click the trash can icon in the REST API macro label.

Step 7

Confirm you want to remove the REST API macro.


About Device Configuration Changes

In order to manage a device, CDO must have its own copy of the device's configuration stored in its local database. When CDO "reads" a configuration from a device it manages, it takes a copy of the device's configuration and saves it. The first time CDO reads and saves a copy of a device's configuration is when the device is onboarded. These choices describe reading a configuration for different purposes:

  • Discard Changes: This action is available when a device's configuration status is "Not Synced." In the Not Synced state, there are changes to the device's configuration pending on CDO. This option allows you to undo all pending changes. The pending changes are deleted and CDO overwrites its copy of the configuration with copy of the configuration stored on the device.

  • Check for Changes: This action is available if the device's configuration status is Synced. Clicking Checking for Changes directs CDO to compare its copy of the device's configuration with the copy of the configuration stored on the device. If there is a difference, CDO immediately overwrites its copy of the device's configuration with the copy stored on the device.

  • Review Conflict and Accept Without Review: If you have enabled Conflict Detection on a device, CDO checks for configuration changes made on the device every 10 minutes. If the copy of the configuration stored on the device has changed, CDO notifies you by displaying the "Conflict Detected" configuration status.

    • Review Conflict: Click Review Conflict allows you to review changes made directly on a device and accept or reject them.

    • Accept Without Review: This action overwrites CDO's copy of a device's configuration with the latest copy of the configuration stored on the device. CDO does not prompt you to confirm the differences in the two copies of the configuration before taking the overwriting action.

Read All: This is a bulk operation. You can select more than one device, in any state, and click Read All to overwrite all the devices' configurations stored on CDO with the configurations stored on the devices.

  • Deploy Changes: As you make changes to a device's configuration, CDO saves the changes you make to its own copy of the configuration. Those changes are "pending" on CDO until they are deployed to the device. When there are changes to a device's configuration that have not been deployed to the device, the device is in the Not Synced configuration state.

    Pending configuration changes have no effect on the network traffic running through the device. Only after CDO deploys the changes to the device do they have an effect. When CDO deploys changes to the device's configuration, it only overwrites those elements of the configuration that were changed. It does not overwrite the entire configuration file stored on the device. Deployments can be initiated for a single device or on more than one device simultaneously.

  • Discard All is an option that is only available after you click Preview and Deploy.... After clicking Preview and Deploy, CDO shows you a preview of the pending changes in CDO. Clicking Discard All deletes all pending changes from CDO and does not deploy anything to the selected device(s). Unlike "Discard Changes" above, deleting the pending changes is the end of the operation.


Note


You can schedule deployments or recurring deployments. See Schedule an Automatic Deployment for more information.


Read All Device Configurations

If a configuration change is made to a device outside of CDO, the device's configuration stored on CDO and the device's local copy of its configuration are no longer the same. You many want to overwrite CDO's copy of the device's configuration with the configuration stored on the device to make the configurations the same again. You can perform this task on many devices simultaneously using the Read All link.

See Reading, Discarding, Checking for, and Deploying Configuration Changes for more information about how CDO manages the two copies of the device's configuration.

Here are three configuration statuses where clicking Read All will overwrite CDO's copy of the device's configuration with the device's copy of the configuration.

  • Conflict Detected-If conflict detection is enabled, CDO polls the devices it manages every 10 minutes for changes made to their configurations. If CDO finds that the configuration on the device has changed, CDO displays a "Conflict detected" configuration status for the device.

  • Synced-If the device is in a synced state, and you click Read All, CDO immediately checks the devices to determine if there have been any changes made to its configurations directly. After clicking Read All, CDO confirms your intent to overwrite its copy of the device's configuration and then CDO performs the overwrite.

  • Not Synced-If the device is in the Not Synced state, and you click Read All, CDO warns you that there are pending changes made to to the device's configuration using CDO and that proceeding with the Read All operation will delete those changes and then overwrite CDO's copy of the configuration with the configuration on the device. This Read All functions like Discard Changes.

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

(Optional) Create a change request label to identify the results of this bulk action easily in the Change Log.

Step 5

Select the devices whose configurations you want to save CDO. Notice that CDO only provides command buttons for actions that can be applied to all the selected devices.

Step 6

Click Read All.

Step 7

CDO warns you if there are configuration changes staged on CDO, for any of the devices you selected, and asks if you want to continue with the bulk reading configurations action. Click Read All to continue.

Step 8

Look at the notifications tab for the progress of the Read All configurations operation. If you want more information about how individual actions in the bulk operation succeeded or failed, click the blue Review link and you will be directed to the Jobs page.

Step 9

If you created and activated a change request label, remember to clear it so that you don't inadvertently associate other configuration changes with this event.


Read Configuration Changes from FDM-Managed Device to CDO

Why Does CDO Read FDM-managed device Configurations?

In order to manage an FDM-managed device, CDO must have its own stored copy of the FDM-managed device's configuration. When CDO reads a configuration from an FDM-managed device, it takes a copy of the FDM-managed device's deployed configuration and saves it to its own database. The first time CDO reads and saves a copy of the device's configuration file is when the device is onboarded. See Reading, Discarding, Checking for, and Deploying Configuration Changes for more information.

Pending and Deployed Changes

Configuration changes made to the FDM-managed device directly through the Firepower Device Manager (FDM) or its CLI are referred to as staged changes on the FDM-managed device until they are deployed. A staged, or pending, change can be edited or deleted without having any affect on traffic running through the FDM-managed device. Once the pending changes are deployed, however, they are enforced by the FDM-managed device and affect traffic running through the device.

Conflict Detected

If you enable Conflict Detection on the device, CDO checks for configuration changes every 10 minutes. If the copy of the configuration stored on the device has changed, CDO notifies you by displaying the "Conflict Detected" configuration status. If you do not have Conflict Detection enabled, or a change has been made to the device's configuration within the 10 minute interval between automatic polling, clicking Check for Changes prompts CDO to immediately compare the copy of the configuration on the device with the copy of the configuration stored on CDO. You can choose to Review Conflict to examine the differences between the device configuration and the configuration saved to CDO, then select Discard Changes to remove the staged changes and revert to the saved configuration or confirm the changes. You can also choose to Accept without Review; this option takes the configuration and overwrites what is currently saved to CDO.

Discard Changes Procedure

To discard configuration changes from the FDM-managed device, follow this procedure:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appopriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device whose configuration is set to Conflict Detected and gives you the link to Revert Pending Changes. The message explains that you can click the link to revert pending changes or you can log on to the device using the local manager FDM and deploy the changes first. You can use filters to find the device in a conflict state.

Caution

 

Clicking the Revert Pending Changes link deletes pending changes on FDM-managed device immediately. You are not given an opportunity to review the changes first.

Step 5

Review the changes on FDM before clicking Revert Pending Changes:

  1. Open a browser window and enter https://<IP_address_of_the_FTD>.

  2. Look for the deployment icon in FDM. It will have an orange circle indicating that there are changes ready to deploy .

  3. Click the icon and review the pending changes:

  • If the changes can be deleted, return to CDO and click "Revert Pending Changes." At this point, the configuration on the FDM-managed device and the copy of the configuration on CDO should be the same. You are done.

  • If you want to deploy the changes to the device, click Deploy Now. Now the deployed configuration on the FDM-managed device and the configuration on stored on CDO are different. You can then return to CDO and poll the device for changes. CDO identifies identifies that there has been a change on the FDM-managed device, and gives you an opportunity to review the conflict. See Conflict Detected-Review Conflict to resolve that state.


If Reverting Pending Changes Fails

Changes to the system databases and security feeds can't be reverted by CDO. CDO recognizes that there are pending changes, attempts to revert them and then fails. To determine if the revert failure is due to pending database updates or security feed updates, log into the device's FDM console. It will have an orange circle indicating that there are changes ready to deploy . Click the deploy button to review the pending changes and deploy them or discard them as is appropriate.

Review Conflict Procedure

To review configuration changes from the FDM-managed device, follow this procedure:

Procedure


Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device whose configuration is marked Conflict Detected and gives you a link to Review Conflict in the Conflict Detected pane on the right.

Step 5

Click Review Conflict.

Step 6

Compare the two configurations presented to you.

Step 7

Take one of these actions:

  • Click Accept to overwrite the last known configuration on CDO with the one found on the device. Note: The entire configuration stored on CDO will be completely overwritten by the configuration found on the device.

  • Click Reject to reject the changes made on the device and replace them with the last known configuration on CDO.

  • Click Cancel to stop the action.

Note

 

You can prompt CDO to immediately check a device for an out-of-band change by clicking Check for Changes while the device is in the Synced state.


Accept Without Review Procedure

To accept configuration changes from the FDM-managed device without reviewing, follow this procedure:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appopriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device whose configuration is marked Conflict Detected and gives you a link to Accept Without Review in the Conflict Detected pane on the right.

Step 5

Click Accept Without Review. CDO accepts and overwrites the current configuration.


Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices

CDO informs you when you have made a configuration change to a device on your tenant, but you have not deployed that change, by displaying an orange dot on the Deploy icon . The devices affected by these changes show the status "Not Synced" in the Devices and Services page. By clicking Deploy, you can review which devices have pending changes and deploy the changes to those devices.


Note


For every new FDM or FTD network object or group that you create and make changes to, CDO creates an entry in this page for all on-prem management centers that are managed by CDO.


This deployment method is available for all supported devices.

You can use this deployment method for single configuration changes or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.

Procedure


Step 1

In the top right corner of the screen, click the Deploy icon .

Step 2

Select the devices with changes you want to deploy. If a device has a yellow caution triangle, you can not deploy changes to that device. Hover your mouse over the yellow caution triangle to find out why you can't deploy changes to that device.

Step 3

(Optional) If you want to see more information about a pending change, click the View Detailed Changelog link to open the change log associated with that change. Click the Deploy icon to return to the Devices with Pending Changes page.

Step 4

(Optional) Create a change request to track your changes without leaving the Devices with Pending Changes page.

Step 5

Click Deploy Now to deploy the changes immediately to the devices you selected. You'll see the progress in the Active jobs indicator in the Jobs tray.

Step 6

(Optional) After the deployment has finished, click Jobs in the CDO navigation bar. You will see a recent "Deploy Changes" job showing the results of the deployment.

Step 7

If you created a change request label, and you have no more configuration changes to associate with it, clear it.


What to do next

Deploy Configuration Changes from CDO to FDM-Managed Device

Why Does CDO Deploy Changes to an FDM-Managed Device?

As you manage and make changes to a device's configuration with CDO, CDO saves the changes you make to its own copy of the configuration file. Those changes are considered staged on CDO until they are deployed to the device. Staged configuration changes have no effect on the network traffic running through the device. Only after CDO deploys the changes to the device do they have an affect on the traffic running through the device. When CDO deploys changes to the device's configuration, it only overwrites those elements of the configuration that were changed. It does not not overwrite the entire configuration file stored on the device.

Like CDO, FDM-managed device has the concept of pending changes and deployed changes. Pending changes on FDM-managed device are the equivalent of staged changes on CDO. A pending change can be edited or deleted without having any affect on traffic running through the FDM-managed device. Once the pending changes are deployed, however, they are enforced by the FDM-managed device and affect traffic running through the device.

Because of FDM-managed devices two step process for editing configuration files, CDO deploys changes to an FDM-managed device slightly differently than it does to other devices it manages. CDO first deploys the changes to FDM-managed device and the changes are in the pending state. Then, CDO deploys the changes on the devices and they become live. Now that the changes have been deployed, they are enforced and affect traffic running through the FDM-managed device. This applies to both standalone and high availability (HA) devices.

Deployments can be initiated for a single device or on more than one device simultaneously. You can schedule individual deployments or recurring deployments for a single device.

Two things will prevent CDO from deploying changes to an FDM-managed device:

  • If there are staged changes on the FDM-managed device. See Conflict Detected for more information on how to resolve this state.

  • CDO does not deploy changes if there are changes in the process of being deployed to the FDM-managed device.

Scheduling Automatic Deployments

You can also configure your tenant to schedule deployments to a single device with pending changes scheduling automatic deployments.

Deploy Changes to a Device

Procedure


Step 1

After you make a configuration change for a device using CDO and save it, that change is saved in CDO instance of the device's configuration.

Step 2

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 3

Click the Devices tab.

Step 4

Click the appropriate device type tab. You should see that the configuration status of the device you made changes to is now "Not synced."

Step 5

Deploy the changes using one of these methods:

  • Select the device and in the Not Synced pane on the right, click Preview and Deploy. On the Pending Changes screen, review the changes. If you are satisfied with the pending version, click Deploy Now. After the changes are deployed successfully, you can view the change log to confirm what just happened.

  • Click the Deploy icon at the top-right of the screen. See Preview and Deploy Configuration Changes for All Devices for more information.


Cancelling Changes

If, when deploying a change from CDO to a device, you click Cancel, the changes you made are not deployed to the device. The process is canceled. The changes you made are still pending on CDO and can be edited further before you finally deploy them to FDM-managed device.

Discarding Changes

If, when previewing changes, you click Discard all, the changes you made, and any other changes any other user made but did not deploy to the device, are deleted. CDO reverts its pending configuration to the last read or deployed configuration before any changes were made.

Bulk Deploy Device Configurations

If you have made changes to multiple devices, for instance by editing a shared object, you can apply those change to all of the affected devices at once:

Procedure


Step 1

In the left pane, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select all of the devices for which you have made configuration changes on CDO. These devices should show "Not Synced" status.

Step 5

Deploy the changes using one of these methods:

  • Click the button at the top-right of the screen to view the Devices with Pending Changes window. This gives you a chance to review the pending changes on the devices you selected before you deploy them. Click Deploy Now to deploy the changes.

    Note

     

    If you see a yellow warning triangle next to a device on the Devices with Pending Changes screen, you cannot deploy a change to that device. Hover your mouse over the warning triangle for information about why changes cannot be deployed to that device.

  • Click Deploy All on the details pane. Review any warnings and click OK. The bulk deployment starts immediately without a review of the changes.

Step 6

(Optional) Click the Jobs icon in the navigation bar to view the results of the bulk deploy.


About Scheduled Automatic Deployments

Using CDO, you can make configuration changes to one or more of the devices it manages and then schedule the changes to be deployed to those devices at a time that is convenient for you.

You can only schedule deployments if you Enable the Option to Schedule Automatic Deployments in the Tenant Settings tab of the Settings page. Once this option is enabled, you can create, edit, or delete scheduled deployments. A scheduled deployment deploys all the staged changes saved on CDO at the date and time set. You can also view and delete scheduled deployments from the Jobs page.

If there were changes made directly to the device that have not been read to CDO, the scheduled deployment will be skipped until that conflict is resolved. The Jobs page will list any instance where a scheduled deployment fails. If Enable the Option to Schedule Automatic Deployments is turned off, all scheduled deployments are deleted.


Caution


If you schedule a new deployment for multiple devices, and some of those devices already have deployments scheduled, the new scheduled deployment overwrites the existing scheduled deployments.



Note


When you create a scheduled deployment, the schedule is created in your local time, not in the time zone of the device. Scheduled deployments do not automatically adjust for daylight savings time.


Schedule an Automatic Deployment

The deployment schedule can be a single event or a recurring event. You may find recurring automatic deployments a convenient way to line up recurring deployments with your maintenance window. Follow this procedure to schedule a one-time or a recurring deployment for a single device:


Note


If you schedule a deployment for a device that has an existing deployment scheduled, the new scheduled deployment overwrites the existing deployment.


Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select one ore more devices.

Step 5

In the Device Details pane, locate the Scheduled Deployments tab and click Schedule.

Step 6

Select when the deployment should occur.

  • For a one-time deployment, click the Once on option to select a date and time from the calendar.

  • For a recurring deployment, click the Every option. You can choose either a daily or once a week deployment. Select the Day and Time the deployment should occur.

Step 7

Click Save.


Edit a Scheduled Deployment

Follow this procedure to edit a scheduled deployment:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select one or more devices.

Step 5

In the Device Details pane, locate the Scheduled Deployments tab and click Edit .

Step 6

Edit the recurrence, date, or time of a scheduled deployment.

Step 7

Click Save.


Delete a Scheduled Deployment

Follow this procedure to delete a scheduled deployment:


Note


If you schedule a deployment for multiple devices, and then change or delete the schedule for some of the devices, the original scheduled deployment for the remaining devices will be preserved.


Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, clickInventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select one or more devices.

Step 5

In the Device Details pane, locate the Scheduled Deployments tab and click Delete .


What to do next

Check for Configuration Changes

Check for Changes to determine if the device's configuration has been changed directly on the device and it is no longer the same as the copy of the configuration stored on CDO. You will see the this option when the device is in the "Synced" state.

To check changes:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device, whose configuration you suspect may have been changed directly on the device.

Step 5

Click Check for Changes in the Synced pane on the right.

Step 6

The behavior that follows is slightly different depending on the device:

  • For FTD device if there has been a change to the device's configuration, you will receive the message:

    Reading the policy from the device. If there are active deployments on the device, reading will start after they are finished.

    • Click OK to continue. The configuration on the device will overwrite the stored configuration on CDO.

    • Click Cancel to cancel the action.

  • For device:

  1. Compare the two configurations presented to you. Click Continue. The configuration labeled Last Known Device Configuration is the configuration stored on CDO. The configuration labeled Found on Device is the configuration saved on the ASA.

  2. Select either:

    1. Reject the out-of-band changes to keep the "Last Known Device Configuration."

    2. Accept the out-of-band changes to overwrite the device's configuration stored in CDO with the configuration found on the device.

  3. Click Continue.


Discard Configuration Changes

Click Discard Changes when you want to "undo" all the undeployed configuration changes you made to a device's configuration using CDO. When you click Discard Changes, CDO completely overwrites its local copy of a device's configuration with the configuration stored on the device.

When you click Discard Changes, your device's configuration status is in a Not Synced state. After you discard your changes, the copy of the configuration on CDO will be the same as the copy of the configuration on the device and the configuration status in CDO will return to Synced.

To discard, or "undo," all of your undeployed configuration changes for a device:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device you have been making configuration changes to.

Step 5

Click Discard Changes in the Not Synced pane on the right.

  • For FDM-managed devices-CDO warns you that "Pending changes on CDO will be discarded and the CDO configuration for this device will be replaced with the configuration currently running on the device." Click Continue to discard your changes.

  • For Meraki devices-CDO deletes the change immediately.

  • For AWS devices-CDO displays what you are about to delete. Click Accept or Cancel.


Out-of-Band Changes on Devices

Out-of-band changes refer to changes made directly on the device without using CDO. These changes may be made using the device's command-line interface over an SSH connection or by using a local manager like the Adaptive Security Device Manager (ASDM) for the ASA, the FDM for the FDM-managed device, or for an On-Prem Firewall Management Center on the On-Prem Firewall Management Center user interface. An out-of-band change causes a conflict between the device's configuration stored on CDO and the configuration stored on the device itself.

Detecting Out-of-Band Changes on Devices

If Conflict Detection is enabled for an ASA, or an FDM-managed device, a Cisco IOS device, or an On-Prem Firewall Management Center, CDO checks the device every 10 minutes searching for any new changes made directly to the device's configuration outside of CDO.

If CDO finds that there are changes to the device's configuration that are not stored on CDO, it changes the Configuration Status of that device to the "Conflict Detected" state.

When CDO detects a conflict, one of two conditions is likely:

  • There have been configuration changes made to the device directly that have not been saved to CDO's database.

  • In the case of an FDM-managed device, there may be "pending" configuration changes on the FDM-managed device that have not been deployed.

  • In the case of an On-Prem Firewall Management Center, there may be changes made, for instance, to objects outside CDO, which are pending to be synchronized with CDO or changes made in CDO which are pending to be deployed to the On-Prem Firewall Management Center.

Synchronizing Configurations Between CDO and Device

About Configuration Conflicts

On the Inventory page, you may see devices or services have the status "Synced," "Not Synced," or "Conflict Detected." To know the status of an On-Prem Firewall Management Center that you manage using CDO, navigate Tools & Services > Firewall Management Center.

  • When a device is Synced, the configuration on CDO) and the configuration stored locally on the device are the same.

  • When a device is Not Synced, the configuration stored in CDO was changed and it is now different that the configuration stored locally on the device. Deploying your changes from CDO to the device changes the configuration on the device to match CDO's version.

  • Changes made to devices outside of CDO are called out-of-band changes. When out-of-band changes are made, you'll see the device state change to "Conflict Detected," if conflict detection is enabled for the device. Accepting the out-of-band changes, changes the configuration on CDO to match the configuration on the device.

Conflict Detection

When conflict detection is enabled, CDO polls the device for the default interval to to determine if a change has been made to the device's configuration outside of CDO. If CDO detects that a change was made, it changes the configuration status for the device to Conflict Detected. Changes made to a device outside of CDO are called "out-of-band" changes.

In the case of an On-Prem Firewall Management Center that is managed by CDO, if there are changes that are staged and the device is in Not Synced state, CDO stops polling the device to check for changes. When there are changes made outside CDO which are pending to be synchronized with CDO and changes made in CDO which are pending to be deployed to the on-prem management center, CDO declares the on-prem management center to be in the Conflict Detected state.

Once this option is enabled, you can configure how often conflicts or OOB changes are detected per device. See Schedule Polling for Device Changes for more information.

Enable Conflict Detection

Enabling conflict detection alerts you to instances where changes have been made to a device outside of CDO.

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab.

Step 3

Select the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device or devices for which you want to enable conflict detection.

Step 5

In the Conflict Detection box at the right of the device table, select Enabled from the list.


Automatically Accept Out-of-Band Changes from your Device

You can configure CDO to automatically accept any change made directly to a managed device by enabling auto-accept changes. Changes made directly to a device without using CDO are referred to as out-of-band changes. An out-of-band change creates a conflict between the device's configuration stored on CDO and the configuration stored on the device itself.

The auto-accept changes feature is an enhancement to conflict detection. If you have auto-accept changes enabled on your device, CDO checks for changes every 10 minutes to determine if there have been any out-of-band changes made to the device's configuration. If there have been configuration changes, CDO automatically updates its local version of the device's configuration without prompting you.

CDO will not automatically accept a configuration change if there are configuration changes made on CDO that have not yet been deployed to the device. Follow the prompts on the screen to determine your next action.

To use auto-accept changes, you first enable the tenant to display the auto-accept option in the Conflict Detection menu on the Inventory page; then, you enable auto-accept changes for individual devices.

If you want CDO to detect out-of-band changes but give you the option to accept or reject them manually, enable Conflict Detection instead.

Configure Auto-Accept Changes

Procedure


Step 1

Log in to CDO using an account with Admin or Super Admin privileges.

Step 2

In the left pane, click Settings > General Settings

Step 3

In the Tenant Settings area, click the toggle to Enable the option to auto-accept device changes. This enables the Auto-Accept Changes menu option to appear in the Conflict Detection menu on the Inventory page.

Step 4

Open the Inventory page and select the device for which you want to automatically accept out-of-band changes.

Step 5

In the Conflict Detection menu, select Auto-Accept Changes in the drop-down menu.


Disabling Auto-Accept Changes for All Devices on the Tenant

Procedure


Step 1

Log-in to CDO using an account with Admin or Super Admin privileges.

Step 2

Navigate Settings > General Settings

Step 3

In the Tenant Settings area, disable the "Enable the option to auto-accept device changes" by sliding the toggle to the left so it shows a grey X. This disables Auto-Accept Changes option in the Conflict Detection menu and disables the feature for every device on your tenant.

Note

 

Disabling "Auto-Accept" will require you to review each device conflict before you can accept it into CDO. This includes devices previously configured to auto-accept changes.


Resolve Configuration Conflicts

This section provides information about resolving configuration conflicts that occur on the device.

Resolve the Not Synced Status

Use the following procedure to resolve a device with a "Not Synced" Configuration Status:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Note

 

For an On-Prem Firewall Management Center, navigate Tools & Services > Firewall Management Center and select the FMC that is in Not Synced state and continue from Step 5.

Step 2

In the left pane, click Security Devices > All Devices.

Step 3

Click the Devices tab to locate the device or the Templates tab to locate the model device.

Step 4

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 5

Select the device reported as Not Synced.

Step 6

In the Not synced panel to the right, select either of the following:

  • Preview and Deploy... -If you want to push the configuration change from CDO to the device, preview and deploy the changes you made now, or wait and deploy multiple changes at once.

  • Discard Changes -If you do not want to push the configuration change from CDO to the device, or you want to "undo" the configuration changes you started making on CDO. This option overwrites the configuration stored in CDO with the running configuration stored on the device.


Resolve the Conflict Detected Status

CDO allows you to enable or disable conflict detection on each live device. If Conflict Detection is enabled and there was a change made to the device's configuration without using CDO, the device's configuration status will show Conflict Detected.

To resolve a "Conflict Detected" status, follow this procedure:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Note

 

For an On-Prem Firewall Management Center, navigate Tools & Services > Firewall Management Center and select the FMC that is in Conflict Detected state and continue from Step 4.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device reporting the conflict and click Review Conflict in the details pane on the right.

Step 5

In the Device Sync page, compare the two configurations by reviewing the highlighted differences.

  • The panel labeled "Last Known Device Configuration" is the device configuration stored on CDO.

  • The panel labeled "Found on Device" is the configuration stored in the running configuration on the ASA.

Step 6

Resolve the conflict by selecting one of the following:

  • Accept Device changes: This will overwrite the configuration and any pending changes stored on CDO with the device's running configuration.

    Note

     

    As CDO does not support deploying changes to the Cisco IOS devices outside of the command line interface, your only choice for a Cisco IOS device will be to select Accept Without Review when resolving the conflict.

  • Reject Device Changes: This will overwrite the configuration stored on the device with the configuration stored on CDO.

Note

 

All configuration changes, rejected or accepted, are recorded in the change log.


Schedule Polling for Device Changes

If you have Conflict Detection enabled, or if you Enable the option to auto-accept device changes from the Settings page,CDO polls the device for the default interval to determine if a change has been made to the device's configuration outside of CDO. You can customize how often CDO polls for changes per device. These changes can be applied to more than one device.

If there is no selection configured for a device, the interval is automatically configured for "tenant default".


Note


Customizing the interval per device from the Inventory page overrides the polling interval selected as the Default Conflict Detection Interval from the General Settings page.


After you enable Conflict Detection from the Inventory page or Enable the option to auto-accept device changes from the Settings page, use the following procedure to schedule how often you want CDO to poll your devices:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the appropriate device type tab.

Step 4

Select the device or devices for which you want to enable conflict detection.

Step 5

In the same area as Conflict Detection, click the drop-down menu for Check every and select the desired polling interval:


Schedule a Security Database Update

This section provides information about scheduling a security database update on the device.

Create a Scheduled Security Database Update

Use the following procedure to create a scheduled task to check and update the security databases for an FDM-managed device:

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Select a device.

Step 5

In the Actions pane, locate the Security Database Updates section and click theadd + button.

Note

 

If there is an existing scheduled task for the selected device, click the edit icon to create a new task. Creating a new task will overwrite the existing one.

Step 6

Configure the scheduled task with the following:

  • Frequency . Choose for the update to occur daily, weekly, or monthly.

  • Time. Choose the time of day. Note that the time displayed is UTC.

  • Select Days. Choose which day(s) of the week you want the update to occur.

Step 7

Click Save.


The device's Configuration Status will change to "Updating Databases".

Edit a Scheduled Security Database Update

Use the following procedure to edit an existing scheduled task to check and update the security databases for an FDM-managed device.

Procedure


Step 1

In the navigation bar, click Inventory.

Step 2

Click the Devices tab to locate your device.

Step 3

Click the FTD tab.

Step 4

Select a device.

Step 5

In the Actions pane, locate the Security Database Updates section and click the edit icon .

Step 6

Edit the scheduled task with the following:

  • Frequency . Choose for the update to occur daily, weekly, or monthly.

  • Time. Choose the time of day. Note that the time displayed is UTC.

  • Select Days. Choose which day(s) of the week you want the update to occur.

Step 7

Click Save.

Step 8

The device's Configuration Status will change to "Updating Databases".


Update FDM-Managed Device Security Databases

By updating the security databases on an FDM-managed device, you are updating the following: SRUs (intrusion rules), security intelligence (SI), vulnerability databases (VDB), and geolocation databases. If you opt into updating the security databases through the CDO UI, note that all of the mentioned databases are updated; you cannot select which databases you want to update.

Please note that security database updates cannot be reverted.


Note


When you update the security databases, some packets may be dropped or pass uninspected. We recommend you schedule your security database updates during a maintenance window.


Update FDM-Managed Device Security Database While Onboarding

When you onboard an FDM-managed device to CDO, part of the onboarding process allows you to Enable scheduled recurring updates for databases. This option is checked by default. When enabled, CDO immediately checks for and applies any security updates as well as automatically schedules the device to check for additional updates. You are able to modify the date and time of the scheduled task after the device is onboarded.

We recommend enabling the automatic scheduler during the onboarding process to regularly check for and apply security database updates. This way your device will always be up to date. To update the security databases while onboarding your FDM-managed device, see Onboard an FDM-Managed Device with a Registration Key.


Note


If you onboard your device with the registration key method, the device must not be registered with a smart license. We recommend registering an license. As an alternative method, you can onboard your device using the device's username, password, and IP address.


Update FDM-Managed Device Security Database After Onboarding

After an FDM-managed device is onboarded to CDO, you can configure a device to check for security database updates by scheduling an update. You can modify this scheduled task at any time by selecting the device the update is scheduled for. See Schedule a Security Database Update for more information.

Workflows

Device licenses

Cisco Defense Orchestrator cannot update the security databases if there is no license. We recommend that your FDM-managed device has at least an license.

If you are onboarding a device that has no license, this does not inhibit CDO from onboarding the device. Instead, the device will experience a Connectivity status of "insufficient licenses". To resolve this issue, you must apply the correct licenses through the FDM-managed device UI.


Note


If you onboard an FDM-managed device and opt in to schedule future security database updates and the device does not have a registered license, CDO still creates the scheduled task but does not trigger the task until the appropriate licenses have been applied and the device is successfully synchronized.


Security database updates are pending in FDM

If you update the security databases through the FDM-managed device UI, and you have conflict detection enabled on your device, CDO detects the pending update as a conflict.


Note


If you onboard your FDM-managed device and opt to schedule the updates, CDO automatically updates the security databases as well as any other pending changes to the stored configuration during the next deploy. does not have to be a configuration deploy


Device has OOB changes, or staged changes, during a security database update

If you schedule a security database update for an FDM-managed device that has out of band (OOB) changes, or staged changes that have not been deployed, CDO only checks and updates the security databases. CDO does not deploy OOB or staged changes.

Device already has a scheduled task to update the security databases

Each device can only have one scheduled task. If the device already has a scheduled task to update the security databases, creating a new one overwrites it. This applies to tasks that are created in either CDO or an FDM-managed device.

No security database updates available

If there are no updates available, CDO does not deploy anything to the device.

Security database updates for FDM-managed High Availability (HA) pair

Security database updates are applied only to the primary device of an HA pair.